TM 5-5065 Le Roi Compressor, 1954

TM 5-5065
DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY TECHNICAL MANUAL
COMPRESSOR
AIR
TRUCK-MOUNTED
GASOLINE-DRIVEN
210 CFM
LE ROI MODEL
210G1
DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY
AUGUST 1954
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Do not remove any guards, shields or screens while the compressor is operating.
protection which these items are designed to provide.
Doing so removes the
Do not lubricate or adjust any assembly or part while the compressor is operating.
Do not play with compressed air. Air at the pressure developed by this compressor can put out eyes, burst ear
drums, and cause other serious injuries.
Check safety valves each day to see that they are working properly. An overcharged air receiver has as much
destructive force as a small bomb.
*TM 5-5065
C2
TECHNICAL MANUAL
COMPRESSOR, AIR, TRUCK MOUNTED, GASOLINE DRIVEN,
210 CFM LE ROI MODEL 210G1
TM 5-5065
CHANGES NO. 2
HEADQUARTERS,
WASHINGTON, D.C., 12 August 1963
TM 5-5065, 11 August 1954, is changed as follows:

Page 3. Paragraph 1.
c. (Added) Report all deficiencies in this manual on DA Form 2028. Submit recommendations for changes,
additions, or deletions to the Commanding Officer, U.S. Army Mobility Support Center, ATTN: SMOMS-MM, P.O. Box
119, Columbus 16, Ohio. Direct communication is authorized.
2. Record and Report Forms
(Superseded)
a. DA Form 2258 (Depreservation Guide of Engineer Equipment).
b. for other record and report forms applicable to operator, organizational, field, and depot maintenance, refer to TM
38-750.
Note. Applicable forms, excluding Standard Form 46, which is carried by the operator, shall be
kept ion a canvas bag mounted on the equipment.
Page 18. Paragraph 6d(2). Delete before-operation and substitute: daily preventive maintenance.
Page 29. Paragraph 30a, line 1. Delete before-operation and substitute: daily preventive maintenance
Page 29. Paragraph 30j. Rescinded.
Page 29. Paragraph 31f. Rescinded.
Page 38.
44. General
(Superseded)
To insure that the air compressor is ready for operation at all times, it must be inspected systematically, so that defects
may be discovered and corrected before they result in serious damage or failure. The necessary Preventive Maintenance
Services to be performed are listed and descried in paragraphs 45 and 47. The item numbers indicate the sequence of
minimum inspection requirements. Defects discovered during operation of the unit shall be noted for future correction,
*This change supersedes TB 5-5065-1, dated 3 February 1954.
TAGO 256B-Aug. 700-478-63
11
to be made as soon as operation has ceased. Stop operation immediately if a deficiency is noted during operation which
would damage the equipment if operation were continued. All deficiencies and shortcomings will be recorded, together
with the corrective action taken, on DA Form 2404 at the earliest possible opportunity.
45. Daily Preventive Maintenance Services
(Superseded)
This paragraph contains an illustrated tabulated listing of preventive maintenance services which must be performed
by the operator. The item numbers are listed consecutively and indicate the sequence of minimum requirements. Refer to
Figure 16.1 for the Daily Preventive Maintenance Services.
Page 42. Paragraph 47.

47. Quarterly Preventive Maintenance Services
(Superseded)
a. This paragraph contains an illustrated tabulated listing of preventive maintenance services which must be
performed by Organizational Maintenance personnel at quarterly intervals. A quarterly interval is equal to 3 calendar
months, or 250 hours of operation, whichever occurs first.
b. The item numbers are listed consecutively and indicate the sequence of minimum requirements. Refer to Figure
16.2 for the Quarterly Preventive Maintenance Services.
Page 254. Paragraph 6. Delete "TB 5-5065-1, Preventive Maintenance Services", and "TM 5-505, Maintenance of
Engineer Equipment".
Add: TM 38-750
The Army Equipment Record

System and Procedures.
APPENDIX IV. Page 3. Paragraph 3. (As changed by C 1)

3. Comments and Suggestions
(Superseded)
Suggestions and recommendations for changes to the Basic Issue Items List will be submitted on DA Form 2028 to
the Commanding Officer, U.S. Army Mobility Support Center, ATTN: SMOMS-MM, P.O. Box 119, Columbus, Ohio,
48216. Direct communication is authorized.
TAGO 256B
Figure 16.1 (Added). Daily preventive maintenance services.
TAGO 256B
ITEM
10
11
PAR REF
TRUCK FUEL TANK. Add fuel as required
12
AIR COMPRESSOR BATTERIES. Tighten loose cables and mountings. Remove

corrosion. Check for cracks and leaks. Fill to 3/8 inch above plates. Clean venthole in filler
cap before installing. In freezing weather run engine a minimum of I hour after adding
eater. (Weekly)
FIRE EXTINGUISHER. Inspect for broken seal.
13
AIR COMPRESSOR FUEL TANK. Add fuel as required.
14
FAN BELT. Check for worn, frayed. or cracked belt.
15
AIR COMPRESSOR RADIATOR. Proper coolant level is 2 inches below filler neck.
16
GENERATOR BELT. Check for worn, frayed. or cracked belt.
17
AIR COMPRESSOR OIL LEVEL GAGE. Add oil as indicated by level gage.
Reference current L.O.
18
AIR HOSES AND REELS. Check hoses for worn or frayed conditions. (Weekly)
19
AIR COMPRESSOR CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTS. Check for damage, with the unit
operating, check for proper operation. Normal operating readings for
instruments are as follows;
Ammeter
Plus side of 0
Air pressure gage
90 to 100 psi
Oil pressure gage
15 to 100 psi
Water temperature gage
180Q to 215F
20
TRUCK CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTS. Check for damage, with the unit operating
check for proper operation. Normal operating readings for instruments are
as follows:
Ammeer
Plus side of 0
160e to 180F
Oil pressure gage
30 to 40. psi
Air pressure gage
100 to 105 psi
Reference T19-8022.
8
28
NOTE 1. OPERATION During operation observe for any unusual noise or

vibration.
NOTE 2. FIRE EXTINGUISHER. inspect for broken seal.
NOTE 3. AIR SYSTEM ODRAINCOCKS. Drain condensate.
MSC 5065/16.1
Figure 16.1. Continued.
TAGO 256B
Figure 16.2 (Added). Quarterly preventive maintenance services.
TAGO 256B
ITEM
8
PAR REF
DRIVE BELTS. Proper adjustment is a deflection of 1/2 inch midway between
crankshaft pulley and fan pulley. Replace worn, frayed or cracked belts. Reference
TM9-8022.
RADIATOR. Proper coolant level is 2 inches below filler neck Tighten loose mounting
and connections. Replace a defective radiator. Replace frayed or cracked hose.
Remove obstructions in the air passages. Reference TM9-8022
10
TRUCK COMPRESSOR DRIVE BELT. Proper adjustment is a deflection of 1/2 inch

midway between crankshaft pulley and compressor pulley. Replace worn, frayed, or
cracked belt. Reference TM9-022.
11
WINCH AND CABLE. Tighten loose mounting. Replace worn or frayed cable.
Reference TM9-8022. Add oil as indicated by level plug Reference LO-8022.
12
LIGHTS AND REFLECTORS. Replace burned-out lamps. Replace defective lights

and reflectors. Reference TM9-8022.
13
AIR COMPRESSOR. Clean and oil air strainer.

connections. Reference TM9 8022.
14
TIRES AND WHEELS. Replace cut or excessively worn tires. Proper tire highway
pressure is 70 psi, cross country is 35 psi. and in mud, snow, and sand is 15 psi.
Replace damaged wheel. Reference TM9-8022.
15
DIFFERENTIALS. Check for leaks and damage. Add oil as indicated at level plug
Reference L09-8022.
16
TRUCK BATTERIES. Tighten loose cables and mountings. Remove corrosion. Fill to
3/8 inch above plates. Clean venthole in filler cap. In freezing weather run engine
minimum of 1 hour after adding water. Replace a cracked or leaking battery.
Reference TM9-8022.
17
TRANSMISSION AND TRANSFER CASE. Check for leaks and damage. Add oil as
indicated by level plugs. Reference L09-8022.
18
TRUCK FUEL TANK. Add fuel as required. Tighten loose mounting. Replace a
leaking fuel tank. Replace defective cap gasket. Clean clogged vent. Reference TM98022.
19
AIR COMPRESSOR BATTERIES, Tighten loose cables end mounting. Remove

corrosion. Fill to 3/8 inch above plates. Clean venthole in filler cap
before installing. In freezing weather run engine minimum of 1 hour after
adding eater. Replace a cracked or leaking battery
90
20
FIRE EXTINGUISHER. Inspect for broken seal. Inspect for full charge by
shaking for sound and weight.
33
AIR COMPRESSOR FUEL TANK. Add fuel as required. Replace a leaking fuel tank
Replace a defective cap gasket. Clean cap vent. Clean fuel screen.
73
Tighten loose mounting and
Figure 16.2--Continued
TAGO 256B
ITEM
22
AFTERCOOLER. Clean clogged air passages. Tighten loose mounting. Replace

defective aftercooler.
PAR REF
117
23
UNLOADED PILOT. Adjust if necessary. Proper adjustment is to load at 90

psi and to unload at 100 psi. Replace detective unloader pilot.
107
108
24
FAN BELT. Proper adjustment is a deflection of 3/4 to 1 inch midway between

crankshaft pulley and fan pulley. Replace worn, frayed or cracked belt.
85
25
AIR COMPRESSOR RADIATOR. Proper coolant level is 2 inches below filler neck.
Tighten loose mounting and connections. Replace a defective radiator. Replace frayed or
cracked hose. Remove obstructions in the air passages. Correct cap pressure rating is 3
1/4 to 4 1/4 lb.
88
26
GENERATOR BELT. Proper adjustment is a deflection of 1/2 inch midway

between fan pulley and crankshaft pulley Replace worn, frayed, or cracked belt.
92
27
AIR COMPRESSOR DISTRIBUTOR, Replace pitted or burned points. Proper point

gap adjustment is 0.020 inch.
95
28
FUEL BOWL. Drain sediment. Replace defective fuel pump.
75
29
AIR COMPRESSOR OIL LEVEL GAGE.. Add oil as indicated by level gage.
Reference L05-5065
30
SPARK PLUGS AND WIRING. Replace spark plugs that have cracked insulators and
burned electrodes. Clean and set spark plug gaps for 0.023 to 0.028 inch. Torque spark
plugs to 30 ft-lb. Replace leads which are frayed or broken. Clean and tighten lead
connections.
31
AIR HOSES. Replace worn or frayed hoses.
112
32
SAFETY VALVE. Proper setting for safety valve is 120 to 125 psi. Replace a
defective valve.
114
33
AIR RECEIVER. Check for leaks and damage. Replace defective service valves
and piping.
114
34
Replace
AIR COMPRESSOR CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTS. Tighten loose mounting.

102
defective instruments. With the unit operating check for proper operation. Normal
operating readings for instruments are as follows:
Ammeter
Plus side of 0
Air pressure gage
90 to 100 psi
Oil pressure gage
15 to 100 psi
180. to 215F
96
Figure 16.2. -Continued
TAGO 256
ITEM
35
PAR REF
TRUCK CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTS. Tighten loose Mounting. Replace defective
instruments. With the unit operating check for proper operation. Normal
operating readings for instruments are as follows:
Ammeter
Plus side of 0
water temperature gage
160 to 180F
Oil pressure gage
30 to 40 psi
Air pressure gage
100 to 105 psi
Reference TM9-B022
NOTE 1. OPERATIONAL TEST. During operation observe for any unusual noise or
vibration.
NOTE 2. ADJUSTMENTS. Make ill necessary adjustments during operational test.
NOTE 3. FIRE EXTINGUISHER. Inspect for broken seal. Inspect for condition, full
charge, proper working condition. Weigh the fire extinguisher (CO2) and subtract from
this weight the empty weight (stamped on the valve body). It the resulting net weight
(stamped on the extinguisher) has decreased 10S or lore, the cylinder should be
replaced or recharged.
NOTE 4. AIR SYSTEM DRAINCOCKS. Drain condensate.

MSC 5065/16.2
Figure 16.2-Continued.
TAGO 256
By Order of the Secretary of the Army:

EARLE G. WHEELER,
General, United States Army,
Chief of Staff.
Official:
J. C. LAMBERT,
Major General, United States Army,
The Adjutant General.
Distribution:
Active Army:
USASA (2)
USA Mob Spt Cen (36)
DCSLOG (1)
ESCO (10)
CNGB (1)
Fld Comd, DASA (8)
TSG (1)
USACOMZEUR (2)
CofEngrs (3)
USAREUR Engr Sup Con Agcy
CSigO (1)
(10)
CofT (1)
USAREUR Engr Proc Cen (2)
USA MaintBd) MA (1)
MAAG (1)
USAARTYBD (2)
JBUSMC (1)
USAARMBD (2)
Units organized under following
USAIB (2)
TOEs (2 copies each except
USARADBD (2)
as indicated):
USAAESBD (2)
5-5
5-147
USAAVNBD (2)
5-6
5-155
USCONARC (5)
5-7
5-156
OS Maj Comd (5) except
5-15
5-157
USARJ (10)
5-16
5-177
MDW (1)
5-17
5-225
Armies (2)
5-25
5-226
Corps (2)
5-26
5-227
USA Corps (2)
5-27
5-237 (5)
Div (2)
5-35
5-262 (5)
Engr Bde (1)
5-36
5-267 (1)
USMA (2)
5-37
5-278 (5)
Svc Colleges (2)
5-38
5-279
Br Svc Sch (2) except
5-45
5-600
USAES (100)
5-46
5-625
GENDEP (OS) (10)
5-47
5-626
Engr Dep (OS) (10)
5-48
5-627
Army Dep (2)
5 -4
7-100
USA Trans Tm1 Comd (2)
5-78
11-25
Army Tmls (1)
5-96
11-27
USAMC (5)
5-97
17-100
USAMOCOM (2)
5-115
29-52 (1)
USAOSA (2)
5-117
29-56
Div Engr (2)
5-118
29-57
Engr Dist (2)
5-127
37-100
USAERDL (3)
5-129
39-51
Engr Fld Maint Shops (2)
5-137
39-61
Engr Cen (5)
5-145
57-100
AMS (S)
5-146
Chicago Engr Proc Ofc (10)
NG: State AG (3).
USAR: Same a Active Army except allowance is one copy to each unit.
For explanation of abbreviations used see AR 82050.
TAGO 256B
* U.S. GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE : 1984 O - 421-647 (10408)

9
TM 5-5065
C1
TECHNICAL MANUAL
COMPRESSOR, AIR, TRUCK MOUNTED, GASOLINE DRIVEN, 210 CFM LE ROI MODEL 210G1
TM 5-5065
CHANGES No. 1
HEADQUARTERS,
WASHINGTON 25, D. C., 28 August 1961
TM 5-5065, 11 August 1954, is changed as follows:
TAGO 1244-B-September
11
APPENDIX IV (Added)
BASIC ISSUE ITEMS LIST
Section I. INTRODUCTION
1. General
st
Section II lists the accessories, tools, and publications required in 1 echelon maintenance and operation, initially
issued with, or authorized for the air compressor.
2. Explanation of Columns
a. Source Codes. The information provided in each column is as follows;

(1) Technical services. The basic number of the Technical service assigned supply responsibility for the item is
shown. Those spaces with no number shown are Corps of Engineers supply responsibility. Other technical
service basic numbers are10Quartermaster Corps
12Adjutant Generals Corps
(2) Source. The selection status and method of supply are indicated by the following code symbols:
(a) Papplied to repair parts which are high mortality parts; procured by technical services, stocked in
and supplied from the technical service depot system; and authorized for use at indicated
maintenance echelons.
(b) P1applied to repair parts which are low mortality parts; procured by technical services, stocked only
in and supplied from technical service key depots, and authorized for installation at indicated
maintenance echelons.
(3) Maintenance. The lowest maintenance echelon authorized to use, stock, install, or manufacture the part is
indicated by the following code symbol:
st
nd
OOrganizational Maintenance (1 and 2 Echelons)
b. federal Stock Numbers. When a Federal stock number is available for a part, it will be shown in this column, and
used for requisitioning purposes.
c. Description.
(1) The item name and a brief description of the part are shown.
TAGO 1244-B
(2) A five-digit Federal supply code for manufacturers and/or other technical services is shown in parentheses
followed by the manufactures part number. This number will be used for requisitioning purposes when no
Federal stock number is indicated in the Federal stock number column.
Example: (08645) 86453.
(3) The letters GE, shown in parentheses immediately following the description, indicate General Engineer
supply responsibility for the part.
d. Unit of Issue. Where no abbreviation is shown in this column, the unit of issue is each.
e. Expendability. Those items classified as nonexpendable are indicated by letters NX are expendable.
f. Quantity Authorized. This column lists the quantities of repair parts, accessories, tools, or publications authorized
for issue to the equipment operator or crew as required.
g. Quantity Issued With Equipment. This column lists the quantities of repair parts, accessories, tools, or
publications that are initially issued with each item of equipment. Those indicated by an asterisk are to be requisitioned
through normal supply channels as required.
h. Illustrations. This column is subdivided into two columns which provide the following information:
(1) figure Number. Provides the referenced number for the part shown in the illustration.
(2) Item number. Provides the referenced number for the part shown in the illustration.
3. Comments and Suggestions
Suggestions and recommendations for changes to the basic issue items list will be submitted on DA Form 2028 to the
Commanding General, U.S. Army Engineer Maintenance Center, ATTN: EMCM, Corps of Engineers, P.O. Box 119,
Columbus 16, Ohio. Direct communication is authorized.
TAGO 1244-B
Section II. BASIC ISSUE ITEMS LIST

Source codes
Federal stock No.

Technical
service
Source
Maintenance
Description
Unit of
issue
Recoverability
Quantity
issued
with
equipment
Expendability
Quantity
authorized
----------
1
1
(*)
(*)
(*)
Illustration
Fig.
No.
Item
No.
GROUP 26-ACCESSORIES, PUBLICATIONS,

TEST EQUIPMENT AND TOOLS
2602.1-ACCESSORIES
10
-----------
7520-559-9618
CASE, MAINTENANCE AND OPERATIONAL MANUALS: cotton-duck, water repellent, mildew resistant.
--------
2602.2-COMMON TOOLS
10
10
P
P
O
O
------------- 5120-204-0972
------------- 5120-277-9491
10
------------- 5120-240-5328
KEY SET, SOCKET HEAD SCREW-----------------------------------------------------SCREWDRIVER FLAT TIP: wood handle flared tip, 1/4-------------- ---------------in. w, 4 in. Ig blade.
WRENCH, OPEN END, ADJUSTABLE: single head,------------------------------15/16 in. jaw opening, 8 in. Ig.
2602.4-PUBLICATIONS
12------.------------------------------------------------------------------------- DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY LUBRICATION-------------------------------------ORDER LO 5-5065.

12--------------------------------------------------------------------------------DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY OPERATOR, OR- -----------------------------------ORGANIZATIONAL MAINTENANCE REPAIR PARTS
AND SPECIAL TOOL LISTS TM 5-4310-238-20P.
TAGO 1244-B
12
12
----------------------------------------------------------------------- DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY TECHNICAL BULLETIN TB 5-5065-1.

---------------------------------------------------------------------- DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY TECHNICAL MANUAL TM 5-5065.
GROUP 76-FIRE FIGHTING EQUIPMENT
------------------------
---------- -------------
See
note.
7603-FIRE EXTINGUISHERS
P1
---------------- 4210-288-8269
P1
---------------- 4210-555-8837
EXTINGUISHER, FIRE VAPORIZING LIQUID:

---------- ------------gal capacity; w/wall bracket (GE).
EXTINGUIISHER, FIRE MONOBROMOTRIFLUORO--------- -------------METHANE: charged, hand shatterable cylinder, penetrating seal valve, stored pressure, w/bracket, 2.75 lb
(HALON-1301) MIL SPEC E-52031 (GE).
Note: Requisition CTC/CO2 extinguishers until t
Depot stocks are exhausted
TAGO 1244-B
5
APPENDIX V (Added)
MAINTENANCE ALLOCATION CHART
1. General
The maintenance allocation chart lists all maintenance and repair operations for the various echelons.
2. Maintenance
Maintenance is any action taken to keep material in a serviceable condition or to restore it to serviceability when it
is unserviceable. Maintenance of materiel includes the following;
a. Service. To clean, to preserve, and to replenish fuel and lubricants.

b. Adjust. To regulate periodically to prevent malfunction.
c. Inspect. To verify serviceability and to detect incipient mechanical failure by scrutiny.
d. Test. To verify serviceability and to detect incipient mechanical failure by use of special equipment such as gages,
meters, and other test devices.
e. Replace. To substitute serviceable assemblies, subassemblies, and parts for unserviceable components.
f. Repair To restore an item to serviceable condition through correction of a specific failure or unserviceable
condition. This function includes but is not limited to, inspecting, cleaning, preserving, adjusting, replacing, welding,
riveting, and straightening.
g. Overhaul. To restore an item to completely serviceable condition as prescribed by serviceable condition as
prescribed by serviceability standards developed and published by heads of technical services. This is accomplished
through employment of the technique of Inspect and repair only as necessary (IROAN). Maximum utilization of
diagnostic and test equipment is combined with minimum disassembly of the item during the overhaul process.
3. Explanation of columns
a. Functional Group. The functional group is a numerical group set up on a functional basis. The applicable
functional grouping indexes are taken from the Corps of Engineers functional grouping indexes, and appear on the
maintenance allocation chart in their correct numerical sequence. These indexes are normally set up according to their
proximity to each other and their function.
TAGO 1244-B
b. Component and Related Operation. This column contains the functional index grouping heading, subgroup
headings, -and a brief description of the part starting with the noun name It also designates the operation to be performed
such as service, adjust, inspect, test. replace, repair, and overhaul.
c. Echelon Maintenance.
(1) First echelon First echelon maintenance is that maintenance performed by the user or operator of the
equipment, such as servicing, cleaning, lubricating, and limited adjustments. It also includes removal and
replacement of items to accomplish servicing and lubricating.
(2) Second echelon Second echelon maintenance is that maintenance performed by trained personnel
provided for that purpose in the using organization, such as replacement of all items in column 2, limited
parts fabrication from bulk material, adjustments, and repair of assemblies, components, and end items that
can be accomplished without extensive disassembly.
(3) Third echelon Third echelon maintenance is that maintenance performed by specially trained units in direct
support of the using organization, such as replacement of all items in columns 2 and 3, repair assemblies,
components, and end items, and fabricate parts from bulk material.
(4) Fourth echelon. Fourth echelon maintenance is that maintenance performed by units organized as
semifixed or permanent shops to serve lower echelon maintenance within a geographical area, such as
replacement of items in columns 2, 3, and 4, repair end items, overhaul assemblies, components, and
fabricate general use common hardware and parts.
(5) Fifth echelon. Fifth echelon maintenance is that maintenance authorized to overhaul assemblies,
components, end items, and replacement of all parts in columns 2, 3, 4, and 5 d. Symbol X The symbol X in
the appropriate column indicates the lowest echelon responsible for performing that particular maintenance
operation, but does not necessarily indicates repair parts will be stocked at that level e. Remarks. The
remarks column is used to explain why maintenance, that would normally be done at a lower echelon, is
moved to a higher echelon because of some peculiarity in the construction of the end item
d. Symbol X. The symbol X in the appropriate column indicates the lowest echelon responsible for performing that
particular maintenance operation, but does not necessarily indicates repair parts will be stocked at that level.
e. Remarks. The remarks column is used to explain why maintenance, that would normally be done at a lower
echelon, is moved to a higher echelon because of some peculiarity in the construction of the end item.
TAGO 1244B
MAINTENANCE ALLOCATION CHART

Function
group
01
0100
0101
0102
0103
Echelons of maintenance
1
2
3
4
5
Components and related operation
Remarks
ENGINE.
Engine Assembly.
Engine Assembly:
Service-------------------------------------------------------------------------------X
Inspect--------------------------------------------------------- ------------------------ X
Test--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------X ----------------------Compression.
Replace---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------X
Repair------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- X
Overhaul----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- X
Crankcase, Block, Cylinder Head
Head, Cylinder.
Replace---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- X
Gasket, cylinder head
Replace---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- X
Sleeve, cylinder
Replace---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------X
Crankshaft.
Bearings
Replace---------------------------------------------------------------- ------------------------------- X
Crankshaft
Replace ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- X
Repair-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- X
Metalize, resize,
Seals:
aline, etc.
Replace---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------X
Flywheel Assembly
TAGO 1244-B
0104
0105.1
0105.2
0105.3
0105.5
Flywheel assembly:
Repair------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Pistons, Connecting Rods.
Piston assembly:
Replace------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Repair -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Rod assembly:
Replace------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ -----------------Repair--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Valves.
Guides, springs:
Replace---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------X
Valves, seats:
Replace--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- X
Repair-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -- X
Rocker Arms, Tappets.
Gasket:
Replace----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- X
Rocker Arms:
Adjust ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ X
Replace---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------X
Repair-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------X
Camshafts.
Bearings:
Replace-----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Camshaft:
Replace------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Timing Gears.
Seal:
Replace -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Gears, Timing
Replace------------------------------------------------------------------------------ -------------------------
X --------- Ring gear.
X
X
X
X
---- ---------- Reface.
X
X
X
X
TAGO 1244-B
Function
group
0106.1
0106.2
0106.5
0106.6
0108
0109.1
03
0301
1
2
3
4
5
Remarks
Oil Pump.
Pump assembly:
Replace----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- X
Repair------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- X
Oil Filters.
Filter, engine oil elements:
Replace------------------------------------------------------ ---------------------------------- X
Crankcase Ventilation.
Breather assembly, engine:
Service------------------------------------------------------------------------------X
Replace---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- X
Oil Pan, Lines, Level Gage.
Lines, (external):
Replace --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------X ----------------------- Fabricate.
Manifolds.
Gaskets:
Replace---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- X
Accessory Drive.
Gears:
Replace .-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ---------------- X
Bushings:
Replace ..--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -------- X
FUEL SYSTEM.
Carburetor.
Carburetor assembly:
Service---------------------------------------------- -----------------------------X
Adjust -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- X
TAGO 1244-B
10
0302.4
0304
0306
3008
0308 .4
0312
04
0401
Replace --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------X
Repair ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------X ---- ----------Fuel Pump, Gasoline.
Pump assembly, fuel:
Service------------------------------------------------------- -----------------------X ----------------------------Replace---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- X
Air Cleaner.
Cleaner, air, engine:
Service ------------------------------------------------------------------------------X -----------------------------Gaskets, cover, air cleaner:
Replace------------------------------------------------------------------------------X
Tanks, Lines, Fittings.
Tank, fuel:
Service------------------------------------------------------------------------------X
Repair -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------X
Line assembly:
Replace---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- X ----------------------Engine Speed Governor.
Governor assembly:
Adjust------------------------------------------------------------------------------ --X
Replace------------------------------------------------------------------------------X
Repair-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- X
Governor Controls.
Rod assembly:
Replace--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------X
Accelerator, Throttle, or Choke Controls.
Choke control:
Replace ------------------------------------------------------------------------- --------------- X
EXHAUST SYSTEM.
Muffler and Pipes.
Cap, exhaust pipe:
Replace------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- X
Install kit.
Clean bowl.
Clean element.
Fabricate.
TAGO 1244-B
11
Function
group
05
0501
0503
0504
1
2
3
4
5
Remarks
COOLING SYSTEM.
Radiator.
Radiator, engine cooling:
Service--------------------------------------------------------------------------X
Repair----------------------------------------------- --------------------------------------------X
Cap, radiator:
Replace .------------------------------------------------------------------------X
Shutter assembly:
Repair -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- X
Cylinder, control, air:
Replace------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ X
Repair---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ----- X
Filter assembly, radiator shutter:
Service-----------------------------------------------------------------------X
Replace-------------------------------------- --------------------------------------------X
Repair ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------X
Shutterstat:
Replace ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ X
Repair -------------------------------------------- ------------------------------------------------ X
Lines and Fittings, Hoses, Pipes, Clamps.
Hoses:
Replace---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- X
Lines:
Replace---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- X ----------------------- Fabricate.
Water Pump.
Pump assembly:
Replace------- -------------------------------------------------------------------------------X
TAGO 1244-B
12
0505
06
0601
0602
0603
Repair------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- X
Fan Assembly.
Fan, engine, cooling:
Replace ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- X
Guard, fan:
Replace---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- X
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM (ENGINE AND VEHICULAR).
Generator.
Generator assembly:
Service-------------------------------- ---------------------------------------------------------- X
Test---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- X
Replace---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- X
Repair -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------X --- ------------ Install kit.
Belt, V:
Adjust---------------------------------------------------------------------------------- -------- X
Replace----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- X
Generator Regulator.
Regulator, engine generator:
Test--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------X
Adjust------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- X
Replace ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- X
Starter.
Starter, engine, electrical:
Service----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- X
Test--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------X
Replace ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- X
Repair-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- X --- ----------- Install kit.
Solenoid relay:
Replace---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- X
Leads:
Replace---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- X ---------------------- Fabricate.
TAGO 1244-B
13
Function
group
0604.1
0604.6
0607
1
2
3
4
5
Distributor.
Distributor assembly:
Service----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- X
Adjust------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- X
Replace----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- X
Repair -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Ignition Coil: Wiring, Spark Plugs.
Coil assembly:
Replace---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Plugs, spark:
Service------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ X
Adjust ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ X
Replace---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- X
Wiring:
Replace---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- X
Instrument or Engine Control Panel.
Ammeter:
Replace---------------------------------------- ------------------------------------------------ X
Meter, time totalizing, electric:
Replace---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- X
Switches:
Replace---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- X
Light assembly:
Replace---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- X
Bulbs:
Replace ------------------------------- ---------------------------------------- -----X
Remarks
---- ----------- Install kit.
TAGO 1244-B
14
0612
0615
15
1501
17
1701.1
1703
1708
Leads:
Replace---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------X --- ----------- Fabricate.
Batteries.
Battery, storage:
Service .--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------X
Test --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------X
Replace ---------------------------------------------------------------------------- ----------- X
Leads:
Replace ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- X
Radio Suppression.
Strap, bonding:
Replace------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ ----- X
Capacitor:
Replace----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- X
FRAME.
Frame Assembly.
Frame, compressor:
Replace---------------------------------- ------------------------------------------------------------------------ X
BODY; CAB; HOOD; HULL.
Fenders, Sand Shields, Running Boards.
Running board:
Replace -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- X
Doors; Hatches; Hood.
Door, hood, top:
Replace ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- X
Stowage Racks, Boxes, Straps.
Box, tool:
Re------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ X
Brackets:
Replace----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- X
Supports:
Replace----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- X
TAGO 1244-B
15
Function
group
22
2210
47
4701.2
4703.1
4705
4708
4709
1
2
3
4
5
Remarks
MISCELLANEOUS BODY, CHASSIS OR HULL AND ACCESSORY
Data Plates and Instruction Holders.
Plates, instruction:
Replace------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ X
Plates, identification (C.O.E.):
Replace ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------X
GAGES (NONELECTRICAL); WEIGHING AND MEASURING DEVICES.
Tachometers.
Drive assembly, tachometer:
Replace------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ X
Repair--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- X
Oil Pressure Gages.
Gage, oil pressure:
Replace---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- X
Line:
Replace---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- X ----------------------- Fabricate.
Fuel Gages (Quantity).
Gage, fuel level:
Replace-------------------------------------------------- -------------------------------------- X
Temperature Gages.
Thermometer, indicating:
Replace---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- X
Pressure Gages.
Gages, air pressure:
Replace---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- X
Line assembly:
Replace .-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------X ----------------------- Fabricate.
TAGO 1244-B
16
50
5000
5001
5005.1
5008
5009.1
5009.3
PNEUMATIC EQUIPMENT.
Air Compressor Assembly.
Gasket and seal kit:
Replace ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ X
Crankcase, Block, Cylinder Head.
Gasket, head:
Replace------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ X
Valves, Springs, Seats, Guides.
Valve assembly, compressor:
Replace----------------------------------------------------------------------------- ------- X
Repair--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- X
Gaskets:
Replace------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- X
Seats:
Replace ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ X
Air Intake.
Air cleaner:
Service--------------------------------------------------------------------------X
Gaskets:
Replace ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- X
Unloader Pilot.
Valve, relief, unloader pilot:
Replace------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ X
Repair--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- X
Lines:
Replace------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ X ---------------------- Fabricate.
Unloader Valves; Compressor Intake.
Valve, check and bleeder:
Replace ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ X
Lines:
Replace------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ X -----------------------Fabricate.
TAGO 1244-B
17
Function
group
5009.5
5009.6
5010
5012
5013
5014
5015.1
1
2
3
4
5
Remarks
Filters, Traps, Cleaners, and Strainers.
Air cleaner, control line:
Service------------------------------------------------------------------------------X
Replace --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------X
Lines and Fittings.
Lines:
Replace .-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------X ----------------------- Fabricate.
Compressor Cooling.
Aftercooler, pressure tank:
Replace---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------X
Throttling Devices.
Slowdown assembly:
Replace --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------X
Repair X---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------X
Hose Reel.
Reel, hose:
Replace --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------X
Adapter, air hose:
Replace---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- X
Air Receiver.
Receiver, air:
Service-----------------------------------------------------------------------------X
Discharge Lines, Fittings, Manifolds.
Hose, rubber, air:
Replace----------------------------------------------------------------------------X
Repair-------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------X
----------------------- Fabricate.
TAGO 1244-B
18
76
7603
FIRE FIGHTING EQUIPMENT.

Fire Extinguishers.
Extinguisher, fire:
Replace --------------------------------------------------------------------------
X
TAGO 1244-B
19
BY ORDER OF THE SECRETARY OF THE, ARMY:

G. H. DECKER,
General, United States Army.
Chief of Staff.
Official:
R. V. LEE,
Tie Adjutant General.
Distribution :
Active Army:
USASA (2)
DCSLOG (1)
CNGB (1)
Tech Stf, DA (1) except
Cof Engrs (3)
Army Maint Bd (1)
USCON ARC (3)
USAARTYBD (2)
USAARMBD (2)
USAIB 2
USARADBD (2)
USAABELCTBD (2)
USAAVNBD (2)
ARADCOM
ARADCOM Rgn (2)
OS Maj Comd (5) except
USASETATAF (2)
USARJ (10)
MDW (1)
Armies (2)
Corps (2)
Div (2)
Engr Bde (1)
Svc Colleges (2)
Br Svc Sch (2) except
USAES (100)
USMA (2)
GENDEP (2) except
Schenectady GENDEP (4)
Atlanta GENDEP (4)
Utah GENDEP (4)
Memphis GENDEP (4)
Sharpe GENDEP (4)
Engr Sec, GENDEP (10)
Engr Dep (10) except
Granite City Engr Dep (14)
USA Trans Tml Comd (2)
Army Tml (1)
OSA (2)
Engr Dist (2) except
Buffalo Engr Dist (1)
Chicago Engr Dist (1)
Detroit Engr Dist (1)

Alaska Engr Dist (1)
Los Angeles Engr Dist (1)
New Orleans Engr Dist (1)
New York Engr Dist (1)
Louisville Engr Dist (1)
Pittsburgh Engr Dist (1)
San Francisco Engr Dist (1)
Omaha Engr Dist (1)
Seattle Engr Dist (1)
Kansas City Engr Dist (1)
Baltimore Engr Dist (1)
Ft Worth Engr Dist (1)
Eastern Ocean Engr Dist (1)
Philadelphia Engr Dist (1)
Rock Island Engr Dist (1)
St Louis Engr Dist (1)
St Paul Engr Dist (1)
Div Engr (2) except
Lower Miss Valley Div Engr
(none)
North Central Div Engr (none
Engr Fld Maint Shops (2)
Engr Dep Maint Shops (2)
USAERDL (3)
Engr Cen (5)
AMS (3)
USA Engr Proc Ofc (10)
EMC (26)
ESCO (10)
Fld Comd, DASA (8)
AFSSC (1)
USACOMZEUR (2)
USAREUR Engr Sup Con Agcy (10)
USAREUR Engr Proc Cen (2)
USA Corps (l)
MAAG (1)
JBUSMC (1)
Units org under fol TOEs:
(2 copies each UNOINDC)
5-5
5-6
TAGO 1244-B
20
5-7
5-15
5-16
5-17
5-35
5-36
5-37
5-38
5-45
5-46
5-47
5-48
5-54
5-78
5-96
5-97
5-115
5-117
5-118
5-129
5-225
5-226
5-227
5-237 (5)
5-262 (5)
5-267 (1)
5-278 (5)
5-279
5-376
5-377
5-600
5-625
5-626
5-627
11-25
11-27
29-52 (1)
29-56
29-57
39-51
39-61
NG: State AG (3).

USAR: Same as Active Army except allowance is one copy to each unit.
For explanation of abbreviations used, see AR 320-50.
* U.S. GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE : 1984 0 - 421-647 (10414)

TAGO 1244-B
21
Technical Manual
No. 5-5065
*TM 5-5065
Washington 25, D. C., 11 August, 1954
COMPRESSOR, AIR, TRUCK MOUNTED, GASOLINE DRIVEN,

210 CFM LE ROI Model 210GI
CHAPTER
1.
Section I.
II.
CHAPTER
2.
Section I.
II.
III.
IV.
CHAPTER
V.
3.
Section I.
II.
III.
IV.
V.
VI.
VII.
VIII.
IX.
X.
XI.
XII.
XIII.
CHAPTER
4.
Section I.
II.
III.
IV.
V.
VI.
VII.
VIII.
IX.
Paragraphs
INTRODUCTION
General....................................................................................................................1-2
Description and data................................................................................................3-5
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
Service upon receipt of equipment ......................................................................... 6, 7
Controls and instruments ............... .......................................................................8-28
Operation under usual conditions .........................................................................29-31
Operation of material used in conjunction
with air compressor.................. ............................................................................ 32, 33
Operation under unusual conditions......................................................................34-37
ORGANIZATIONAL MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
Organizational tools and equipment ......................................................................38-40
Lubrication and painting............... .........................................................................41-43
Preventive maintenance services..........................................................................44-47
Trouble shooting....................................................................................................48-64
Radio suppression.................................................................................................65-69
Fuel System...........................................................................................................70-78
Cooling system..................... .................................................................................79-88
Electrical system....................................................................................................88-99
Instrument panel..................................................................................................100-103
Pressure control system ......................................................................................104-110
Air receiver and aftercooler .................................................................................111-117
Engine-compressor .............................................................................................118-126
Housing ..............................................................................................................127-130
MATERIEL USED IN CONJUNCTION WITH AIR
COMPRESSOR
Paving Breaker ....................................................................................................131-135
Clay digger............................................................................................................36-140
Wood drill ............................................................................................................141-145
Rock drill...............................................................................................................146-10
Nail driver........... .................................................................................................151-155
Circular saw ........................................................................................................156-160
Chain saw............................................................................................................161-165
Grease gun kit .....................................................................................................166-170
Pneumatic tool accessories.................................................................................171-175
*This manual supersede TM 5-5065. 13 March 1953.

1
Page
5
6
18
20
30
32
32
36
36
40
52
57
60
69
81
99
106
117
126
139
142
145
146
149
151
153
156
159
162
CHAPTER
5.
FIELD AND DEPOT

MAINTENANCE
Paragraph
Section I.
II.
III.
IV.
V.
VI.
VII.
VIII.
IX.
X.
XI.
XII.
XIII.
XIV.
XV.
CHAPTER
6.
Section I.
II.
Appendix
I.
Appendix
II.
Section I.
II.
Appendix
III.
INDEX
Introduction......................................................................................................... 176, 177

Tools and equipment .......................................................................................... 178, 179
Fuel pump............................................................................................................180-183
Carburetor ...........................................................................................................184-187
Shutterstat ...........................................................................................................188-192
Water pump .........................................................................................................193-195
Generator and voltage regulator......................................................................... 196, 197
Starting motor and magnetic switch ................................................................... 198, 199
Distributor and coil...............................................................................................200-204
Governor..............................................................................................................205-208
Air Receiver .........................................................................................................209-212
Engine-compressor .............................................................................................213-225
Tool boxes and running boards ..........................................................................226-229
Unit spring mounting ..........................................................................................230-233
Engineering data ...................... ..........................................................................234-235
Page
165
165
167
171
177
182
183
198
205
213
217
218
243
248
249
SHIPMENT, LIMITED STORAGE AND DEMOLITION TO PREVENT ENEMY USE

Shipment and limited storage ............................................................................. 236, 237
Demolition of air compressor to prevent
enemy use ...........................................................................................................238-241
REFERENCES ............................ ..........................................................................
IDENTIFICATION OF REPLACABLE PARTS .......................................................
Standard Hardware ................................................................................................
Parts List.................................................................................................................
ON-EQUIPMENT TOOLS ......................................................................................
................................................................................................................................
2
251
253
256
258
258
275
311
312
CHAPTER 1
INTRODUCTION
Section I. GENERAL
1. Scope
a. This manual is for the use of personnel to whom this air compressor is issued, and contains information on the
operation, organizational maintenance, and field and depot maintenance of the compressor as well as a description of the
major units and their functions in relation to other components of the materiel. It applies only to the Le Roi Model 210G1
compressor.
b. Supply manuals, technical manuals and other publications applicable to the equipment covered by this manual are
listed in Appendix I. Appendix II tabulates the replaceable parts available for the equipment. Appendix III lists the tools
and spare parts issued with and carried on or with the equipment.
2. Record and Report Forms
Maintenance record forms listed and described in the following subdivisions will be used in the maintenance of this
equipment.
a. DD Form 110, Vehicle and Equipment Operational Record. This form is used by equipment operators for
reporting the accomplishment of daily preventive maintenance services, and for reporting any equipment deficiencies
observed during operation.
b. Standard Form 91, Operators Report of Motor Vehicle Accident. One copy of this form is kept with the equipment
at all times. In case of an accident resulting in injury or property damage, Form No. 91 is filled out immediately (or as
promptly thereafter as is practical) by the operator.
c. DA Form 464, Work Sheet for Preventive Maintenance and Technical Inspection of Engineer Equipment. This
form is used by personnel of the using organization and higher echelons for reporting the results of preventive
maintenance services and technical inspections.
d. DA Form 460, Preventive Maintenance Roster. This form is used for scheduling preventive maintenance services
at prescribed intervals.
e. DA Form 478, MWO and Major Unit Assembly Replacement Record-Organizational Equipment File. Major
repairs or rebuilding, replacement of major unit assemblies, and accomplishment of equipment modifications are recorded
on this form.
f. DA Form 468, Unsatisfactory Equipment Report. This form is used for reporting manufacturing, design, or
operational defects in the materiel, with a view to correcting such defects; it is also used for recommending modifications
of the materiel. Form 468 is not used for reporting failures, isolated materiel defects, or malfunctions of materiel resulting
from fair wear and tear or accidental damage. Form 468 is not used to report issue of parts and equipment, or for
reporting replacements and/or repairs.
g. DD Form 6, Report of Damaged or Improper Shipment. This form is used for reporting damages incurred in
shipment.
h. DA Form 9-81, Exchange Part or Unit Identification Tag. This form is used to accomplish the direct exchange of
unserviceable parts for serviceable parts.
i. DA Form 811, Work Request and Job Order. This form is used to request work done by higher echelon
organizations.
j. DA Form 867, Status of Modification Work Order. This form is used to maintain records of all modification work
performed on equipment.
k. DA Form 5-13. Spot Check Inspection Report of Organizational Maintenance of Engineer Equipment.
Organizations having engineer field maintenance responsibility use this form for reporting the results of semiannual spot
check inspections.
l. DA Form 5-14. Annual Technical Inspection Report of Engineer Equipment. Organizations having engineer field
maintenance responsibility use this form for reporting the results of annual technical inspections.
Section II. DESCRIPTION AND DATA
3. Description
a. General Information. The Le Roi truck-mounted air compressor Model 210G1 (fig. 1) is a self-contained unit
complete with all controls, switches and indicators necessary for normal operation. The engine-compressor is completely
inclosed in a sheet metal housing (fig. 2). Doors in the housing (fig. 1) provide access to all parts of the engine,
compressor, and instrument panel. A weather cap mounted on the engine exhaust pipe prevents the entrance of moisture
into the engine. The basic engine-compressor is set in a steel frame with neoprene vibration dampers to alleviate
vibrations. The entire unit is mounted on a 2 1/2-ton, 6 x 6 truck. Hose reels (fig. 3), valves, and instruction plates are
located at the rear of the compressor.
4
Figure 1. Air component mounted on truck.

5
Figure 2. 3/4 left-front view of air compressor.

6
Figure 3. 3/4 right-rear view of air compressor.

7
b. Engine-Compressor.
(1) The basic engine-compressor is a four-piston engine and a four-piston compressor. All eight pistons are
connected to a single crankshaft in the V-type crankcase. Power from the engine bank is transmitted
through the crankshaft to compress air in the compressor bank.
(2) The crankshaft is-mounted in five main bearings. Drilled holes from each main bearing journal to the
adjacent half of the crankpins permit oil to pass from the main bearings to the connecting rod bearings.
(3) Full pressure lubrication is supplied by a gear type pump mounted on the front main bearing cap. The
accessory drive, rocker arms, and all main bearings are lubricated and no other lubrication needs to be
supplied to the internal parts of the engine or compressor banks. The lubricating oil supply is filled through
the combination oil-fillercap and crankcase breather located in the engine bank saluter head cover. Two
bypass filters in the oil pan keep the lubricating oil clean.
(4) The ignition and electric starting system has been radio suppressed to prevent noise disturbances which
would interfere with proper reception of radio signals or which would permit detection of the compressor
location by receivers.
(5) The engine bank has four wet-sleeve type cylinders of 499 cubic inch displacement with a valve-in-head
designed for maximum fuel economy and low operating costs. Both exhaust and intake valves are stellitefaced and each have stellite-faced inserts with positive-type valve rotators to increase valve life.
(6) The compressor bank also has four wet-sleeve type cylinders. Above each cylinder, in the compressor
cylinder head, is a compressor valve assembly. Free air is admitted through the dry-type air cleaners and
the intake valve part of the assembly by the action of the piston on its downward stroke. As the piston
moves up from bottom dead center the suction valve is closed. When the pressure in the cylinder rises
slightly above that in the discharge manifold, the discharge valve port will open allowing air in the cylinder to
flow into the compressor discharge manifold. The valve assembly is connected to an automatic operating
pressure control system.
c. Pressure Control System.

(1) To maintain a constant supply of air, the compressor operates in a "loading and unloading cycle" controlled
by the pressure control system. Components of the pressure control system include the intake valve
unloader, unloader pilot, slow-down assembly, and the check and bleed valve.
(2) When air pressure drops to 90 psi in the air receiver, the pressure control system will "load" in the following
manner: The unloader pilot valve shuts off air to the intake valve unloaders to close the intake valves. The
check and bleed valve releases air from the slowdown assembly and temporarily restricts the flow of air
from the suction valve unloaders. The slowdown plunger backs off from the governor lever to increase
engine speed.
(3) When air pressure reaches 100 psi in the air receiver, the pressure control system will "unload" in the
following manner: The unloader pilot valve admits air to the intake valve unloaders to open the intake
valves. The slowdown plunger pushes out against the governor lever to reduce engine speed to idle.
d. Air Receiver and Hose Reels.

(1) The air receiver is equipped with a safety valve for protection against a build-up of excess pressure and two
drain cocks to drain off condensation within the receiver. Compressed air in the receiver may be released
from the two service valves connected to the rear of the air receiver or from the service valves in the hose
reels.
(2) There are two hose reels, one on each end of the air receiver, to provide handy and safe storage for air
hoses.
e. Auxiliary Equipment and Tools.

(1) The pneumatic tools furnished with this unit are clamped in special tool boxes. After use, all pneumatic
tools should be returned to their special designated places.
(2) A set of on-equipment maintenance tools have been packed in a separate tool bag. A list of these onequipment tools will be found in appendix III. Included in this set are the most necessary tools to perform
most of the common maintenance services on the engine-compressor.
9
Figure 4. Identification plates.

10
11
4. Identification
(fig. 4)
Six identification plates are permanently attached to the compressor equipment. The manufacturers nameplate (1) Corps
of Engineers identification plate (2) and transportation plate (3) are grouped together at the rear of the compressor
housing. The compressor instruction plate (4) is located on the inside of the rear access door on the engine side of the
compressor. The serial number plate (5) is attached to the upper oil pan adjacent to the oil-level gage on the engine side
of the compressor. The reservoir data plate (6) is attached to the top of the air receiver. When requisitioning spare parts
for this equipment, specify the Department of the Army registration and serial numbers (from Corps of Engineers
identification plate (2) and the manufacturers serial number (from the serial number plate (5)).
5. Tabulated Data
a. General.
Manufacturer ............................................................................................................ Le Roi Company
Model........................................................................................................................ 210G1
Type ......................................................................................................................... V-8 crankcase with 4-cylinder engine
and 4-cylinder compressor.
Bore (all cylinders).................................................................................................... 5.5 in.
Stroke (all pistons).................................................................................................... 5.25 in.
Piston displacement ................................................................................................. 499 cu. in.
Engine compression ratio......................................................................................... 5.45 to 1
Lubrication ................................................................................................................ Oil pump pressure system
Spark Plugs .............................................................................................................. Champion XE5-8-64
Spark plug gap ......................................................................................................... 0.023 to 0.028 in.
Firing order ............................................................................................................... 1-2-4-3
Valve arrangement ................................................................................................... Valve-in-head
Intake valve clearance.............................................................................................. 0.014
Exhaust valve clearance........................................................................................... 0.014
Distributor contact gap ............................................................................................. 0.020 in.
Starting motor ........................................................................................................... 4-volt Bendix drive
Battery charging generator....................................................................................... 4-volt
Batteries ................................................................................................................... Four 6-volt, series connected
Cooling ..................................................................................................................... Liquid
Head bolt torques ..................................................................................................... 90 ft lbs
b. Performance.
Rated speed ............................................................................................................. 1,125 rpm
Rotation; flywheel end .............................................................................................. ccw
Number of stages, compressor ................................................................................ 1
Intake valve opens.................................................................................................... Top dead center
Intake valve closes ................................................................................................... 56 A. B. D. C.
Exhaust valve opens ................................................................................................ 46 B. B. D. C.
Exhaust valve closes................................................................................................ 10 A. T. D. C.
Spark timing, above 1,000 rpm ................................................................................ 30 B. T. D. C.
Timing range at 1,000 rpm ....................................................................................... 30 min
12
Figure 5. Shipping dimensions

13
Air capacity ............................................................................................................... 210 cfm

Air receiver, volume.................................................................................................. 6 cu ft
Fuel consumption, 8 hrs ........................................................................................... 40 gal
c. Capacities.
Fuel........................................................................................................................... 42 gal
Cooling system ......................................................................................................... 16 1/2 gal
Oil, crankcase and filters .......................................................................................... 5 1/2 gal
Electrolyte, batteries................................................................................................. 1 gal
d. Normal Temperatures and Pressures.

Air receiver pressure, sea level .............................................................................. 100 psi
Unloader pilot setting (unloading)........................................................................... 100 psi
Unloader pilot setting (loading)............................................................................... 90 psi
Coolant temperature:.............................................................................................. 180 to 215 F.
Oil pressure ............................................................................................................ 15 to 100 psi
e. Dimensions and Weights (fig. 5).

Overall length ........................................................................................................... 275 in.
Overall width............................................................................................................. 97 in.
Overall height ........................................................................................................... 96 in.
Shipping cubage....................................................................................................... 1,482 cu ft
Gross operating weight............................................................................................. 16,700 lb
Shipping weight ........................................................................................................ 16,300 lb
Shipping tonnage...................................................................................................... 37 tons
f. Foundation Plan (fig. 6). To operate the engine-compressor off the truck frame, a suitable foundation must be
constructed.
Figure 6. Mounting dimensions.

14
Dig a hole about 100 inches long, by 45 inches wide, and 20 inches deep.. Construct the wood template shown in figure 6.
Insert a one-half inch bolt about 10 inches long through each hole in the template. Put nuts on the bolts until the bolt just
clears the nut. Mix about 55 cubic feet of concrete. Use one part cement to four parts of gravel and sharp sand.
Thoroughly mix and add the least amount of water for easy handling. Place the template over the hole. Tamp the
concrete mixture in the hole and level it off under the lower edge of the template. Straighten the foundation bolts. Allow
the concrete to set until thoroughly dry, and remove the template. Place a nut on each anchor bolt and tighten them down.
Put an iron washer on each bolt. Lower the engine-compressor over the bolts so it rests on the washers. Adjust the nuts
to level the unit. Place a second washer and nut on the anchor bolts and pull down tight.
15
CHAPTER 2
OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS
Section I. SERVICE UPON RECEIPT OF EQUIPMENT

6. New Equipment
a. General. The 210G1 compressor is mounted permanently on the truck chassis and no crating or packing is
required. Refer to the TM9-819 for unloading methods and precautions pertaining to the truck.
b. Removal of Preservative Compounds and Devices (fig. 7). All engine openings, electrical component openings,
control system components and gages have been preserved and protected in accordance with applicable specifications for
oversea shipment, and the compressor is not ready for operation until the necessary depreservation services have been
performed. Protected points are illustrated in figure 7. Remove the moisture-proof barrier from the generator (1), hose
reel (2), instrument panel (3), fuel level gage (3) and air lines (6). Peel the wax-like sealer from the receiver service valves
(3), drain cocks (3), air filter covers (5), oil filler cap (5) and safety valve (6). Unwrap the paper from the generator drive
belt (4). After all preservatives and tapes have been removed, wipe the protected surfaces of the various components with
a cloth dampened in solvent to remove all traces of preservative. After battery cables have been unwrapped, clean
terminal posts carefully and connect cables between the batteries.
c. Inspection. Check the entire unit carefully for evidence of possible damage during shipment. Make certain that all
controls operate freely and easily; and that all attaching bolts and nuts are tight. If the compressor housing appears
dented or otherwise damaged, open the access doors at that point and examine the compressor parts carefully behind the
apparent point of impact. Check the radiator, exhaust pipe weather cap, and panel meters for damage. Open the access
doors and check the control cable and wiring for mechanical damage and frayed insulation. Correct any damage
immediately or report to proper authority.
d. Service.
(1) Drain the preservative oil from the crankcase and lubricate the equipment as instructed in paragraph 42.
16
Figure 7. Preservative and protective measures for shipment.

17
(2) Perform before-operation services (par. 45c).

(3) Fill the fuel tank with a good grade of gasoline. Fuel tank capacity is 42 gallons.
(4) The cooling system is filled with 60 percent anti-freeze and 40 percent water and is ready for operation.
(5) Add sulfuric acid and distilled water to all batteries. The level of electrolyte should be from 3/8-inch to 5/8inch above the top of the separators of each cell. Inspect battery connections (par. 45f).
(6) Perform all truck services as instructed in TM 9-819.
7. Used Equipment
The inspection and service of used equipment will be the same as that for new equipment (par. 6). However, the
equipment must be more carefully inspected before it is operated. Examine the entire unit for loose or damaged
connections-oil, water, electrical or air. Inspect for evidence of oil seepage and check gages for proper operation. Tighten
loose mounting bolts if necessary. Start the compressor (par. 30) and listen carefully for unusual sounds or noises. If an
unusual condition is indicated, stop the compressor immediately and report to proper authority.
Section II. CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTS
8. General
This section describes, locates, illustrates, and furnishes the operator sufficient information about the various controls and
instruments for the proper operation of the materiel.
9. Unloader Pilot Valve
(fig. 8)
a. Location. The unloader pilot valve is located on the crankcase cover and is interconnected by tubing to the
compressor valve assembly, the slowdown assembly, and the air receiver.
b. Purpose. The unloader pilot valve is actuated automatically by the amount of air pressure in the air receiver.
When air pressure in the receiver drops to approximately 90 psi, the unloader pilot valve closes and cuts off the air
pressure to the intake valve unloaders to close the intake valves. When air receiver pressure reaches 100 psi, the
unloader pilot valve opens to allow air pressure to enter the intake valve unloaders and open the intake valves.
18
10. Compressor Valve Assemblies

(fig. 8)
a. Location. The four compressor valve assemblies are located in the compressor bank cylinder head assembly.
The valve assembly is connected to an automatic-operating pressure control system.
b. Purpose. The valves operate to admit and discharge air from the compressor cylinder. Free air is admitted
through the air cleaners and the intake valve part of the assembly by the action of the piston on its downward stroke. As
the piston moves up from bottom dead center, the suction valve is closed. When the pressure in the cylinder rises slightly
above that in the discharge manifold, the discharge valve port of the assembly will open, allowing air in the cylinder to flow
into the compressor discharge manifold. When the air pressure drops to 90 psi in the air receiver, the unloader pilot valve
shuts off air to the suction valve unloaders to close the suction valves. When the air pressure reaches 100 psi in the air
receiver, the unloader pilot valve admits air to the suction valve unloaders to open the suction valves.
Figure 8. Engine and compressor with housing removed.

19
11. Slowdown Assembly

(fig. 8)
a. Location. The slowdown assembly is located on the crank-case cover next to the engine governor.
Figure 9. Receiver service valves.

b. Purpose. The slowdown assembly is merely a plunger within a barrel, which provides an engine idle condition
during the unloading cycle. During the unloading operation, air pressure from the unloader pilot valve pushes out the
plunger against the governor lever to change engine speed to a slow idle. When air pressure is removed, the plunger is
backed into the barrel by the governor lever spring to increase the engine speed.
20
12. Check and Bleed Valve

(fig. 8)
a. Location. The three-way check and bleed valve is located at the unloader pilot valve and is connected to the intake
valve unloaders and to the slowdown assembly.
Figure 10. Hose reel and service valve.

b. Purpose. The action of a ball in the valve checks the return flow of air from the intake valve unloader and bleeds
the air from the slowdown assembly at the same time. This enables the slowdown assembly to provide engine acceleration
before the intake valves are fully closed.
21
13. Receiver Service Valves

(fig. 9)
The two wedge-disk, gate-type receiver service valves are connected directly to the rear side of the air receiver.
Compressed air is released from the air receiver by turning the handwheel at the top of each valve.
Figure 11. Receiver safety valve.

14. Hose Reel Service Valves
(fig. 10)
Each air hose is equipped with a quick-opening lever handle valve which controls th2 outlet of air at each hose reel.
22
These valves are open when the handle is pointing toward outlet to hose; they can be used to drain air from the hose on
the reel by turning them 180 or shut off all air by turning 90.
15. Safety Valve
(fig. 11)
The safety valve is located on the air receiver, and is set to release excess air pressure between 120 and 125 psi. No
attempt should be made to change the pressure setting of the safety valve because this is the maximum pressure under
which the unit can be operated safely. The safety valve must be operated manually each day when starting the unit, and
also when air receiver pressure reaches about 70 psi to make certain that the valve is operating properly.
16. Hose Reel Lock Pin
(fig. 10)
Each hose reel is equipped with a locking pin assembly which prevents the hose reels from turning when the reels are
not in use. The locking pins are spring loaded and must be pressed in and turned to release the reels for operation.
17. Shutterstat
(fig. 12)
a.. Location. The shutterstat is located in the connection between the water pump body and the radiator. It consists of
a liquid bulb, thermostat element, and needle valve assembly, and has two air line connections. One air line is connected
through an air filter to the air receiver. The other air line leads to the air cylinder which operates the radiator shutters.
b. Purpose. At normal operating pressure, air passes through the shutterstat needle valve to operate the air cylinder.
This action closes the shutters against spring tension in the cylinder. When the temperature of the cooling water at the
shutterstat approaches 180 F, the heat is transmitted through the liquid bulb up to the thermostat element. The element
expands closing the needle valve and allowing the spring to open the shutters.
18. Ignition Switch
(fig. 13)
The ignition switch is mounted on the instrument panel. When the lever handle of this switch is snapped to the left
(ON), it completes the primary circuit leading from the battery through the ammeter to the ignition coil. The switch must be
turned on before pushing in the engine starting button, and shuts off the
23
engine automatically when the lever handle is snapped back to the vertical position. The switch is connected to a pilot light
which will glow when the switch is-on.
19. Starting Switch
(fig. 13)
The starting switch is a push-button type switch mounted on the instrument panel. Pushing in the starting button
completes
Figure 12. Shutterstat.

24
an electrical circuit from the batteries to the magnetic switch which is mounted on the compressor side of the battery box.
The magnetic switch is energized to complete the circuit between the batteries and the starting motor. The starting motor
pinion then engages the flywheel ring gear to start the engine.
20. Choke
(fig. 13)
The choke control knob is located on the instrument panel and is connected with a flexible cable to the choke plate in
the carburetor air intake. When the choke control knob is pulled out, the choke plate closes, providing a richer fuel-air
mixture to help start the engine.
Figure 13. Instrument panel.

21. Air Pressure Gage
(fig. 13)
a. Location. The air pressure gage is located in the center of the instrument panel.
b. Purpose. The air pressure gage indicates the pressure of the air within the air receiver and should read 100 psi
maximum after the unit has been thoroughly warmed up to operating temperatures. The air pressure readings are
approximately90 psi at the start of the "loading cycle" and 100 psi at the beginning of the "unloading cycle."
25
22. Oil Pressure Gage

(fig. 13)
a. Location. The oil pressure gage is located in the right-hand side of the instrument panel.
b. Purpose. The oil pressure gage registers the amount of oil pressure in the lubricating oil system, and its markings
are divided into a red and a green area. The gage pointer should be in the green area at all times during operation. If the
pointer does not show pressure, stop the unit immediately and determine the cause.
23. Water Temperature Gage
(fig. 13)
a. Location. The water temperature gage is located in the right-hand side of the instrument panel.
b. Purpose. The water temperature gage indicates the temperature of the coolant in the liquid cooling system.
Normal operating temperatures are between 180 to 2150 F.
24. Ammeter
(fig. 13)
a. Location. The ammeter is located in the left-hand side of the instrument panel.
b. Purpose. The ammeter indicates the rate of battery charge or discharge. When the engine-compressor is running
at normal speed, the ammeter needle should be in the charge range. If the ammeter shows discharge continuously, check
the condition of the generator, voltage regulator, and batteries to determine the cause.
25. Hourmeter
(fig. 13)
a. Location. The hourmeter is located in the left-hand side of the instrument panel.
b. Purpose. The hourmeter records the elapsed time during which the unit has been in operation. It tells exactly
when the unit should have the "preventive maintenance" services required to keep it in continued operation. Mounted on
the instrument panel, the hourmeter is electrically operated and is connected to the ignition switch. The hourmeter
operates only when the engine is in operation.
26
26. Fuel Level Gage

(fig. 19)
The fuel level gage (16) is mounted directly on top of the fuel tank and is actuated by an inclosed cork float. Graduations
on the fuel level gage are in fractions of capacity. The capacity of the fuel tank is 42 gallons.
27. Magnetic Switch
(fig. 14)
The 24-volt magnetic switch is mounted on the compressor side of the battery box. This switch is connected to the
starting button, the batteries, and the starting motor with one grounded connection for radio-field suppression. When the
starter button is pushed in, the core linings of the magnetic switch are energized to pull the magnetic switch plunger to the
contact disk and close the circuit from the batteries to the starting motor.
28. Drain Cocks
a. Location. Nine drain cocks are installed in the compressor equipment. One drain cock (15, fig. 28) is located at the
lower
Figure 14. Batteries and magnetic switch.

27
left-front corner of the radiator; one is located on each side of the engine-compressor crankcase (fig. 8); two are
connected by piping to the air receiver and are accessible through the lower access door at the rear of the housing (fig. 7);
one is tapped into a tube elbow at the top of the slowdown assembly (6, fig. 46); one is located at the shutter air filter
(fig. 15); one is installed in the tubing which connects to the shutterstat (fig. 12); one is located in the compressor valve
closest to the radiator (fig. 8).
b. Purpose. Three of the drain cocks (in the radiator and crankcase) are used solely for draining coolant from the
cooling system. The remaining six drain cocks are used to remove condensation from the air system components.
Figure 15. Shutter air filter.

Section III. OPERATION UNDER USUAL CONDITIONS
29. General
a. The instructions in this section are published for the information and guidance of the personnel responsible for the
operation of this machine.
b. It is essential that the operator know how to perform every operation of which the air compressor is capable.
28
This section gives instructions on starting and stopping the compressor, instructions on the basic motions of the
compressor, and instructions on how to coordinate the basic motions to perform the specific tasks for which the machine
is designed. Since nearly every job presents a different problem, the operator may have to vary the given procedure to fit
the individual job.
30. Starting the Compressor
a. Refer to paragraph 45c for before-operation services to be performed.
b. Open both receiver service valves (fig. 9).
c. Set the ignition switch (fig. 13) to the ON position.
d. Push the starter switch (fig. 13). Use the choke if necessary, until the engine has started and begun to warm up.
Caution: Never operate starter for more than 30 seconds at a time without pausing to allow starting motor to
cool. Excessive cranking periods will cause starter to overheat and fail.
e. Check oil pressure gage (par. 22) and ammeter (par. 24) immediately after starting the engine.
f. Allow the engine to warm up for several minutes.
g. Close the receiver service valves in order to build up air pressure within the receiver.
h. When air pressure reaches 70 psi, manually operate the safety valve on the air receiver (par. 15).
i. Check all gages and meter readings on the instrument panel (fig. 13) and listen for unusual noises.
j. Perform the during-operation services (par. 46d).
k. Connect the appropriate pneumatic tool. The various pneumatic tools and their method of installation is
thoroughly discussed in chapter 4.
31. Stopping the Compressor
a. Close all service valves (figs. 9 and 10) and allow the engine to idle for a few minutes.
b. Disconnect pneumatic tools.
c. Set ignition switch (fig. 13) to the OFF position.
d. Open all drain cocks (par. 28), in order to remove moisture, dirt, and oil, from the air receiver and air lines.
e. Open all service valves (figs. 9 and 10) in order to empty the compressed air from the air receiver.
f. Perform the after-operation services indicated in paragraph 45f.
29
Section IV. OPERATION OF MATERIEL USED IN CONJUNCTION WITH AIR COMPRESSOR

32. Vehicle Operation
The 210G1 compressor is mounted on the M45 truck. Refer to TM 9-819 for proper truck operating instructions.
33. Fire Extinguisher
a. Description.. The fire extinguisher is a one-quart, carbon tetrachloride type. The fire extinguisher is installed in a
bracket mounted at the rear of the compressor housing.
b. Operation. To operate the fire extinguisher, turn the handle and work like a pump. For structural fires, direct the
stream of carbon tetrachloride at the base of the flames. For burning liquids, direct the stream of carbon tetrachloride
against the inside of the container above the surface of the liquid.
Warning: Extinguish fire promptly and avoid exposure to smoke and fumes.
c. Refilling. Refill the fire extinguisher as instructed in TM 5-687 and TM 9-1799.
Section V. OPERATION UNDER UNUSUAL CONDITIONS
34. Operation in Extreme Cold (Below 0 F.)
a. Cooling System Protection. The radiator should be filled with six parts of antifreeze solution and four parts of
water for winter and summer operation. Coolant must be maintained at proper level to prevent loss from expansion
between upper and lower step of baffle in radiator top tank. Check the entire cooling system periodically for leaks and
hose deterioration.
b. Special Lubrication Instructions. Select the correct lubricants in accordance with the expected air temperatures as
indicated in the lubrication order (fig. 16).
c. Fuel System Protection. In cold weather, condensation of moisture in the air causes water to accumulate in
gasoline tanks, drums, and containers. This water will freeze and form ice crystals that clog fuel lines and carburetor jets
unless the following precautions are taken:
(1) Use filter paper or other type of strainer when filling fuel tank or when transferring fuel from one container to
another.
(2) Remove snow or ice from fuel tank fillercap and filling equipment before filling the fuel tank.
(3) Keep fillercaps tightened securely to keep snow, rain, and dirt out of tanks.
30
d. Electrical System Protection. Check the specific gravity reading of the battery electrolyte frequently. Keep the
batteries as fully charged as possible. Refer to paragraph 90 for detailed battery maintenance.
Caution: In freezing weather, when adding water to electrolyte, run the engine for about 20 minutes to assure a ;roper
electrolyte solution. Water not in solution will freeze, expand, and ruin the battery.
35. Operation in Extreme Heat
a. Cooling System Protection. Keep the radiator well filled with clean, soft water, and see that the fins of the radiator
and the aftercooler are free from foreign material. Check the operation of the radiator shutters with the water temperature
gage on the instrument panel. The radiator shutters should open when engine water temperature is approximately 180 F.
Add water to the radiator only when the engine is stopped and cool, or idling, with moderate water temperature. Fill the
radiator only to the height of the baffle. Check hoses and connections periodically for possible leaks.
b. Special Lubrication Instructions. Select the correct lubricants in accordance with the expected air temperature as
indicated in the lubrication order (fig. 16).
36. Operation Under Dusty or Sandy Conditions
a. Check Air Cleaners. Dust may enter the unit through several channels; at the air .intake, engine breather, or from
dust contamination of oil, water, or fuel. Remove the filters from the engine air cleaners (par. 76) and compressor air
cleaners (par. 123) as often as every 2 to 4 hours and clean thoroughly.
b. Check Oil-Filler and Breather Cap. At least every 2 to 4 hours remove and clean the combination oil-filler and
engine breather cap. This will help to eliminate the entrance of dust and sand into the engine crankcase.
c. Protect Stores of Oil, Water, and Fuel. Stored supplies of oil, water, and fuel must be kept tightly covered to
protect these supplies from sand and dust contamination. If possible, keep such supplies in an inclosure such as a shed
or storage room.
37. Operation in Salt Water Area
a. Submersion in Salt Water. If the unit has been submerged in salt water, electrical equipment and metal parts will
be damaged to such an extent that complete rebuilding or replacement of assemblies will be necessary. If all traces of salt
water can be removed at once, it may be possible to salvage certain units
31
by dismantling immediately and cleaning thoroughly. In all cases of submersion in salt water, notify the proper authority at
once.
b. Exposure to Salt Air. When the compressor is operated near bodies of salt water, keep all exposed metal
surfaces painted. Salt air will attack unpainted metal surfaces and cause rust to form quickly. Remove the rust
immediately and protect the exposed surface with a coat of paint (par. 43).
c. Cleaning. At the end of each days operation wipe the exposed metal surfaces with a cloth dipped in cleaning
solvent.
Coat electrical connections (terminals) with petroleum jelly to prevent corrosion.
d. Lubrication. At the end of each days operation put a few drops of engine oil on the control linkage connections
and the air compressor support springs.
32
CHAPTER 3
ORGANIZATION MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS
Section I. Organizational Tools and Equipment

38. General
The tools and equipment listed in this section are those that are required to perform organizational maintenance on the
truck mounted air compressor. Standard mechanics hand tools and on-equipment tools are not enumerated in this
section.
39. On-Equipment Tools
The on-equipment tools normally supplied with this equipment for the use of the operator are listed in appendix III.
40. Special Organizational Maintenance Tools and Equipment No special organizational maintenance tools and equipment are
required.
Section II. LUBRICATION AND PAINTING
41. General Lubrication Information
a. Lubrication Order 5-5065 prescribes first and second echelon lubrication maintenance for the truck mounted air
compressor.
b. A lubrication order is published for each item of equipment. The lubrication order shown in figure 16 is a
reproduction of an approved lubrication order for the air compressor. For the current lubrication order, refer to SR 310-204.
c. Lubrication orders prescribe approved first and second echelon lubrication procedures. The instructions contained
therein are mandatory.
42. Detailed Lubrication Information
a. Care of Lubricants. The cleanliness of lubricant at the point of use is dependent upon cleanliness in storage and
handling. All containers must be kept closed tight when not in use. Some oils and greases will absorb water to such an
extent that their physical characteristics will change so as to definitely reduce their lubricating value. All drum or
containers, openings, plugs, pumps, funnels, guns, or other lubricating utensils or equip33
Figure 16. Lubrication order.

34
REFERENCE 1: Clean and oil before

installation.
REFERENCE 2: Check crankcase oil level.
REFERENCE 4: Repack both generator

bearings.
REFERENCE 3: Lubricate shutter air filter.

See Note 2.
REFERENCE 6: Lubricate shutter linkage

with 4 or 5 drops of oil.
REFERENCE 5: Remove, clean, renew

elements and replace oil filters.
Figure 16-Continued.35
ment must be carefully protected from sand, dirt, rain, sleet, and so on, and must be kept as clean as possible. Never lay
lubricating guns, couplers, or other equipment on the ground. When dispensing lubricant, wipe all dirt, moisture, or dust
from around the opening before unscrewing or removing the plug or cap.
b. Points of Application. Follow the detailed lubrication instructions given beneath each lubrication point illustration
(fig. 16) indicating procedures to be followed at each point. Apply the lubricant indicated on the lubrication order (fig. 16).
REFERENCE 8: Add B to 10 drops of oil to

starter end bearings.
REFERENCE 7: Drain oil filters before

removal. Drain crankcase.
Figure 16-Continued.
c. Cleaning. When dispensing lubricant, wipe all dirt, moisture, or dust from around the opening before unscrewing
or removing the plug or cap. Use a clean, lint-free cloth dampened with cleaning solvent.
d. Operation Immediately After Lubrication. After lubricating the compressor, and especially after filling the engine
crankcase, start and run the engine for approximately 5 minutes. The complete oil capacity for the crankcase includes the
5 gallon capacity of the sump and one-half gallon capacity of the sump and one-half gallon capacity of the oil filters.
During the five minute running interval, enough oil will be by-passed into the filters for correct operation. It will then be
necessary to check the oil level gage and refill the crankcase to the full mark.
e. Oil Filler and Breather Cap. Remove the oil filter and breather cap to fill the crankcase. Rinse the cap in gasoline
and dip it in lubricating oil before installing it on the valve cover.
f. Oil Level Gage. Pull out the oil level gage and wipe the end with a clean cloth. Insert the gage into the crankcase,
pull it
36
out a second time and read the oil level near the end of the gage. Insert the gage in the crankcase.
g. Shutter Air Filter. Remove the fill plug and open the drain cock. When the used lubricant has drained out, close
the drain cock and add one ounce of the lubricant as described in the lubrication order. Install the fill plug.
h. Generator Bearings. Remove the bearing caps from both ends of the generator. Fill the bearings half full of new
grease and install the bearing caps.
i. Oil Filters.
(1) Removal.
(a) Unscrew the two outer pipe plugs from the bottom of the oil pan, and drain the oil from the filters. The
center pipe plug is the drain for the oil pan.
(b) Turn the filter cover bolt counterclockwise until the filter cover and gasket can be removed.
(c) Grasp the filter element pull ring, and pull the element from the oil filter case.
(2) Cleaning and inspection.
(a) Examine the inside of each filter case for oil sludge. If necessary, clean with a wire brush and
kerosene or
Diesel fuel.
(b) Discard filter elements and cover gaskets and replace with new ones.
(3) Installation.
(a) Insert the new filter elements into the filter cases.
(b) Install the filter covers and gaskets, pressing the covers in against the tension spring until the threads
of the cover bolts engage the tapped hole in the long mounting stud. Tighten the cover bolts.
(c) Install the filter drain plugs. Fill the crankcase with fresh oil, start the compressor (d above), and
check for oil leaks. If necessary, tighten the filter cover bolts and drain plugs.
j. Shutter Linkage. With an oil can put a few drops of lubricating oil in the shutter linkage joints.
k. Crankcase and Filter Drain Plugs. Remove the two filter drain plugs to drain the oil filters, and the crankcase drain
plug to drain the crankcase. Install the plugs.
l. Starting Motor End Bearing. Remove the plug in the starting drive housing and add lubricating oil. Install the plug.
37
43. Painting
Painted surfaces that show scratches and abrasions should be cleaned and repainted. Inspect all painted surfaces for
chipping, peeling, and wrinkling. Sandpaper the damaged paint areas and repaint. Before applying paint, mask the
identification plates, machined surfaces, wires and other electrical parts, breather cap, vents, and lubrication fittings. In
general, apply paint to surfaces that have been painted and to no other. Refer to TM 9-2851 for specific painting
instructions.
Section III. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE SERVICES
44. General
The operator of the truck mounted air compressor and the organizational maintenance personnel must perform their
preventive maintenance services regularly, to make sure the air compressor operates well and to lessen the chances of
mechanical failure.
45. Operator Maintenance
a. Inspections. Inspections must be made before operation, during operation, at halt, and after operation, as
described in this section. All inspections of assemblies, subassemblies, or parts must include any supporting members or
connections and must determine whether the unit is in good condition, correctly assembled, secure, or excessively worn.
Any mechanical condition which may result in further damage to the unit must be corrected before the equipment is
operated.
(1) The inspection for "good condition" is usually an external visual inspection to determine whether the unit is
damaged beyond safe or serviceable limits, or to determine if it is in such a condition that damage will result from
operation. The term "good condition" is further defined as: not bent or twisted; not chaffed or burned; not broken or
cracked; not bare or frayed; not dented or collapsed; not torn or cut; adequately lubricated.
(2) Inspection of a unit to see that it is "correctly assembled" is usually an external visual inspection to
determine whether it is in its normal assembled position in the equipment.
(3) Check of the unit to determine if it is "secure" is usually an external inspection, a hand-feel, or a pry-bar or
wrench check for looseness in the units. Such an inspection should include brackets, lockwashers, locknuts, locking
wires, or cotter pins used in the assembly.
38
(4) "Excessively worn" means worn close to or beyond serviceable limits, condition likely to result in a failure if
replacement of the affected parts is not made before the next scheduled inspection.
b. Reporting Deficiencies. The operator will report all deficiencies on DD Form 110.
c. Before-Operation Services. The following services will be performed to determine if the condition of the
equipment has changed since it was last operated, and to make sure the equipment is ready for operation. Any
deficiencies must be corrected or reported to the proper authorities before the unit is put into operation.
(1) Mounting. Check the mounting of the engine compressor on the truck to make certain that it is secure.
(2) Fuel. Check fuel supply. See that the fuel tank is full. Check reserve supply of fuel and replenish if
necessary.
(3) Coolant. Check coolant level in radiator and see that it is up to proper level. When filling cold radiators,
allow room for expansion.
(4) Lubrication. Check oil level in engine crankcase. Add oil if necessary.
(5) Leaks, general. Check for leaks, paying particular attention to the cooling system, oil and fuel lines and
connections, and for signs of leaks under the unit.
(6) Visual inspection. Make a general check of the entire unit for cracked or broken parts and loose or missing
bolts. Before starting the unit, check the operation of all controls.
(7) Starting precautions. Make certain that the receiver service valves are open before attempting to start the
engine. Check to see that the equipment is clear of tools and obstructions. Start engine and adjust equipment to proper
operating tempo. Drain the moisture in the air receiver by opening the two drains in the bottom of the tank. Blow the
condensation out of the pressure control lines by opening all air line drain cocks. Air line drain cocks are located at the No.
1 compressor cylinder head, at the shutterstat, at the shutterstat air filter, and at the slowdown assembly.
(8) Safety valve. Test the safety valve operation when the air receiver pressure gage reads 70 psi. Lift the
valve handle to pop the valve manually.
39
(9) Location. Locate the unit so that it will be as level as possible to assure most efficient lubrication. The
maximum allowable tilt is 15.
(10) Instruments. Check the oil pressure gage and ammeter readings. The oil pressure should be between 15
and 100 psi and the ammeter in the charge range.
(11) Hose (air). Check the condition of the hose and hose connections and blow out any accumulation of dirt
and moisture before attaching an air-operated tool.
d. During-Operation Services. The operator is responsible for correcting or reporting unusual sounds or odors,
deficiencies in performance, or other signs of abnormal operation. He will perform the following specific services:
(1) Instruments. Check all gage and meter readings frequently. At normal operating speeds, temperature, and
load, readings should be as follows:
Engine oil pressure.............................15 to 100 psi
Coolant temperature...........................180 to 215 F.
Air receiver pressure ..........................100 psi (sea level)
Battery-charging ammeter..................In charge range
(2) Unusual operation. Check for unusual operation such as excessive vibration, brush sparking, overheating,
smoking. Report any irregularity immediately to the proper authority.
(3) Unusual noises. Check for abnormal noises. If any are noticed, stop operation and report to the proper
authority.
e. At-Halt Services. During halts, even if only for short periods, the operator should make a general check of the
equipment and correct or report any deficiencies noticed, in addition to performing the following specific duties.
(1) Fuel. Check fuel supply. Add fuel if necessary.
(2) Oil. Check oil in crankcase. Add oil if necessary.
(3) Coolant. Check coolant level and add if necessary.
Caution: If the engine overheats because of lack of coolant, allow it to cool before filling the
radiator; otherwise there is a danger of cracking the cylinder head and block. If it is necessary to
fill the radiator before the engine has cooled, be sure to fill it very slowly with the engine running
at fast idling speed.
(4) Leaks, general. Check the entire air compressor for leaks, paying particular attention to fuel, oil, cooling
system, and for signs of leaks under the unit.
40
bolts. If operating under extremely dusty conditions, inspect the air cleaner and service it according to the current
lubrication order for this equipment. Inspect the air hose and connections for damage and worn or broken fittings.
f. After-Operation Services. To insure that the equipment is ready to operate at any time, the following services
must be performed by the operator immediately after any operating period of 8 hours or less. All deficiencies must be
corrected or reported to the proper authority.
(1) Shutdown precautions. Shut off all air service valves, allowing the engine to idle for a few minutes to permit
even cooling. Snap ignition switch to the OFF position. Open all receiver and air line drain cocks to remove any moisture,
dirt, and oil. Open air service valves to empty air receiver.
(2) Fuel, oil, and coolant. Check and refill all tanks. Change contaminated coolant. If antifreeze is added, run
the engine to mix the solution thoroughly.
(3) Clean equipment. Clean all dirt and trash from around the air compressor. Remove excess dirt and grease
from exterior of engine compressor, being sure to clean carefully around the spark plugs. Insects, trash, or dirt, can be
removed from the radiator by directing a stream of compressed air through the rear of the radiator.
(4) Tools and equipment. See that all tools and equipment assigned to the air compressor are in serviceable
condition, clean, and properly stowed or mounted.
(5) Lubrication. Lubricate the air compressor as required by the lubrication order.
(6) Battery. Be sure that the battery is clean, securely mounted, and not leaking. Inspect electrolyte for proper
level. Be sure terminals ate tightly connected and that vent caps are clean and secure.
(7) Fire extinguisher. Check condition, mounting, and charge. Do not discharge any of content.
bolts. Check the fan belt tension. The fan belt should have a 3/4- to 1-inch deflection, without undue pressure at a point
midway between the pulleys.
41
(9) Protection. Close the side doors of the engine compressor to protect the equipment against weather. If unit
is to be out of operation for a lengthy period, see that all unpainted parts are covered with a film of rustpreventive
compound. When exposed to the weather cover the unit with a suitable cover.
46. Maintenance and Safety Precautions
a. Correct or report any mechanical deficiencies that may result in damage to the unit if operation is continued.
b. Always stop engine before attempting adjustments, repairs, or lubrication.
c. Never pour cold coolant into radiator while engine is hot, as there is danger of cracking the cylinder head.
d. Keep electrical equipment clean and dry.
e. Always provide a metallic contact between container and tank when filling the gasoline tank.
f. Check the safety valve daily to make certain of its performance.
g. Exercise extreme caution while using compressed air. At close range, the air pressure this unit develops can put
out eyes, burst ear drums, and cause serious skin blisters.
47. Organizational Maintenance
a. Organizational preventive maintenance is performed by organizational maintenance personnel, with the aid of the
operator, at weekly and monthly intervals. The weekly interval will be equivalent to 60 hours of use. The monthly interval
will be equivalent to 4 weeks, or 240 hours of use, whichever occurs first.
b. The column headed technical inspection is provided for the information and guidance of personnel performing
technical inspection, and constitutes the minimum inspection requirements for the equipment.
c. Responsibility for performance of preventive maintenance services rests not only with operators, but with the entire
chain of command from section chief to commanding officer (AR 700-105).
42
WEEKLY AND MONTHLY SERVICES

(For use with DA Form 464)
Note: Operators will assist the unit mechanics in performing the weekly and monthly PM services.
Technical
Inspection
Service
Monthly
Weekly
GENERAL
Before-Operation Services . Check and perform
services listed in daily before-operation
services.
Lubrication . Inspect the entire machine for indication of insufficient lubrication (fig. 16).
........
Lubricate if necessary. Refer to the current

lubrication order.
Tools and Equipment . Inspect condition of all

tools and equipment assigned to the machine.
........
See that all tools and equipment assigned to

the machine are clean, serviceable, and properly stowed or mounted. See that the tool
box is in good condition and that it closes
and fastens properly.
Fire Extinguisher . Carbon tetrachloride type.

Check for full charge by removing the filler
plug. See that the operating mechanism is
not corroded and that it is securely mounted
Carbon dioxide (CO,) type. Inspect for insecure mounting, kinked or damaged hose,
and missing or broken seal. If the seal is
missing or broken, the extinguisher should be
weighted to determine the amount of charge.
The empty and full weights are stamped on
the valve body.
........
See that any deficiencies noted are corrected or

reported to the proper authority.
Publications . See that a copy of this technical

manual TB 5-5065-1, and current lubrication order and Standard Form 91 are on the
machine and in serviceable condition.
Appearance . Inspect the general appearance

of the machine, paying special attention to
cleanness, legibility of identification, markings, and condition of paint.
43
Technical
Inspection
Service
Monthly
Weekly
GENERAL-Continued
See that deficiencies noticed are corrected or
reported to the proper authority.
........
........
11
11
.......
11
11
Tighten any loose manifold and exhaust pipe

mounting bolts and nuts. Replace any defective gasket. On new or reconditioned
engines, check all cylinder-head bolts for
tightness at the first weekly service. The
correct torque-wrench pull is 90 foot-pounds.
12
12
12
Valve Mechanism. Check the valve adjustment

if excessive valve noise or loss of power is
noticed. The approximate valve-rocker arm
clearance with the engine cold is 0.014 inch
for both valves.
........
12
12
Adjust the valve-rocker arm clearance if necessary. Be sure the valve-cover gasket is in
good condition and that the cover fits securely.
13
13
........
Compression Test . Test the compression of all

cylinders and record the readings on DA
Form 464. Normal compression pressure at
cranking speed is 75 to 80 psi open throttle.
14
14
14
Crankcase, Breather . Inspect the crankcase for

leaks. Check the condition of crankcase
breather and cap.
........
14
14
Correct or report any oil leaks noticed. Change

the oil and clean the breather if necessary.
Refer to the current lubrication order.
15
15
15
Oil Filters . Inspect the oil filter assembly connections for leaks while the engine is running.
Modifications . See if all available modifioation work orders applying to this machine
have been completed and recorded on DA
Form 478 (MWO and Major Unit Assembly
Replacement Record-Organizational Equipment File).
ENGINE AND ACCESSORIES
Cylinder Heads, Manifolds, and Gaskets. Inspect the cylinder heads, manifolds, and exhaust pipe for leaks, loose mounting bolts
and nuts, and defective gaskets.
44
Technical
Inspection
Service
Monthly
Weekly
ENGINE AND ACCESSORIES-Continued
Service the oil filters as specified in the current lubrication order.
After servicing, check carefully for leaks while the engine is
running.
15
15
16
16
16
Radiator and Shutter. Inspect the radiator for leaks, obstructions

in core air passages, and loose mounting bolts. Check all
cooling system hose for leaks, excessive deterioration, and
loose connections. Check operation of shutters. Shutters
should open when water temperature gage registers 180 to
190 F.
.............
16
16
Drain, flush, and refill the cooling system if coolant is

contaminate(l with rust or dirt. See that core air passages are
clean. Replace any damaged or defective cooling system hose,
lines, and gaskets. See that all mounting bolts and connections
are tight. Protect the coolant from freezing, and record its
freezing point on DA Form 464.
18
18
18
Fan, Belt, and Pulleys. Check condition and mounting of fan

blades. Inspect for worn, cracked, or frayed belt. Check belt
tension and condition and alinement of pulleys. Belt is properly
adjusted when it can be deflected 3/ to I inch from normal
position at a point midway between the pulleys.
.............
18
18
Adjust the tension of the belt if necessary. Replace belt if frayed

or badly worn.
20
20
20
Governor and Linkage. Check the governor adjustment. If the

engine surges when running at top speed without load, the
governor is out of adjustment.
.............
20
20
Adjust the governor if necessary.

corrected to the proper authority.
38
38
38
.............
38
38
Report any deficiencies not
FUEL SYSTEM
Fuel Pump and Housing. Inspect fuel pump and lines for leaks.
Check for loose mounting and assembly screws. Check
sediment bowl for water and dirt.
Tighten any loose screws and connections.
Clean
sediment
bowl
if
it
contains
45
water
or
Technical
Inspection
Service
Monthly
Weekly
FUEL SYSTEM-Continued
dirt. See that screen is clean. Make sure gasket is in good
condition before replacing bowl. Replace defective pump with
a new or reconditioned one.
39
39
Carburetor and Linkage. See if all carburetor mounting and

assembly bolts and screws are in place and secure. Check
flexibility and operation of linkage.
39
39
Tighten any loose mounting and assembly bolts and screws.

Replace worn or damaged linkage connections.
41
41
Air Cleaner. Inspect air cleaner for loose connections. Check

condition of filter element.
41
41
Service air cleaner as specified in the current lubrication order.
43
43
Fuel Tank, Cap, and Gasket. Inspect frame and mounting of fuel
tank. Check tank, gasket, and connections for leaks.
43
43
See that tank is securely mounted, air vent open, and filler cap
clean and tight fitting. Repair or replace leaky or damaged
gaskets and connections.
44
44
Fuel Lines. Check the fuel lines for leaks, loose connections, and
damage.
44
44
Repair or replace damaged or collapsed fuel lines. Tighten loose

connections. Report all uncorrected deficiencies to the
proper authority.
46
46
.............
46
46
.............
46
39
.............
41
.............
43
.............
44
.............
46
............................
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Spark Plugs. Inspect spark plugs for dirty or cracked insulators.
Clean dirt and oil from spark plug insulators. Replace defective
plugs.
Remove and clean spark plugs and adjust point gap. Proper gap
is 0.023 to 0.028 inch. See that plugs and gaskets are in
good condition before they are reinstalled.
46
Technical
Inspection
Service
Monthly
Weekly
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM-Continued
Battery. Inspect battery for cracked and leaky case, for loose
holdown clamps, and for dirt and corrosion on top of battery.
Check for loose, corroded, or damaged terminals and
cables.
Check level of electrolyte.
Proper level is
approximately Vs to %/8 inch above the plates. Check
specific gravity, and record reading on DA Form 464.
Readings from 1.275 to 1.300 indicate a fully charged
battery. Readings of 1. 225 or below indicate battery should
be recharged or replaced.
47
47
47
..................
47
47
Clean all dirt and corrosion off top of battery, posts, cables,
and terminals. Replace damaged cables. Apply a thin film
of chassis grease over terminals. Add clean or distilled
water if needed to bring solution up to proper level. If
freezing temperatures prevail, battery must be charged for a
period long enough to mix solution thoroughly. Where
possible, water should be added just before beginning
operation. See that battery is securely mounted, that
fillercaps are tight, and that vent holes are open.
48
48
48
Generator and Starter. Inspect generator and starting motor for

loose mounting bolts and wire connections.
48
48
......................
Inspect commutators and brushes for excessive wear, dirt, and

oil deposits. See if brushes are free in their holders and if
brush wires are secure. If brushes are worn to less than
one-half their original length, they must be replaced.
..................
48
48
Tighten any loose mounting bolts and wire connections.

Replace or free brushes, and clean commutators if
necessary.
49
49
49
Distributor. Inspect distributor cap and rotor for cracks, burned

contacts, and corroded terminals. Correct point gap is 0.
020 inch.
..................
49
49
Clean or replace distributor cap and rotor, and adjust breaker

points if necessary. Replace points if necessary. Replace
points if they are badly burned or pitted.
47
Technical
Inspection
Service
Monthly
Weekly
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM-Continued
Coil, Wiring, Switches. Check coil for loose mounting, cracked
insulation, and other defects. Inspect wiring for oil-soaked, cracked, or
frayed insulation; broken wires, and loose or corroded connections.
50
50
50
..................
50
50
Replace defective coil, switches, and wires. See that connections are
clean and tight. See that all switches and wiring conduits are securely
mounted. Replace or report defective or damaged switches and
external wiring.
51
51
51
Voltage Regulator. Check the voltage regulator for proper operation

and secure mountings. See that wire connections are tight. The
regulator should allow an appreciable charge to go into the battery
after the starter is used. After the battery is fully charged, the ammeter
should read only a slight charge.
..................
51
51
Tighten any loose or replace any missing mounting

the regulator if it is defective.
57
57
57
CONTROL SYSTEM
Gages. Inspect temperature, oil, and air pressure gages on control
panel for cracked or broken glass, insecure mounting, and defective
operation.
..................
57
57
See that gages are securely mounted. Replace damaged or defective

gages.
58
58
58
Meter. Inspect ammeter for cracked or broken glass, loose mounting

screws, and defective operation.
..................
58
58
Tighten or replace loose or missing mounting screws.

damaged or defective meters.
59
59
59
Safely Valve and Service Valves. Trip the safety valve by hand when
starting the unit and when the air receiver pressure reaches 70 psi. Do
not change the safety valve setting. Inspect the two air receiver
service valves for proper seating.
48
screws. Replace
Replace
Technical
Inspection
Service
Monthly
Weekly
CONTROL SYSTEM-Continued
Report any deficiency to the proper authority.
..................
59
59
62
62
62
Linkage. Inspect all control linkage for loose or missing bolts and
screws, and for defective operation. Check the linkage for worn or
missing connecting pins or locking pins.
..................
62
62
Tighten or replace any loose or missing bolts, screws, and pins.
71
71
71
Slowdown Valve. Check to see if the slowdown valve moves the

throttle lever to slow down the engine.
..................
71
71
Report any deficiency to the proper authority.
80
80
80
FRAME AND MOUNTINGS

Frame. Inspect for cracks, breaks, broken welds, and for loose and
missing bolts.
..................
80
80
Tighten or replace all loose or missing bolts. See that cracks, breaks,
and broken welds are repaired before further damage results.
84
84
84
Mounting. Inspect the mounting springs, rebound clips, and vibration

dampers for cracks. Tighten the mounting nuts if they are loose.
..................
84
84
Replace broken or cracked springs and vibration dampers.
142
142
142
COMPRESSOR
Aftercooler and Connections. Inspect aftercooler for obstructions in
core air passages. Make certain that connections are tight and
that air leaks are not evident.
..................
142
142
Clean aftercooler core if necessary and tighten any loose mounting

bolts and connections.
144
144
144
Valve (Inlet and Discharge). Check valves for leaks or unusual

noises. Unusual noises usually indicate broken valve plates or
springs. Leaks are indicated by failure of compressor bank to
pump up to normal reservoir pressure.
49
Technical
Inspection
Service
Monthly
Weekly
COMPRESSOR-Continued
Remove valve if necessary and clean thoroughly. Replace all broken
or damaged parts.
..................
144
144
145
145
145
..................
145
145
146
146
146
..................
146
146
Tighten cylinder-head and

Correct any leaks.
147
147
147
Crankcase and Oil Filter. Inspect crankcase, oil filter, and lines and
connections for leaks.
..................
147
147
Change crankcase oil and replace oil filter elements as directed in

the current lubrication order. See that all connections are tight.
148
148
148
..................
148
148
Unloader Pilot Valve. Check unloader piot valve for proper

operation. Compressor should unload approximately 100 psi. If
pilot valve chatters during operation, the differential range is set
too close.
Adjust pilot valve setting if necessary.
Cylinder Head Valves and Gaskets. Inspect cylinder- head mounting

bolts for tightness. The correct torque-wrench pull on cylinderhead bolts is 90 foot- pounds and on valve nuts is 25 foot-pounds.
Check for leaks.
valve mounting bolts if
necessary.
Air Cleaners. Inspect air cleaners for secure mountings and tighten
connections.
Service air cleaners as directed in the current lubrication order. See
that all connections are tight.
Section IV. TROUBLESHOOTING

48. Use of Troubleshooting Section
This section provides information useful in diagnosing and correcting unsatisfactory operation or failure of the air
compressor or any of its components. Each trouble symptom stated is followed by a list of probable causes of the trouble.
The possible remedy recommended is described opposite the probable cause.
Note
All references in this section to paragraphs in chapter 5 (pars. 176 through 235)
pertain to operations that are the responsibility of the field
50
and depot maintenance personnel. Organizational maintenance personnel should not proceed without proper authority.
49. Engine Fails to Start
Probable cause
a. Lack of fuel.
b. Overchoking.
Possible remedy
Fill tank and prime carburetor.
Let engine stand for a few minutes then
repeat starting procedure without
choking.
Disconnect and clean fuel lines (par. 71).
Remove, clean, adjust, and replace.
Drain and refill fuel tank (par. 72);
clean fuel pump bowl (par. 74).
Tighten connections.
Clean and adjust points (par. 95).
Check condenser and coil. Replace
if necessary (pars. 200 through 204).
See note in paragraph 48.
Test specific gravity (par. 90). Recharge if necessary.
Tight or replace as necessary (par. 110).
Replace (par. 120).
c. Dirt in fuel lines.

d. Fouled spark plug.
e. Water in fuel.
f. Loose wiring.
g. Defective distributor.
h. Weak batteries.
i. Loose governor levers.
j. Leaking intake manifold
gasket.
k. Leaking valves.
l. Improper ignition timing.
Grind valves and seats (par. 122).

Check timing with timing check light
(par. 98).
Check valve adjustment (par. 121).
m. Improper valve timing.

50. Engine Misfires
Probable cause
a. Fouled spark plug.
b. Loose wiring.
c. Defective distributor.
Possible remedy
Remove, clean, adjust and replace (par. 96).
Tighten connections.
Check condenser and coil. Replace if
necessary (pars. 200 through 204).
Tighten head nuts (par. 122). Replace
gasket if necessary (par. 122).
d. Leaking cylinder head gasket.

e. Leaking intake manifold
gaskets.
f. Dirt in fuel lines.
g. Water in fuel.
Replace gaskets (pars. 120 and 123).

Disconnect and clean (par. 71).
Drain and refill tank (par. 72). Clean
fuel pump bowl (par. 74).
Adjust carburetor (par. 77).
Replace (par. 122).
Clean and inspect. Replace if necessary (par. 122).
Adjust (par. 121).
(par. 98).
h. Improper fuel mixture.

i. Broken or warped valves.
j. Sticking valves.
k. Improper valve clearance.
I. Improper ignition timing.
51
51. Engine Overheats

Probable cause
a. Low coolant level.
b. Obstructed or broken water
hose.
c. Radiator shutters do not open
or close.
d. Clogged radiator.
Possible remedy
Fill radiator and check for leaks.
Flush cooling system (par. 80). Replace hose (par. 86).
Adjust shutterstat (par. 189). See
Note in paragraph 48.
Flush cooling system (par. 80). Clean
radiator fins.
Flush cooling system (par. 80).
Push choke control button in.
Adjust carburetor (par. 77). Blow out
air cleaner (par. 76).
(par. 98).
Change crankcase oil (fig. 16).
Check against Lubrication Order
5-5065 (fig. 16).
Check load against operating capacity.
e. Obstructed water jackets.

f. Partly closed choke valve.
g. Improper fuel mixture.
h. Improper ignition timing
i. Diluted oil.
j. Improper lubrication.
k. Overload.
52. Engine Does Not Develop Full Power
Probable cause
a. Improper fuel mixture.
Possible remedy
Adjust carburetor (par. 77). Blow out
air cleaner (par. 76).
(par. 98).
Place a few drops of oil on weather cap
hinge (fig. 16).
Tighten or replace as necessary
(par. 110).
Remove, clean, adjust, and replace
(par. 96).
Check condenser and coil. Replace as
necessary (pars. 200 through 204).
Change crankcase oil (fig. 16).
Replace gaskets (par. 96).
Tighten head nuts (par. 122). Replace
gasket if necessary (par. 122).
Adjust (par. 121).
Grind valves and inserts (par. 122).
Replace if necessary.
Replace (par. 233). See note in
paragraph 48.
Replace (par. 122).
paragraph 48.
paragraph 48.
b. Improper ignition timing.

c. Obstructed exhaust line.
d. Loose governor levers.
e. Fouled spark plugs.
f. Defective distributor.
g. Oil too thin.

h. Leaking spark plug gaskets
i. Leaking cylinder head gasket.
j. Improper valve clearance.
k. Worn valve seats.
l. Sticking or worn piston rings.
m. Weak valve springs.
n. Worn pistons.
o. Worn cylinder sleeves.
52
53. Engine Knocks
Probable cause
a. Lack of oil.
b. Improper ignition timing.
c. Improper valve clearance.

d. Worn pistons.
Possible remedy
Add oil to FULL mark on oil-level gage.
Adjust timing with timing check light
(par. 98).
Adjust valve to rocker arm clearance
(par. 121).
Replace (par. 23). See note in paragraph 48.
e. Worn cylinder sleeves.

Install new camshaft and new crankshaft gear (pars. 222 and 224). See
note in paragraph 48.
Remove carbon (par. 223). See note in
paragraph 48.
Replace bearings (par. 222). See note
in paragraph 48.
Replace bearings (par. 223). See note
in paragraph 48.
f. Loose piston pins.

g. Worn connecting rod bushing.
h. Worn timing gears.
i. Carbon in cylinders.
j. Excessive main bearing clearance.
k. Excessive connecting rod bearing clearance.
54. Faulty Carburetion
Probable cause
a. Carburetor out of adjustment.
b. Clogged air cleaner.
c. Water in fuel supply.
Possible remedy
Adjust carburetor (par. 77).
Blow out air cleaner elements (par. 76).
Drain and refill fuel tank (par. 72).
Clean sediment bowl at fuel pump
(par. 74).
Blow out fuel line (par. 71).
Replace gasket (par. 120).
Tighten cylinder head nuts to recommended torque of 90 ft-lbs. Replace
gasket if necessary (par. 122),
Grind valves and valve inserts
(par. 122). Replace if worn.
d. Clogged fuel line.

e. Leaking intake manifold.
f. Leaking engine cylinder head
gasket.
g. Leaking valves.
55. Unusual Noise in Air Receiver or Compressor Cylinder Head

Probable cause
a. Broken valve plates or springs.
b. Intake valves sticking.
56. Failure to Pump Up to Pressure

Probable cause
a. Leaking compressor valves or
broken valve plates or springs.
b. Clogged compressor air
cleaners.
Possible remedy
Replace defective parts (par. 126).
Remove carbon from valve plate. Free
valve springs and unloader plunger.
Possible remedy
Remove and clean filter elements
(par. 123).
53
c. Unloader pilot out of adjustment.

d. Leaks in gaskets or air line
fittings.
e. Worn or broken piston rings.
Adjust unloader pilot (par. 107).

Check fittings. Replace worn gaskets
(pars. 124 and 126).
Replace piston rings (par. 223). See
57. Unit Stalls Before Loading

Probable cause
a. Suction valve unloader
plunger is stuck.
b. Pilot valve air liner loose.
c. Check and bleed valve out of
adjustment.
d. Diaphragm end screws loose.
Possible remedy
Tighten air liner.
Adjust check and bleed valve
(par.106).
Tighten diaphragm end screws.
58. Compressor Cylinder Bank Knocks

Probable cause
a. Low oil level.
Possible remedy
Fill crankcase to FULL mark on oil
level gage.
Replace connecting rod bearings
(par. 223). See note in paragraph 48.
Replace piston pins (par. 223). See
b. Loose or worn connecting rod

bearings.
c. Loose or worn piston pins.
59. Unloader Pilot Chatters

Probable cause
Differential pressure range set
too close.
Possible remedy
60. High or Low Air Pressure Gage

Probable cause
a. Unloader pilot out of adjustment.
b. Intake valve unloader plunger
is stuck.
c. Faulty air pressure gage.
Reading
Possible remedy
Replace air pressure gage (par. 102d).
61. Low Oil Pressure

Probable cause
a. Lack of oil.
Possible remedy
Fill crankcase to FULL mark on oil
level gage.
Drain and refill crankcase with fresh
oil. Replace oil-filter elements.
Remove, clean and reinstall suction
screen (par. 218). See note in
paragraph 48.
Remove, clean and reinstall relief valve
Disconnect and clean oil line (par. 219).
See note in paragraph 48. Replace
oil pressure gage if necessary
(par. 102c).
b. Oil sludge.
c. Clogged suction screen.
d. Sticking pressure relief valve.
e. Clogged lines to oil pressure
gage or defective gage.
54
62. Low Charging Rate When Engine is Running
Probable cause
a. Loose generator drive belt.
b. Faulty generator operation.
Possible remedy
Tighten generator drive belt (par. 92a).
Replace generator brushes (par. 92b).
Replace generator if necessary (par. 92c and d).
Overhaul generator (par. 196). See note in
paragraph 48.
Adjust or replace regulator (par. 197).
c. Defective current and voltage regulator.
63. Panel Light Does Not Light
Probable cause
a. Defective panel bulb.
b. Defective ignition switch.
Possible remedy
Replace bulb (par. 103d).
Replace the switch (par. 103b),
64. Starting Motor Does Not Operate
a.
b.
c.
d.
Probable cause
Weak batteries.
Loose or corroded connections.
Defective starting switch.
Defective magnetic switch.
Possible remedy
Change batteries (par. 90c).
Clean and tighten connections.
Replace switch (par. 103a).
Replace switch (par. 99). Repair if necessary
Replace brushes (par. 94).
Clean commutator (par. 198d). See note in
paragraph 48.
Repair or replace armature (par. 198d).
Replace coils (par. 198d). See note
in paragraph 48.
e. Worn brushes.
f. Dirty commutator.
g. Shorted armature.
h. Defective field coils.
Section V. RADIO SUPPRESSION

65. Definition of Suppression
Radio suppression is the effective elimination of electrical disturbances within the equipment which interfere with radio
reception and which disclose the location of the air compressor and associated equipment to suitable detectors.
66. Source of Interference
The spark plugs, ignition wires from distributor to spark plugs, starting motor, generator and poor electrical grounds
between mounted electrical parts and the compressor mounting frame are common sources of electrical interference.
67. Methods Used to Suppress Interference
(fig. 17)
a. Shielding. Distributor to spark plug wires are shielded. Shielded wire is used between the ammeter and voltage
regulator
55
and from voltage regulator to generator. All battery cables are shielded.
b. Bonding. All cable clamps and bonding straps are securely attached with bolts and external toothed lockwashers.
Bonding straps are installed at the following points:
(1) One bond strap from the compressor support frame to the bolt which attaches magnetic switch to battery
box.
(2) One bond strap from instrument panel to hood top.
(3) Two bond straps from radiator to compressor support frame.
(4) Two bond straps from front engine support to upper oil pan.
(5) Two bond straps from rear engine support to compressor support frame.
(6) One bond strap from voltage regulator support to crankcase upper oil pan.
(7) One bond strap from voltage regulator ground to generator stud.
c. Capacitor. A capacitor is connected from the center voltage regulator terminal to the frame. It filters the spark
discharge and prevents electrical radiation.
Figure 17. Radio suppression components.

56
68. Suppression System Testing
a. Install a battery-powered radio receiver in good operating condition not more than 10 feet from the air compressor.
A wide band receiver covering the frequency range of 0.55 to 156.0 megacycles is preferred.
b. Start the equipment and tune the receiver. Turn receiver volume control to maximum and select three widely
separated frequencies for listening. Use frequencies that are free from signals with strong carriers so that the receiver will
be in its most sensitive operating condition.
c. Operate the engine throttle manually and listen to receiver speaker or headset. A regular clicking sound which
varies with engine speed and ceases the instant the ignition switch is shut off is caused by the ignition circuit.
d. Systematically replace the suppression components in the compressor (par. 69), testing after the replacement of
each component to see if the trouble has been eliminated. Make sure that bonding straps and all electrical components
(voltage regulator, generator, and so forth) are securely attached and mounted.
69. Suppression Component Replacements
a. General. When replacing suppression components, be sure that new components are interconnected and
attached in exactly the same position as the defective material was originally installed.
It is important that toothed lockwashers be used for attaching bonding straps to assure a firm bond.
b. Ignition System Components.

(1) One bond strap is located between voltage regulator ground and generator stud and one bond strap
connects the voltage regulator support to the crankcase upper oil pan.
(2) One bond strap is located between magnetic switch mounting bolt and compressor support frame.
(3) A capacitor is connected between the voltage regulator center terminal and the frame.
c. Instrument panel.
(1) One bond strap is connected between the instrument panel and the top hood of the compressor housing.
(2) Shielded wire connects the ammeter to the voltage regulator.
d. Engine parts.
(1) A bond strap connects each side of the radiator to the compressor support frame.
57
(2) A bond strap is located on each side of the equipment from the front engine support to the crankcase upper
oil pan.
(3) A bond strap is located on each side of the equipment from the rear engine support to the compressor
frame.
Note
The replacement of the suppression components is obvious and requires no
detailed instructions.
Section VI. FUEL SYSTEM
70. Description
The fuel system consists of a 42-gallon fuel tank, a single downdraft carburetor, a fuel pump, a double air filter to
protect the intake from grit and dirt and a variable speed governor. Included are the necessary fuel lines from tank to
pump and from pump to carburetor and the governor-to-carburetor connections. Figure 18 illustrates the fuel system
schematically.
71. Cleaning Fuel Lines
a. Close the shutoff valve below the fuel tank, and disconnect the fuel line from the tube elbow below the tank (fig.
18).
b. Hold a suitable receptacle below the fuel pump and disconnect the tank-to-pump fuel line and pump-to-carburetor
fuel line from the tube elbows in the pump.
c. Disconnect the fuel line from the carburetor inlet opening, meanwhile holding a shallow receptacle under the
carburetor to catch whatever fuel is in the carburetor bowl.
d. Blow out the fuel lines with compressed air. Make certain that the fuel line connector threads are not stripped or
otherwise damaged.
e. Reconnect the pump-to-carburetor and pump-to-tank fuel lines, and open the shutoff valve below the fuel tank.
f. Operate the fuel pump primer lever a few times to bring fuel up into the pump bowl.
72. Draining and Cleaning the Fuel Tank
a. Remove the drain plug from the bottom of the fuel tank and drain the fuel into clean receptacles for later possible
re-use. It is advisable to filter the gasoline through layers of cheese cloth to remove foreign particles or sediment that may
be present in the tank.
b. Flush the interior of the tank with gasoline, filtering the gasoline into a receptacle as it emerges from the drain
opening. Repeat this process until the filtering cloth indicates that the draining gasoline is free of sediment.
58
Figure 18. Diagram of fuel system.

59
Figure 19. Exploded view of fuel tank and fittings.

60
c. Reinstall the drain plug and fill the tank (42 gallons) with a good grade of gasoline.
d. Make certain that the air vent hole in the tank fillercap is open. If necessary, clean out the vent hole with a short
length of wire.
e. Examine the exterior of the tank for bare or rusty spots.
Repaint if necessary (par. 43).
73. Replacing Fuel Tank
a. Removal (fig. 19). Refer to paragraph 128 for removing part of the housing to make the fuel tank accessible.
Disconnect the tube assembly (6) at the connector (9). Remove the cap screws (12), washers (13), and nuts (14). Take
off the straps (11) from around the air receiver and fuel tank (7). Remove the fuel tank from the unit. The fuel line to the
fuel pump can be removed by disconnecting the elbow (1) at the fuel pump and removing it from the tube assembly. Take
out the cap screw (4) with lockwasher (3) and remove the clamp (2). Pull the tube assembly through the grommet (5) in
the rear support. Unscrew the cover and lift out the screen (15). Unscrew the fuel level gage (16). Remove the elbow (8)
with the connection and the pipe plug (17). The packing (10) need not be removed.
b. Installation (fig. 19). Screw the elbow (8), pipe plug (17), and fuel level gage (16) into the fuel tank (7). Put in the
screen (15) and screw on the tank cover. Slide the tube assembly (6) through the grommet (5). Screw the elbow (1) into
the fuel pump and attach the tube assembly. Install the clamp (2) with the cap screw (4) and lockwasher (3). Place the
fuel tank in position under the air receiver and install the straps (11) around both tanks with the cap screw (12), washer
(13) and nut (14). Screw the tube assembly into the connector (9). Replace the part of the housing which was removed
(par. 130).
74. Cleaning Fuel Pump
a. Loosen the thumb nut at the top of the fuel pump bail (fig. 20), and swing the bail down out of the way.
b. Remove the fuel bowl, bowl gasket and screen from the fuel pump cover.
c. Clean the screen thoroughly with solvent, and wipe out the inside of the bowl with a lint-free cloth.
d. Inspect the bowl gasket carefully. Replace gasket if there are any doubts as to its condition.
e. Reinstall the bowl gasket and bowl, and swing the bail up into place. Tighten the thumb nut securely.
61
Figure 20. Fuel pump installed.

62
75. Replacing Fuel Pump

a. Removal (fig. 20).
(1) Disconnect the inlet and outlet fuel lines from the tube elbows in the fuel pump cover.
(2) Remove the mounting bolts and lockwashers that attach the fuel pump to the engine crankcase, and
carefully lift off the fuel pump and pump mounting gasket.
b. Installation (fig. 20).

(1) With the mounting gasket in place against the mounting surface of the pump body, insert the rocker arm on
the fuel pump through the opening in the engine. Make sure that the "pad" or flat surface of the rocker arm
rests against the fuel cam of the engine camshaft.
(2) Hold the pump and gasket in position against the engine and install the two mounting bolts and
lockwashers. Start the bolts by hand to prevent damage to the threads; then tighten them securely with a
wrench.
(3) Make certain that the fuel lines are in proper alinement with the tube elbows in the pump cover. Connect
both fuel lines, starting the tube nuts with the fingers and then tightening securely with a wrench of proper
size.
76. Servicing Engine Air Cleaners
(fig. 21)
a. The air filter covers (4) are held in place with a spring (3).
Remove the covers and lift out the filter elements (6).
b. Blow out the filter elements with compressed air. Wipe out the inside of the filter connections with a lint-free cloth
dampened with solvent.
c. If, upon inspection, gaskets have loosened from the air cleaner, remount and adhere with Pliobond or No. EC 11
cement.
d. After cleaning, insert the filter elements down into the connections, and reinstall the covers.
77. Carburetor Description and Adjustment
a. Description (fig. 22). The carburetor is a single downdraft unit, incorporating both a primary and secondary
venturi. A fuel screen in the fuel inlet can be removed for cleaning or replacement by unscrewing the hex head plug that
holds the screen in place. Fuel enters the bowl by passing around the fuel valve. The fuel valve assumes a more or less
fixed opening, as regulated by the float, sufficient to maintain a proper level in the fuel bowl equal to the fuel demand of the
engine. At slow idle, the idle adjusting needle controls the idle mixture delivery. Turning the
63
Figure 21. Exploded view of carburetor and air cleaner.

64
needle clockwise creates a leaner idling mixture; turning the needle counterclockwise makes the mixture richer. In the
double venturi system, the main venturi determines the maximum volume of air to be admitted into the engine, while the
secondary venturi is used to increase the suction on the high speed system and to aid in the complete atomization of fuel.
A power jet, or "economizer" controls the additional fuel required for maximum power at full throttle operation.
Figure 22. Cutaway view of carburetor.

b. Adjustment (fig. 23).
(1) Start the engine-compressor and allow it to run until warm. Then set the throttle stop screw for desired
idling speed. Idle speed should be between 500 and 700 rpm, and the speed at which the idle is actually set
should be that speed when a minimum amount of vibration takes place. It may be necessary to make a fine
adjustment of the throttle stop screw after adjusting the idle adjustment needle.
(2) the idle adjustment needle to obtain the smoothest possible idle of the engine. Turning the needle in (clock
wise) cuts off the flow of fuel and makes the air-fuel mixture leaner. Turning the needle out (counterclock65
wise) permits more fuel to enter the air stream and makes the mixture richer. Avoid using too lean a
mixture. Good performance and fuel economy depend on an idling mixture that is well balanced.
(3) Hold the throttle approximately half-open. Turn the main jet adjustment needle clockwise until the engine
begins to run irregularly, indicating a lean mixture. Then turn the needle back out slowly and carefully,
counting the complete turns of the needle required before the engine begins to show a trace of rich mixture.
The final main jet adjustment will be a point halfway between the lean point and the rich point. Hold the
needle firmly, and tighten the packing nut to prevent leakage of fuel around the needle.
Figure 23. Carburetor adjustments.

66
78. Carburetor
(fig. 21)
a. Removal.
(1) Remove the four bolts (8) and lockwashers (9) that fasten the air cleaner assembly (1 through 7) to the filter
supports (11). Lift the assembled air cleaner and the packing ring (10) from the carburetor (15).
(2) Disconnect the pump-to-carburetor fuel line from the carburetor fuel inlet.
(3) Disconnect the governor rod from the carburetor throttle lever.
(4) Remove the two hex nuts (16) and lockwashers (17) and lift the carburetor and its gasket (18) from the
intake manifold studs.
b. Installation.
(1) Position the carburetor (15) and its mounting gasket (18) on the engine intake manifold studs, and install the
two hex nuts (16) and lockwashers (17). Tighten the nuts securely.
(2) Reconnect the governor rod to the carburetor throttle lever.
(3) Reconnect the fuel line to the carburetor fuel inlet.
(4) Install the packing ring (10) and assembled air cleaner (1 through 7) and fasten the air cleaner to the
supports (11) with the four hex head bolts (8) and lockwashers (9).
(5) Adjust the carburetor, if necessary, as instructed in paragraph 77b.
Section VII. COOLING SYSTEM
79. Description
(fig. 24)
a. Water Pump Circulation. The water pump circulates coolant from a common suction connection leading from the
radiator bottom tank into two individual discharge connections. One connection directs coolant to the engine bank; the
other directs coolant to the compressor bank.
b. Engine Bank Circulation. From the engine bank connection, coolant passes around the cylinder liners and up
through cored holes in the engine cylinder head. Jacketing is provided to avoid overheating the intake and exhaust valves
in the cylinder head. After cooling the engine cylinder head and combustion
67
chamber, the coolant flows into the exhaust manifold and through the water hose into the radiator top tank.
c. Compressor Bank Circulation. From the compressor bank connection, coolant passes around the cylinder liners
and up through cored holes in the compressor cylinder head. Jacketing is provided in the compressor cylinder head to
lower the temperature of the compressed air being diverted into the compressor discharge manifold. After cooling the
compressor cylinder head and valves, the coolant flows through the engine intake manifold and into a common connection
which merges with the coolant from the exhaust manifold. The coolant then is directed through the water hose into the
radiator top tank.
Figure 24. Engine-compressor cooling system

68
d. Air Shutter System. The radiator shutters are operated by an air cylinder connected with a shutterstat and an air
filter to an air line from the air receiver. The shutterstat is mounted in the coolant connection between the water pump
body and the radiator. As long as the temperature of the coolant remains normal (below 180 F.), the air line from the air
receiver to the air cylinder is "open" and the cylinder plunger holds the pivoting shutter lever in a raised position to keep the
radiator shutter closed. However, as the temperature of the coolant approaches 180 F., the shutterstat element expands,
forcing the needle valve toward its Seat. Thus, the air pressure to the cylinder is decreased gradually, and the cylinder
spring forces the plunger toward the cylinder air inlet. The shutter lever is pivoted downward, opening the radiator
shutters.
80. Flushing the Cooling System
The entire cooling system must be flushed approximately every 1,024 hours of operation to remove dirt, foreign
matter, and liming deposits. In hard water areas, flush the system more frequently. The flushing procedure is as follows:
a. Open the radiator drain cock and the two drain cocks in the crankcase, and drain all coolant from the entire
system.
Note. One crankcase drain cock is located on each side of the engine-compressor crankcase. Be
sure to open both drain cocks.
b. Prepare a cleaning solution of one pound of washing soda to every three gallons of water (a total of 5 1/2 pounds
of washing soda and 16 1/2 gallons of water). Close the radiator drain cock and fill the system with the cleaning solution.
c. Start the engine and allow it to run for 30 minutes after it has reached normal operating temperature (180 to 215
F.).
d. Drain the cleaning solution from the cooling system (a, above) and thoroughly flush the system with clean, soft
water to remove all traces of solution.
e. After the system has been thoroughly flushed with clean soft water, close the radiator drain cock and fill the
cooling system with 10-gallons of antifreeze solution and 6 1/2 gallons water. Add an acceptable rust inhibitor.
81. Shutterstat
(fig. 25)
a. Removal.
(1) Close the shutoff cock (29) in the air filter air inlet line (27).
(2) Disconnect the air line (9) from filter to shutterstat and the elbow (10) at the top of the shutterstat.
69
(3) Disconnect the air line (18) from shutterstat to air cylinder and the tee (13) at the side of the shutterstat.
(4) Unscrew the shutterstat (11) from the water pump inlet connection and remove the elbow (12), tee (13) and
drain cock (14) from the shutterstat outlet opening.
b. Installation.
(1) Assemble the elbow (12, fig. 25), tee (13) and drain cock (14) to the shutterstat (11), and screw the
shutterstat down into the opening in the water pump inlet connection.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Lockwasher, 1/4 (2 req)

Cap screw, 1/4-20 x 5/8 (2 req)
Connector, 1/4 x 1/8 M (2 req)
Bolt, hex hd, 5/16-18 x 1/2 (2
req)
Clamp
Clamp
Nut, hex, 5/16-24 (1 req)
Air line, 1/4 x 50
Elbow, 1/4 x 1/8 M x 90
Shutterstat
Elbow 1/8 M x 1/8 F x 90
Tee, 1/8 M x 1/8 F x 1/4
Drain cock (2 req)
Cap screw, 1/4-20 x 1/2 (1 req)
Clamp
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
Nut, hex 1/4-20 (1 req)

Air line, 1/4 x 40
Shutter assembly
Bolt, hex hd, 5/16-18 x 5/8 (2
req) and washer
Air cylinder
Nut, hex, 4-28 (1 req)
Control rod
Bolt, hex hd, 5/16-18 x (6
req)
Nut, special (6 req)
Packing
Air line, 5/16 x 30
Elbow, 5/16 x 1/8 M x 90
Shutoff cock
Air filter
Figure 25. Exploded view of radiator shutter and controls.

70
(2) Connect the air line (18) to the tee (13) and the air line (9) to the elbow (10).
(3) Open the shutoff cock (29).
82. Shutter Air Filter

(1) Close the shutoff cock (29).
(2) Disconnect the air line (9) from filter to shutterstat and the connector (3) in the top of the filter (30).
(3)
1
2
3
4
5
6
Screw, cover (7 req)

Lockwasher (7 req)
Top filter body
Filler plug
Filler plug gasket
Filter body gasket
7
8
9
10
11
Felt, with oiler

Felt
Filter disk
Filter screen
Bottom filter body
Figure 26. Exploded view of shutter air filter.

(3) Remove the two hex head bolts (2) and lockwashers (1) that fasten the filter (30) to the rear engine support.
(4) Pull the filter and air line (27) carefully away from the side of the engine, and hold the shutoff cock (29) firmly
while unscrewing the filter from the male threads of the shutoff cock.
71
b. Disassembly (fig. 26).

(1) Remove the cover screws (1) and lockwashers (2) and disassemble the top filter body (3) and gasket (6)
from the lower filter body (11).
(2) Remove the felt with oiler (7) from the top filter body and the filter disk (9), felt (8) and filter screen (10) from
the bottom filter body.
c. Cleaning. Wash all parts, including the felts, with cleaning solvent, and blow dry with a low pressure air jet. If the
compressor has been in operation for a year or more, discard the felts and replace with new ones.
d. Reassembly (fig. 26).
(1) Place the filter disk (9) and then the filter screen (10) into the countersunk ledge of the bottom filter body
(11) to protect the body cavity which contains the air inlet opening.
(2) Insert the felt (8) into the remaining cavity in the bottom filter body. It is this latter cavity that will be filled with
radiator shutter fluid after installation.
(3) Insert the felt with oiler (7) up into the top filter body (3), threading the oiler through the oil hole in the top
body so that it can be inserted into the fluid reservoir of the bottom body.
(4) Fasten the top body (3) and gasket (6) to the bottom body with the cover screws (1) and lockwashers (2).
(5) Remove the filler plug (4) and gasket (5) from the top body, and carefully poke the oiler, or wick, down under
the felt (8). Temporarily reinstall the filler plug and gasket.
e. Installation (fig. 25).

(1) Hold the shutoff cock (29) firmly, and carefully screw the air filter (30) onto the threads of the shutoff cock.
(2) Aline the tapped holes in the bottom of the filter with the drilled holes in the rear engine support and install
the two hex head bolts (2) and lockwashers (1).
(3) Connect the air line (9) to the connector (3) in the top of the filter. Start the tube nut with the fingers; then
tighten with a proper size wrench.
(4) Fill the fluid reservoir of the filter as instructed in the lubrication order
(par. 42g) and reinstall the filler plug.
(5) Open the shutoff cock (29).
72
83. Shutter Air Cylinder

(1) Close the shutoff cock (29), and disconnect the air line (18) from the connector (3) in the air cylinder (21).
(2) Remove the hex nut (22) from the shutter control rod (23).
(3) Remove the two hex head bolts (20) and lockwashers (5), and lift the air cylinder (21) and bracket from the
shutter assembly (19).
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Cylinder body
Nut, hex jam, 5/16-18 (2 req)
Piston head, small
Piston cup expander
Piston cup washer
Piston cup
Piston head, large
Piston lubricator felt
Spring
Piston rod
Bearing pin, 3/8 in.
Expansion plug (2 req)
Bearing pin, 5/16 in.
Drilled bearing pin
Bellcrank, rh
Bearing block
Bellcrank, 1h
Cotter pin, special, 3/32 x 1 3/4
Rod connecting block
Shutter lock 37
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
Screw, rd hd, No. 10-24 x 1/4 (2

req)
Lockwasher, No. 10 (2 req)
Lock clip, rh
Lock clip, 1h
Dust cap retainer
Dust cap
Dust cap felt
Dust cap washer
Plug, pipe, 1/8-27 (2 req)
Screw, rd hd, 1/4-20 x 5/8 (4
req)
Cylinder head
Cylinder head gasket
Bearing lubricator felt
Felt retainer ring
Screw, flat hd, 5/16-18 x 5/8 (2
req)
Mounting bracket
Figure 27. Exploded view of air cylinder.

73

(1) Remove the two flathead screws (36) and disassemble the air cylinder from the mounting bracket (37).
(2) Remove the drilled bearing pin (14) and bearing block (16) from the bell-cranks (15 and 17). Remove the
special cotter pin (18), drive out the bearing pins (11 and 13) and remove the bell-cranks (15 and 17) from
the cylinder head arm and the rod connecting block (19).
(3) Remove the connecting block (19) and hex jam nut (2) from the end of the piston rod (10).
(4) Take out the two roundhead screws (21) and lockwashers (22) and disassemble the shutter lock (20), lock
clips (23 and 24), dust cap retainer (25), dust cap (26), felt (27) and washer (28) from the cylinder head (32).
(5) Remove the four roundhead screws (30) and lockwashers (31) and carefully remove the cylinder head (32)
and its gasket (33) from the cylinder body. Slide the retainer ring (35) and lubricator felt (34) from the
bearing boss on the inside of the cylinder head.
(6) Pull the piston rod (10) from the cylinder body (1) and slide the spring (9), large piston head (7), piston cup
(6), washer (5), piston cup expander (4) and small piston head (3) from the rod.
c. Cleaning and Inspection.

(1) Clean all parts thoroughly with cleaning solvent and blow dry with compressed air.
(2) Examine the piston cup carefully for damage or excessive wear. At regular overhaul periods, it is advisable
to replace the piston cup and cup expander.
(3) Replace any broken parts with new ones.
d. Reassembly and Adjustment (fig. 27).

(1) Saturate the lubricating felts (8 and 34) with light machine oil during reassembly. Also, apply a film of light
machine oil to the inside surface of the cylinder body (1).
(2) Install the small piston head (3), piston cup expander (4), washer (5), piston cup (6), large piston head (7)
and spring (9) onto the piston rod (10). Assemble the lubricator felt (8) to the large piston head. Insert this
assembled group into the cylinder body, using a compression sleeve to avoid scuffing the edges of the
piston cup.
(3) Position the lubricator felt (34) and retainer ring (35) over the bearing boss on the inside of the cylinder head
74
(32). Assemble the cylinder head (32) and its gasket (33) to the cylinder body, and install the four roundhead machine screws (30) and lockwashers (31).
(4) Slide the dust cap washer (28), felt (27), dust cap (26) and dust cap retainer (25) over the piston rod and
down against the cylinder head. Attach the right-hand lock clip (23) and right side of the retainer (25) to the
cylinder head with a roundhead screw (21) and lockwasher (22). Assemble the lock (20) to the right-hand
lock clip (23) and the left-hand lock clip (24) to the lock. Attach the left-hand lock clip and left side of the
retainer (25) to the cylinder head with the remaining roundhead screw (21) and lockwasher (22).
(5) Temporarily install the hex jam nut (2) and connecting block (19) onto the end of the piston rod (10).
Assemble the bellcranks (15 and 17) to the cylinder head arm and connecting block (19) with the bearing
pins (11 and 13). Position the bearing block (16) between the bellcranks and install the drilled bearing pin
(14).
(6) Place the assembled cylinder on a flat, smooth surface and press the piston rod in the fully retracted
position. Measure the distances from the surface plate to the center of the drilled bearing pin (14) and from
the surface plate to the center of the cylinder head arm bearing pin (11). The center of the drilled bearing
pin should be 11./16 inch lower than the center of the upper bearing pin. If this measurement is less than
11/16 inch, the connecting block (19) must be screwed further onto the piston rod. If the measurement is
greater than 11/16 inch the connecting block must be backed off slightly. Repeat the measuring and
adjusting process until the measurement is exact. Then tighten the hex jam nut (2) and install the
connecting block bearing pin (13). Lock the two bearing pins (11 and 13) with the special cotter pin (18).
(7) Fasten the mounting bracket (37) to the air cylinder with the two flathead screws (36).

(1) Fasten the air cylinder (21) and its bracket to the top of the shutter assembly with the two hex bead bolts
(20) and lockwashers (5). The shutter control rod (23) must be inserted up through the bearing block and
drilled bearing pin at the end of the bell cranks. Install the hex nut (22).
75
(2) Connect the air line (18) to the tube connector (3) in the air cylinder, and open the shutoff cock (29).
84. Shutter Assembly
(fig. 25)
a. Removal.
(1) Remove the air cylinder (21) from the shutter as instructed in paragraph 83a.
(2) Remove the six hex head bolts (24) and hex nuts (25) that fasten the shutter assembly (19) and bond straps
to the front hood end support. Remove the packing (26).
b. Installation.
(1) Fasten the new shutter assembly (19) and two bond straps to the front hood end support with the six hex
head bolts (24) and hex nuts (25). Be sure the packing (26) is seated between the mounting flange on the
shutter assembly and the radiator.
(2) Install the air cylinder as instructed in paragraph 83e.
(3) Check to see that the shutters and shutters-to-cylinder linkage move freely and easily.
85. Replacing the Fan Belt
a. Loosen the hex nuts on the through-bolt that attaches the generator to its mounting bracket, and tilt the generator
toward the engine until the fan belt can be removed from the generator pulley. Lift the belt over the fan.
b. Install the new belt around the crankshaft pulley and generator pulley.
c. Pivot the generator away from the engine on the through bolt. The tension of the fan belt must be such that
pressure of the thumb at a point midway between the two pulleys will deflect the belt approximately 3/4 to 1 inch. When
the generator has been pivoted enough to meet this requirement, tighten the through bolt hex nuts securely.
86. Water Pump Removal and Installation
a. Removal.
(1) Open the drain cock (15, fig. 28) and drain the coolant into a clean receptacle for possible re-use.
(2) The radiator inlet pipe (3), radiator-to-pump connection (25), elbow (20), or any one of the five short lengths
of hose (1) can be removed by loosening the screws in the appropriate hose clamps. (2).
76
(3) To separate the radiator water inlet connection (26) and its gasket (27) from the water pump inlet, remove
the two hex head bolts (28) and lockwashers (24).
(4) Remove the pump (fig. 24) by unscrewing and removing the six hex head bolts and lockwashers that
fasten the body to the crankcase.
b. Installation.
(1) Install the radiator water inlet connection (26) and its gasket (27) to the water pump inlet by inserting the two
hex head bolts (28) and lockwashers (24). Before applying the gaskets, clean mating surfaces and coat
gaskets with sealing compound.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Hose, 1 3/4 x 4 (5 req)

Hose clamp (10 req)
Radiator inlet pipe
Pipe plug, 1/4 M
Radiator cap
Radiator cap gasket
Radiator
Cotter pin, 1/8 x 1 1/4 (2 req)
Nut, castellated, 5/8-11 (2 req)
Plain washer, 5/8 (2 req)
Rebound unit
Bolt, special
Nipple, 1/2 x 2
Elbow, 1/2-90
Drain cock
Nut, hex, 5/16-18 (15 req)
Lockwasher, int-ext tooth, 5/16 (15 req)
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
Fan guard rod

Bolt, hex hd, 5/16-18 x 3/4 (3 req)
Elbow, radiator
Fan guard support
Fan
Nut, hex, 3/8-24 (4 req)
Radiator-to-pump connection
Radiator water inlet connection
Gasket
Bolt, hex hd, 3/8-16 x 2 1/4 (2 req)
Screw, self-tapping, No. 10 x 3/8 (8 req)
Fan guard
Figure 28. Exploded view of radiator, fan and coolant hoses.

77
(2) Install the pump (fig. 24) by inserting the six hex head bolts and lockwashers that fasten the body to the
crankcase. Apply sealing compound to all gaskets and replace gaskets if they appear badly worn or
damaged.
(3) Install the five short lengths of hose (1), elbow (20), radiator-to-pump connection (25), and radiator inlet pipe
(3), by tightening the screws in the appropriate clamps (2). Before making connections, coat mating
surfaces with sealing compound.
(4) Close the drain cock (15) and fill the radiator with coolant.
87. Replacing the Fan Guard
(fig. 28)
a. Removal. Unscrew the self-tapping screws (29) that fasten the fan guard (30) to the radiator shroud. Remove the
hex nuts (16) and lockwashers (17) that secure the fan guard rods (18) to the fan guard support (21) and lift off the
assembled guard and rods. If necessary, remove the upper hex nuts (16) and lockwashers (17) and disassemble the rods
from the fan guard.
b. To install the fan guard, reverse the procedures in a above.
88. Radiator and Fan
(fig. 28)
a. Removal.
(1) Open the radiator drain cock (15) and drain the coolant into a clean receptacle for possible re-use.
(2) Remove the radiator shutter assembly (par. 84a).
(3) Remove enough of the compressor housing (par. 128) so that the radiator is exposed for removal.
(4) Disconnect the coolant hoses from the radiator inlet and outlet connections (par. 86).
(5) Remove the fan guard (par. 87a).
(6) Remove the cotter pins (8), castellated nuts (9), plain washers (10), and hex head bolts (12) that fasten the
lower radiator mounting angles to the compressor frame.
(7) Lift the radiator (7) from the frame, being careful not to lose the four rebound units (11) that serve as
vibration dampeners between radiator and frame.
(8) Remove the fan belt (par. 85a). Remove four hex nuts (23) and lockwashers (24) to dismount the fan (22).
b. Installation.
(1) Place the fan (22) on the crankshaft pulley and attach with four hex nuts (23) and lockwashers (24). Install
the fan belt (par. 85b and c).
78
(2) Lift the radiator (7) up into position, making certain that a new rebound unit (11) is placed between the
radiator mounting angle and the compressor frame.
(3) Insert the hex head bolts (12) up through the frame, rebound unit, and mounting angle, and install the
remaining rebound units (11), the plain washers (10) and castellated nuts (9).
(4) Reinstall the fan guard (par. 87b).
(5) Reconnect the coolant hoses to the radiator inlet and outlet openings (par. 86).
(6) Reinstall the housing components (par. 130).

(7) Reinstall the radiator shutter assembly (par. 84b).
(8) Close the shutoff cock and fill the cooling system with 10 gallons of antifreeze solution and 6 1/2 gallons
water. Add an approved rust inhibitor.
(9) When assembling the radiator rebound units (11), the nuts (9) should be drawn down finger tight and turned
one full turn with a wrench when the radiator is full of coolant. Install the cotter pins (8).
Section VIII. ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
89. Description
(fig. 29)
a. General. Three basic electrical circuits that are incorporated into the engine-air compressor are the ignition circuit,
the starting circuit, and the generating circuit. All three circuits are provided with radio interference suppression equipment
and are treated for moisture and fungus-proof resistance.
b. Ignition Circuit. The ignition circuit includes the ignition switch, distributor and coil, spark plugs, and all wiring and
cables which interconnect those components. Each of these parts must be functioning properly to complete the ignition
circuit. The 24-volt distributor and coil are assembled into one housing to increase radio interference suppression. It is
mounted on the crankcase cover and is driven by the accessory drive gear.
c. Starting Circuit. The starting circuit supplies the power to crank the engine and includes the starting motor,
magnetic switch, starting button, batteries, and all interconnecting cables and wiring. The 24-volt starting motor is
equipped with a Bendix drive which automatically meshes the drive pinion with the engine flywheel for starting and
disengages after the engine has been started. The 24-volt magnetic switch is mounted on the battery box and is used to
close the circuit between the batteries and the starting motor. When the starting button on the instrument
79
Figure 29. Pictorial wiring diagram.

80
panel is depressed, the coil winding in the magnetic switch is energized and the switch plunger is forced against the
contact switch to close the electrical circuit. Four 6-volt batteries are connected in series to provide 24 volts for ignition
and starting. The battery cable from ground is connected to the negative post of the last battery in the series.
d. Generating Circuit. The generating circuit supplies all of the electricity required by the electrical system. Basically,
this circuit consists of the generator, current and voltage regulator, ammeter, batteries, and all interconnecting cables and
wiring. The generator is driven by a belt between the generator and crankshaft pulleys. This is a two-brush generator with
ball bearings in the drive end and commutator end. A ventilating fan is mounted on the drive end of the armature shaft.
The current and voltage regulator is mounted on a bracket bolted to the top of the generator frame. This is a three-unit
regulator, consisting of a voltage regulator, current regulator, and cutout relay. The voltage regulator limits the voltage of
the electrical system, protecting the batteries, distributor points and other accessories from excessively high voltage. The
current regulator prevents the generator from exceeding its maximum output. The cutout relay closes the circuit between
generator and batteries when the generator is operating at a sufficient speed to charge the batteries. When the generator
slows down or stops, the cutout relay opens the battery-to-generator circuit to prevent the batteries from discharging back
to the generator. The ammeter indicates battery charge or discharge rate. When the engine-compressor is running at
normal speed, the ammeter hand should be in the "charge" range. If the ammeter shows a continuous discharge, the
condition of the generator, voltage regulator and batteries should be checked to determine the cause.
90. Batteries
a. Cleaning. Keep the batteries clean at all times. If electrolyte is spilled on the battery, wipe off with a weak solution
of baking soda and water. Then rinse off with clear water and dry with a clean cloth. Discard the wiping cloths. Clean the
battery terminals with a wire brush and wash them with a weak solution of baking soda and water. Rinse and dry terminals
after using cleaning solution and apply a thin coating of vaseline to restrict further corrosion.
b. Filling Battery Cells. Check the level of electrolyte in the batteries. The level should be at least /8 inch, but not
more than -/g inch, above top of separators of each cell. Add only distilled water or water of known purity to the electrolyte.
81
Caution: In freezing temperatures, water should be added immediately before the engine-compressor is
started. This will permit the water and electrolyte to be thoroughly mixed by the charging process and
will prevent the added water from freezing.
c. Checking Specific Gravity. Check the specific gravity of the electrolyte with a reliable hydrometer and a
thermometer. All cells will have an approximate gravity reading of 1.285 when fully charged and 1.150 when completely
discharged. Because specific gravity varies with temperature, all hydrometer readings should be corrected in accordance
with the chart shown in figure 30. Recharge the batteries if the corrected specific gravity reading is below 1.225 in warm
weather or 1.250 in cold weather.
d. Battery Removal (fig. 31).
(1) Remove the hood sides from the housing (par. 128).
(2)
Figure 30. Hydrometer correction chart.

82
Figure 31. Exploded view of batteries and supporting parts.

83
(2) Disconnect the electrical lead assemblies (5, 6, and 20) from the terminals on top of the storage batteries
(7). Take care not to short the batteries to the frame or other battery terminals.
(3) Remove four hex nuts (3) and lockwashers (4) and lift off the battery hold-down clamps (2) and battery
clamp pads (1). Lift individual batteries out with a suitable carrier.
(4) Sulphuric acid electrolyte is shipped in boxes (19) used in refilling batteries.
e. Battery Box Removal (fig. 31).

(1) Remove the batteries (d, above).
(2) Remove three hex head cap screws (14) and lockwashers (13). Remove a fourth hex head cap screw (15)
and two lockwashers (16) to free the bond strap (17) and magnetic switch (12) from the battery box (18).
(3) Remove four hex head cap screws (9), plain washers (10), and bumper pads (11). Lift the battery box up
and remove it through the side of the housing. It may require some manipulating of the battery box so it
clears the fuel tank, brace and aftercooler. Remove the four remaining bumper pads. Do not remove the
battery pads (8) unless deteriorated.
f. Inspection. Examine batteries for cracks, leaks and evidence of corrosion. Check specific gravity (par. 90c).
Clean the batteries (par. 90a). Inspect electrical lead assemblies for fraying and breaks. Inspect the battery hold-down
clamps and battery box for deformity. Replace all deteriorated pads and other defective parts.
g. Battery Box Installation (fig. 31).
(1) If removed, cement the battery pads (8) to the bottom. of the battery box with Pliobond or other suitable
adhesive.
(2) Slide the battery box through the side of the housing and place it on the frame over its mounting holes. Slip
four bumper pads (11) under the battery box corners and into the corner mounting holes. Install four more
bumper pads and secure with the hex head cap screws (9) and plain washers (10).
(3) Fasten the magnetic switch (12) to the side of the battery box with three hex head cap screws (14) and
lockwashers (13). Attach the bond strap (17) with a fourth hex head cap screw (15) and two lockwashers
(16).
(4) Install the batteries (h, below)
84
h. Battery Installation.
(1) Place the storage batteries (7, fig. 31) in the battery box (18). Make sure that common terminals are in the
same side; the positive (+) terminals should be nearest the fuel tank.
(2) If removed, cement two battery clamp pads (1) to each battery hold-down clamp (2). Mount the clamps with
four hex nuts (3) and lockwashers (4). It may be necessary to adjust the position of the hex nuts (3) under
the clamp to provide positive holding.
(3) Connect the electrical lead assemblies (5, 6, and 20) to the batteries as shown in figure 30.
(4) Install the hood sides (par. 130).
91. Current and Voltage Regulator

(1) Remove the three regulator terminal screws and disconnect the electrical leads (28 and 29) from the
regulator terminals. Tape together and mark each group of wires so that they can be reinstalled easily.
(2) Remove the ground screw (6) and lockwasher (5) that attach the bond strap (4) to the regulator cover.
(3) Remove the three hex nuts (2), lockwashers (3) and mounting screws (11) that fasten the regulator to the
regulator support (10), and lift off the regulator (1).
(1) Position the regulator (1) on the regulator support (10) and install the three mounting screws (11),
lockwashers
(3) and hex nuts (2).
(2) Attach the bond strap (4) to the regulator cover with the ground screw (6) and lockwasher (5).
(3) Attach the electrical leads (28 and 29) to the regulator terminals with the terminal screws.
Note. Momentarily connect a jumper lead between the BATTERY and GENERATOR terminals of
the regulator before starting the engine-compressor. This produces a momentary surge of current
from batteries to generator, thus polarizing the generator with respect to the batteries.
92. Generator and Drive Belt
a. Generator Belt Tension Adjustment (fig. 32). Check the tension of the generator drive belt by pressing against the
belt with the thumb at a point midway between the generator pulley and crankshaft pulley. It should be possible to
depress the belt approximately 1/2 inch without too much effort. To adjust belt ten85
Figure 32. Exploded view of generator and regulator mounting parts.

86
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Regulator
Nut, hex, regulator mtg (3 req)
Lockwasher, regulator mtg (3
req)
Bond strap
Lockwasher, special
Ground screw
Cap screw, special
Bypass filter
Lockwasher, special (6 req)
Regulator support
Cap screw, regulator mtg (3
req)
Generator adjusting support
Cap screw, special (3 req)
Nut, hex, special (2 req)
Locking screw
Generator
Cap screw, fil hd, 1/4-28 x 1 1/2 (2
req)
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41

Nut, hex, 1/4-28 (2 req)
Generator bracket
Bond strap
Generator rod
Electrical lead (2 req)
Electrical lead (2 req)
Cap screw, special
Bond strap
Cap screw, special
Cap screw, special (3 req)
Generator body stud
Capacitor
Nut, hex, special
Figure 32. Continued.
sion, first loosen the special hex nut (17) on the end of the generator rod (26). If the belt is too loose, loosen the adjusting
support hex nut (15) below the locking screw (18) until the correct belt tension is obtained. Then tighten the upper hex nut
(15) securely. If the belt is too tight, loosen the adjusting support hex nut (15) securely. If the .belt is too tight, loosen the
adjusting support hex nut (15) above the locking screw (18) and tighten the lower hex nut (15) until correct belt tension is
obtained. Then tighten the upper hex nut (15) securely. After the proper adjustment has been obtained, tighten the
generator rod hex nut (17) securely.
b. Generator Brushes (fig. 33).

(1) Removal. Remove the cover band from around the commutator end of the generator frame, exposing the
brushes (fig. 33). Remove the screw and lockwasher that attach the brush lead to the brush holder. Swing
the brush arm up out of the way and remove the brush from the holder.
(2) Installation. Lift the brush arm (fig. 33) and install the brush in the brush holder. Then release the brush
arm so that it bears against the end of the brush. Fasten the brush pigtail lead to the brush holder with the
screw
87
and lockwasher. Fasten the cover band in place over the brush openings.
(3) Adjustment. Brushes should be replaced if they measure 1/ inch or less. No adjustment is required,
Figure 33. Generator brushes exposed.

c. Generator Removal (fig. 32).
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
Remove the current and voltage regulator (par. 91a).

Remove the cap screw (31) and lockwashers (32) that attach the bond strap (35) to the upper oil pan.
Disconnect the ammeter lead wire from the bypass filter (8).
Remove the hex nut (16) and lockwasher (13) from the lower end of the generator adjusting support (12)
and loosen the upper hex nut.
88
(5) Remove the hex nut (17) and lockwasher (16) from the end of the generator rod (26) and tilt the generator
toward the crankcase until the drive belt can be slipped from the generator pulley. Then support the
generator firmly while withdrawing the generator rod (26). Lift the generator out from between the ears of
the generator bracket (23).
d. Generator Installation (fig. 32).

(1) Lift the generator up into position between the ears of the generator bracket (23), at the same time guiding
the threaded end of the generator adjusting support (12) through the hole in the locking screw (18). Insert
the support rod (26) and install, but do not tighten, the hex nuts (17 and 15) and lockwashers (16 and 13).
(2) Attach the bond strap (35) to the upper oil pan with the cap screw (31) and two lockwashers (32). One
lockwasher must be placed on either side of the bond strap.
(3) Install the current and voltage regulator (par. 91b).
(4) Slip the generator drive belt around the generator pulley and adjust the belt tension (par. 92a).
(5) Make certain that all electrical leads (28 and 29) are properly connected as illustrated in the inset for figure
32.
NOTE
Momentarily connect a jumper lead between the BATTERY and GENERATOR terminals of the
regulator before starting the engine-compressor. This produces a momentary surge of current
from batteries to generator, thus polarizing the generator with respect to the batteries.
93. Starting Motor

(1) Disconnect the starter cable (7) and ground cable (9) from the starting motor terminals.
(2) Remove the three hex head bolts (5) and lockwashers (6) that attach the motor mounting flange to the rear
engine support.
(3) Support the starting motor firmly, and remove the hex nuts (1), lockwashers (2) and U-bolt (8). Carefully
remove the starting motor from the rear engine support.

(1) Lift the starting motor up into position, carefully engaging the Bendix drive with the flywheel ring gear. Slip
the two rubber spacers (3) between the starting
89
motor housing and the clamp (12) and install the U-bolt (8), lockwashers (2) and hex nuts (1), tightening the hex nuts
finger tight.
(2) Aline the three holes in the motor mounting flange with those in the rear engine support, and install the hex
head bolts (5) and lockwashers (6). Tighten the bolts (5) and the hex nuts (1) securely.
(3) Connect the starter cable (7) and ground cable (9) to the starting motor terminals.
Figure 34. Exploded view of starting motor and attaching parts.

94. Starting Motor Brushes
a. Removal. Remove the cover band screw and nut and slip the cover band from the commutator-end frame to
expose the starting motor brushes (fig. 35). Raise the loop of the brush tension spring until a pin or short length of stiff
wire can be passed through the loop to support it above the inspection opening. Remove the brush screw and lockwasher
and lift the brush from the holder.
b. Installation. Install a new brush (fig. 35) in the brush holder, remove the pin or wire, and allow the loop of the
tension
90
spring to bear against the brush. Install the brush screw and lockwasher, and the cover band.
c. Adjustment. Brushes should be replaced if they measure 1/2 inch or less. No adjustment is required.
Figure 35. Starting motor brushes exposed.

95. Distributor Point Adjustment
(fig. 36)
a. Remove the six screws and lift off the distributor cap. Make a sketch of the relationship between the rotor and the
offset drive tongue. Pull the rotor off the top of the cam.
b. Turn the distributor shaft so that the distributor lever rubbing block is on the high point of the cam.
91
c. Loosen the lock screw slightly. Adjust the contact gap 0.020 inch by turning the adjustment screw. Use a wire
feeler gage to check the contact gap. Tighten the lock screw.
d. Turn the shaft until the contacts close. Bend the stationary contact bracket to aline the contacts for full-face
contact. Adjust the contact gap as in c above after alining the contacts.
Figure 36. Distributor point adjustment.

e. Hook a spring scale on the distributor lever at the contact and pull on the line with the contacts. Take a reading as
the points separate. Adjust the tension to 17-20 ounces by loosening the screw holding the distributor lever spring and
sliding the spring in or out as necessary. Tighten the screw and check the pressure.
f. Place the rotor on the distributor shaft according to the sketch made at disassembly. Install the distributor cap,
and install the six attaching screws.
96. Spark Plugs and Cables
a. Disconnect the ignition cables from the spark plugs.

b. Blow away all loose dirt from around the plugs with compressed air and remove the plugs with a spark plug
wrench.
92
c. Clean the plugs with approved sand blasting method, and then inspect each plug carefully for cracks, chips, or
erosion of the electrodes. Discard those plugs which are not in good condition.
d. Check spark plug air gap with a wire feeler gage. A gap of 0.023 to 0.028-inch must be maintained between the
center and outer electrodes. Adjust gap, if necessary, by carefully bending the outer electrode.
e. Inspect the ignition cables for frayed shielding and damaged insulation. Examine the cable coupling nuts for
cracks or breaks. Make sure the cables are securely mounted. Tighten mounting screws, if necessary. Do not attempt to
repair a defective ignition cable; always install a new cable.
f. Install the spark plugs and reconnect ignition cables.
97. Distributor

(1) Disconnect the manifold tube assembly (13) from elbow (14) and low tension plug assembly (18) from the
distributor connector.
(2) Disconnect the air cleaner tube (5) from the elbow (34) and the four ignition cables (35, 36, 37, and 41) from
the distributor cap.
(3) Scribe or chalk a line on the bottom flange of the adapter (32) and a corresponding line on the crankcase
cover. This will eliminate the necessity of timing the ignition when the distributor is reinstalled.
(4) Remove the hex nuts (21), lockwashers (22) and clamps (23) and lift the distributor (33) straight up from the
crankcase cover.

(1) Carefully insert the drive gear end of the distributor down into the opening in the crankcase cover. Be sure
the gasket (27) is in place. Aline the scribe mark on the adapter mounting flange with that on the crankcase
cover, and install the clamps (23), lockwashers (22) and hex nuts (21).
(2) Connect the four ignition cables (35, 36, 37 and 41) to the distributor cap.
(3) Connect the air cleaner tube (5) to the elbow (34), the manifold tube assembly (13) to elbow (14), and the
low tension plug assembly (18) to the distributor connector.
Note
If a new distributor is being installed, the ignition timing must be checked and adjusted (par. 98).
93
Figure 37. Exploded view of ignition group.

98. Ignition Timing Adjustment
a. Checking the Timing.

(1) Crank the engine over until the timing marks on the flywheel are visible through the inspection hole in the
rear engine support just above the shutter air filter (fig.15). Make a white chalk mark in line with timing mark
"30" and on the timing pointer.
94
1 Front support (2 req)

2 Front support bracket
3 Lockwasher, 5/16 (4 req)
4 Nut, hex, 5/16-18 (4 req)
5 Air cleaner tube
6 Elbow
7 Side support (2 req)
8 Spark plug (4 req)
9 Side support bracket
10 Lockwasher, 5/16
11 Nut, hex, 5/16-24
12 Restricted elbow
13 Tube assembly
14 Elbow
15 Terminal
16 Bolt, hex hd, 5/16-18 x 3/8
17 Clamp
18 Plug assembly
19 Special washer
20 O Ring
21 Nut, hex, Special (2 req)
22 Lockwasher, special (2 req)

23 Clamp (2 req)
24 Stud (2 req)
25 Lockwasher, special
26 Bolt, hex head, special
27 Gasket
28 Coupling
29 Drive shaft
30 Drive shaft gear
31 Roll pin, 3/16 x 7/8 (2 req)
32 Adapter
33 Distributor
34 Elbow
35 Ignition cable, No. 4
38 Bolt, hex hd, 5/16-18 x 5/8
39 Bolt, hex hd, 5/16-18 x 1 1/2 (4
req)
40 Lockwasher, 5/16
(2) Hook up a timing light, with the high tension lead to the No. 1 spark plug and the remaining two leads to the
proper battery terminals.
(3) With the engine idling, direct the timing light into the inspection hole and check the position of the timing
mark on the flywheel with the timing pointer. If the mark is past the pointer before the flash occurs, the
timing is slow. If the flash occurs before the mark gets to the pointer, the timing is fast.
b. Adjusting the Timing.

(1) Loosen the hex nuts (21, fig. 37) that clamp the distributor adapter to the crankcase cover.
(2) With the engine idling and the timing light directed at the inspection hole, rotate the distributor housing
slowly in one direction or the other until the timing mark coincides with the timing pointer when the light
flashes. If the timing is slow, turn the distributor housing counterclockwise. If the timing is fast, turn the
distributor housing clockwise.
(3) When the ignition timing has been properly adjusted, tighten the adapter clamp hex nuts securely and
disconnect the timing light.
95
99. Magnetic Switch

(1) Unscrew the two magnetic switch terminal screws and disconnect the battery cable (4), wire assembly (5)
from ammeter to magnetic switch and starter cable (8) from the switch terminals.
(2) Disconnect the wire assembly (6) from starting switch to magnetic switch and ground wire assembly (7)
from the coil terminals of the switch.
(3) Remove the four hex head bolts (1), cap screws (10), and lockwashers (2 and 11) and lift the magnetic
switch from the side of the battery box.
1 Bolt, hex hd, 1/2-13 x 1% (3 req)

2 Lockwasher, 1/2 (3 req) to magnetic switch
3 Magnetic switch
4 Battery cable
5 Wire assembly, ammeter to magnetic switch
6 Wire assembly, starting switch

7 Wire assembly, ground
8 Starter cable
9 Bond strap
10 Cap screw, hex hd, special
Figure 38. Magnetic switch installed.

b.
Installation (fig. 38).
(1) Attach the magnetic switch to the side of the battery box with the four hex head bolts (1), cap screws (10),
and lockwashers (2 and 11). Note that the longer bolt (10) and external toothed lockwashers (11) also
serve to attach the bond strap (9).
96
(2) Connect the battery cable (4) and wire assembly (5), from ammeter to magnetic switch to one switch
terminal and the starter cable (8) to the other. Connect the wire assembly (6) from starting switch to
magnetic switch and ground wire assembly (7) to the proper coil terminals as shown.
Section IX. INSTRUMENT PANEL
100. Description
The instrument panel is bracket-mounted to the air receiver at the rear of the engine-compressor (fig. 13). A hinged
door swings down to expose the instruments when the unit is in operation.
a. Ammeter. The ammeter indicates battery charge or discharge rate and thus provides a check on the electrical
system of the engine-compressor. When the unit is running at normal speed, the ammeter needle should be in the charge
range. If the ammeter indicates a continuous discharge, the generator, voltage regulator and batteries must be checked to
determine the cause.
b. Starting Switch. The push-button type starting switch is located to the right of ammeter. When the starting button
is pressed, the electrical circuit is completed from the batteries to the magnetic switch. The magnetic switch, in turn, is
energized to complete the circuit between the batteries and the starting motor. The starting motor pinion (Bendix drive)
then engages the flywheel ring gear to start the engine.
c. Hourmeter. The electrically-operated hourmeter is connected to the ignition switch and operates only when the
engine-compressor is in operation. It thus provides an accurate record of elapsed operating time and serves to remind the
operator when to perform the required preventive maintenance services.
d. Ignition Switch. When the lever handle of the ignition switch is snapped to the left, it completes the primary circuit
leading from the battery through the ammeter to the ignition coil. The switch must be turned on before the engine can be
started, and it shuts off the engine when the lever is snapped back to the vertical position.
e. Air Pressure Gage. The air pressure gage indicates the pressure of air within the air receiver. Normal air
pressure readings are 90 psi at the start of the "loading" cycle and 100 psi at the beginning of the "unloading" cycle.
f. Pilot Light. The pilot light is connected to the ignition switch and will glow only when the switch is on. This will
97
Figure 39. Exploded view of instrument panel.

98
1 Ammeter
2 Nut, starting switch
3 Instrument panel
5 Elbow, 1/8 x 1/8F x 90
6 Dampening orifice
7 Flexible fitting
8 Tube assembly
9 Lockwasher, special
10 Clamp, 3/16
11 Nut, hex, special (3 req)
12 Starting switch
13 Ignition switch
14 Connector
15 Coupling, 1/8 (2 req)
16 Bond strap
17 Bolt, hex hd, special (3 req)
18 Clamp, 1/4
19 Clamp, 5/16 x (2 req)
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
Elbow, x 1/8 M x 90
Tube assembly
Tube, special
Clamp (3 req)
Nut, hex jam
Lockwasher
Nut, hex, 3/8-16 (2 req)
Bracket
Cap screw, 3/8-16 x 1 (2 req)
Lockwasher, (2 req)
Bolt, hex hd, -13 x 1 (2 req)
Connector
Pilot light assembly
Oil pressure gage
Choke control
Air pressure gage
Hourmeter
prevent the switch from being left on accidentally, thereby causing an unnecessary drain on the batteries.
g. Oil Pressure Gage. The engine oil pressure gage registers the amount of oil pressure in the lubricating system. A
small segment of the indicating band is painted red, and the remainder of the band is green. For normal operation, the
indicating pointer should be in the green area at all times. If the pointer indicates no pressure, stop the unit at once until
the cause can be determined and corrected.
h. Choke Control. The choke control is connected with a flexible cable to the choke plate in the carburetor air intake.
As the choke control knob is pulled outward, the choke plate closes, providing a richer fuel-air mixture to start the engine.
i. Temperature Gage. The temperature gage indicates the temperature of the coolant in the liquid cooling system.
Normal operating temperatures are between 180 and 215 F.
101. Instrument Panel Removal and Installation (fig. 39)
a. Removal.
(1) Remove the two hex nuts (11), four lockwashers (9) and two hex head bolts (17) that fasten the bond strap
(16) to the top of the engine-compressor housing and to the instrument panel. This will also free the clamp
(18). Remove one hex head bolt (17), two lockwashers (9) and one hex nut (11) to free the clamp (10).
99
(2) Open the hood top door and remove the hood top panel on the compressor side (par. 128).
(3) Disconnect the wires from the ammeter (1), ignition switch (13) and starting switch (12), labeling them to
facilitate reinstallation.
Caution: Release the air receiver pressure before removing the tubing from the air pressure gage.
(4) Disconnect the tubing and fittings from the air pressure gage (36) and oil pressure gage (34). Remove the
bulb on the water temperature gage (23) from the exhaust manifold (8, fig. 55). Remove the clamps
(24, fig. 39).
(5) Remove the two hex head bolts (31) and lockwashers (30) that attach the brackets (28) and lift off the
instrument panel (3).
b. Installation.
(1) Lift the instrument panel up into position and install the two hex head bolts (31) and lockwashers (30).
(2) Connect the tubing and fittings to the air pressure gage (36) and the oil pressure gage (34). Install the bulb
on the water temperature gage (23) in the exhaust manifold (8, fig. 55). Secure the flexible tubing with
three clamps (24, fig. 39)..
(3) Reconnect the wires to the ammeter (1), starting switch (12) and ignition switch (13) as shown in figure 29.
(4) Install the compressor side top hood panel (par. 130) and close the hood top door.
(5) Attach the bond strap (16, fig. 39) to the top of the engine-compressor housing with the one hex head bolt
(17), two lockwashers (9) and one hex nut (11).
(6) Fasten the bond strap and clamp (18) to the instrument panel (3) with one hex head bolt (17), two
lockwashers (9) and one hex nut. Attach the clamp (10) with one hex head bolt (17), two lockwashers (9)
and one hex nut (11).
102. Instruments
a. Ammeter.
(1) Removal. Disconnect the ammeter (1, fig. 39) leads and tag the wires to eliminate confusion at installation.
Remove the nuts and washers holding the ammeter mounting bracket (5, fig. 40) to the ammeter and pull
the ammeter from the front of the panel.
(2) Installation. Place the ammeter (1, fig. 39) in position in the panel, and place the ammeter mounting
bracket 100
100
(5, fig. 40) over the ammeter terminals. Install the mounting washers and nuts. Connect the leads according
to the tags placed on the ammeter at removal.
b. Temperature Gage.
(1) Removal. Remove the water temperature gage bulb from the exhaust manifold (8, fig. 55). Remove the
three clamps (24, fig. 39) from around the temperature gage flexible tube, and slip the flexible tubing out of
the clamps. Do not allow the tubing to kink. Remove the. nuts and lockwashers holding the water
temperature gage mounting bracket (1, fig. 40), and pull the water temperature gage (23, fig. 39), together
with the bulb and flexible tubing, from the front of the panel.
1 Water temperature gage mtg

bracket
2 Oil pressure gage mtg bracket
3 Air pressure gage mtg bracket bracket

4 Hourmeter mtg
5 Ammeter mtg bracket
Figure 40. Rear -view of installed instrument panel.

(2) Installation. Place the water temperature gage (23, fig. 39) in position in the panel, and place the
temperature gage mounting bracket (1, fig. 40) over the gage studs. Install the mounting washers and
nuts. Slip the flexible tube into the three clamps (24, fig. 39) and tighten the clamps. Install the temperature
bulb in the exhaust manifold (8, fig. 55).
c. Oil Pressure Gage.

(1) Removal. Disconnect the tube assembly (21, fig. 39) coupling (15) and connector (32) at the rear of the oil
101
pressure gage (34). Remove the nuts and washers holding the oil pressure gage mounting bracket
(2, fig. 40) to the oil pressure gage, and pull the gage from the front of the instrument panel (3, fig. 39).
(2) Installation. Place the oil pressure gage (34, fig. 39) in position in the panel, and place the oil pressure
gage mounting bracket (2, fig. 40) over the gage studs. Install the mounting washers and nuts. Connect
the tube assembly (21, fig. 39), connector (32, and coupling (15) to the rear of the gage.
d. Air Pressure Gage.
Caution: Release the air receiver tank pressure before removing the air pressure gage.
(1) Removal. Disconnect the tube assembly (8, fig. 39), connector (14), coupling (15) and elbow (5) from the
rear of the air pressure gage (36). Remove the nuts, ground lead, and washers holding the air pressure
gage mounting bracket (3, fig. 40) to the air pressure gage, and pull the gage from the front of the
instrument panel (3, fig. 39).
(2) Installation. Place the air pressure gage (36, fig. 39) in position in the panel, and place the air pressure
gage mounting bracket (3, fig. 40) over the gage studs. Install the ground lead, and mounting washers and
screws. Connect the elbow (5, fig. 39), coupling (15), connector (14) and tube assembly (8) to the rear of
the gage.
e. Hourmeter.
(1) Removal. Remove the black wire from the air pressure gage (36, fig. 39), and the red wire from the ignition
switch (13). Remove the nuts and washers holding the hourmeter mounting bracket (4, fig. 40) to the
hourmeter (37, fig. 39) and pull the hourmeter from the front of the instrument panel (3).
(2) Installation. Position the hourmeter (37, fig. 39) on the instrument panel (3). Place the hourmeter mounting
bracket (4, fig. 40) over the stud on the hourmeter and secure with the mounting nuts and washers.
Connect the red wire and black wire as shown in figure 29.
103. Controls
a. Starting Switch.
(1) Removal. Disconnect the starting switch (12, fig. 39) leads, and tag the wires to eliminate confusion at
installation. Remove the starting switch nut (2), and pull the starting switch (12) from the front of the
instrument panel (3).
102
(2) Installation. Place the starting switch (12, fig. 39) in position in the instrument panel (3) and install the
starting switch nut (2), connect the wires to the switch terminals according to the tags placed on the switch
at removal.
b. Ignition Switch.
(1) Removal. Disconnect the ignition switch (13, fig. 39) leads, and tag the wires to eliminate confusion at
installation. Loosen the lock nut at the rear of the instrument panel (3) and unscrew the switch handle. Pull
the switch from the rear of the instrument panel.
(2) Installation. Place the ignition switch (13, fig. 39) in position in the panel, and screw on the switch handle.
Tighten the rear lock nut. Connect the switch wires according to the tags placed on the switch at removal.
c. Choke Control.
(1) Removal. Disconnect the choke control (35, fig. 39) cable from the carburetor (15, fig. 21). Loosen the nut
(25, fig. 39) and lockwasher (26). Remove three clamps (24) from around choke cable and pull the choke
control from the front of the instrument panel (3).
(2) Installation. Insert the cable end of the choke control (35, fig. 39) in the hole in the instrument panel (3) and
place the lockwasher (26) and nut (25) over the end of the cable. Slip the choke cable into the three clamps
(24). Push the choke control (35) all the way into the panel, and tighten the nut (25). Tighten the three
clamps (24). Connect the choke control cable to the carburetor (15, fig. 21).
d. Pilot Light (fig. 39).
(1) Removal. Unsolder the wire from the rear of the pilot light assembly (33). Remove the locknut that holds the
pilot light to the panel, and remove it from the instrument panel (3). The pilot light bulb is inside the pilot light
assembly. Unscrew the red jewel to remove the bulb.
(2) Installation. Install a new pilot light bulb in the pilot light assembly (33) by inserting the bulb into the pilot light
socket and screwing on the red jewel. Insert the pilot light assembly in the instrument panel (3) and screw
on the pilot light locknut. Solder the wire to the pilot light terminal.
103
Section X. PRESSURE CONTROL SYSTEM

104. Description
b. Loading Cycle. When the air pressure in the air receiver drops to 90 psi, the unloader pilot shuts off the flow
of air to the suction valve unloaders and causes the suction valves to close. The check and bleed valve
releases air from-the slowdown assembly and temporarily restricts the flow of air from the suction valve
unloaders. The slowdown plunger backs off from the governor lever to increase the speed of the engine.
c. Unloading Cycle. When the air pressure in the air receiver reaches 100 psi, the unloader pilot valve admits
air to the suction valve unloaders thus opening the suction valves. The check and bleed valve admits air to
the slowdown assembly, and the slowdown plunger pushes out against the governor lever to reduce engine
speed to idle.
Caution: Before disconnecting air line tubing or removing pressure control system components,
release all air from the air receiver.
105. Check and Bleed Valve
a. Removal (fig. 41). The check and bleed valve (9) is mounted in the side of the unloader pilot (26). Disconnect
tube assemblies (10 and 25) from the elbows (7) at the top and bottom of the check and bleed valve. Unscrew the valve
from the unloader pilot.
b. Installation (fig. 41). Use reverse order of removal instructions to install the valve.
c. Adjustment (fig. 42). The check and bleed valve provides a time delay which allows the engine to pick up speed
before full load is applied. To increase the time delay, turn the adjusting screw inward (clockwise). To decrease the time
delay, turn the adjusting screw outward (counterclockwise). Do not change the setting of the check and bleed valve unless
absolutely necessary.
106. Control Line Air Filter
a. Removal (fig. 1). Disconnect the tube assembly (4) from the elbow (5) and unscrew the control line air filter (6)
from the unloader pilot (26). Unscrew the elbow from the filter.
104
Figure 41. Pressure control system.

105
Figure 42. Cross-section of check and bleed valve.
Figure 43. Exploded view of control line air filter.

106
b. Disassembly (fig. 43). Clamp the square flange of the filter base (4) in a vise and unscrew the filter top (1).
Remove the screens (2) and felt disk (3) from the base.
c. Cleaning and Inspection. Clean all parts thoroughly with compressed air. Make certain that the screens are not
damaged in any way. Do not get oil on the felt.
d. Reassembly (fig. 43). Place the felt disk (3) between the two screens (2) and insert these parts into the filter base
(4). Clamp the square flange of the base in a vise, and screw on the filter top (1).
e. Installation (fig. 41). Screw the elbow (5) into the control line air filter (6) and screw the filter into the unloader pilot
(26). Connect the tube assembly (4) to the elbow.
107. Unloader Pilot Adjustment
The pressure control system must be set to load at 90 psi and unload at 100 psi. The adjustment must be made with
the engine-compressor in operation and while observing the pressure on the air receiver pressure gage. Turning the
Figure 44. Adjusting the unloader pilot.

107
adjusting nut (fig. 44) clockwise raises both the loading and unloading setting; turning the nut counterclockwise lowers
both settings. The differential pressure (difference between loading and unloading points) is factory set and must not be
changed.
108. Unloader Pilot

(1) Remove the check and bleed valve (par. 105a).
(2) Remove the control line air filter (par. 106a).
(3) Remove the four hex nuts (13), lockwashers (12) and hex head bolts (8) and lift the unloader pilot (26) from
the mounting bracket (11).

(1) Remove the wing nut (29) and plain washer (28) and lift the side cover (27) from the frame casting (15).
(2) Unhook and remove the trip lever spring (30) and extension spring (33). Take out the screw (31) and
remove the spring stud keeper (32) and valve plunger rod (20).
(3) Unscrew the adjusting nut (17) and remove the adjusting screw (18) and main spring (19) from the frame
casting.
(4) Remove the hex nut (26), lockwasher (25) and trip lever (24) from the trip lever screw (12) and press the felt
washer (23) from between the two arms of the trip lever.
Note: The trip lever stud, which protrudes through the back of the frame casting, supports the
unloader valve plunger pin (6). Be careful not to lose this pin.
(5) Pull out the main arm pivot pin (35) and remove the main arm (34) from the casting.
(6) Disconnect the tubes (13 and 14) from the elbows (11). Unscrew the twelve screws (1, 2, and 3) and
disassemble the outer diaphragm casting (4), diaphragm (40), plunger disk (39) and inner diaphragm
casting (38) from the frame casting. Unscrew the couplings (5) from the outer diaphragm casting.
(7) Remove the two lock nuts. (7) and disassemble the unloader valve (10) from the bracket (8) and the kickoff
valve (16) from the frame casting. Unscrew the elbows (11) from the valves.

(1) Clean all parts with thoroughly with a low pressure jet of compressed air. Wipe the exterior of the cover and
castings
108
with a cloth dampened in cleaning solvent.

(2) Wash the diaphragm in warm, soapy water, rinse with clear water and dry thoroughly.
(3) Inspect all parts carefully for damage. If the diaphragm is torn or shows signs of deterioration, replace it.
Weak or broken springs, bent tubes and similarly damaged parts must be discarded and replaced.

(1) Assemble the unloader valve (10) to the valve bracket (8) and install the lock nut (7). Assemble the kickoff
valve (16) into the frame casting (15) and install the lock nut (7).
(2) The tubes (13 and 14) are soldered to the couplings (5). Screw the couplings into the outer diaphragm
casting (4). Assemble the diaphragm (40), plunger disk (39) and inner diaphragm casting (38) to the outer
casting (4), carefully alining all screw holes. Fasten this group together with ten :y.-inch long screws (1)
inserted through all but the top and bottom center holes in the outer diaphragm casting. Attach the
diaphragm group to the frame casting with the longer screw (3) at the top and the shorter screw (2) at the
bottom.
(3) Screw the elbows (11) onto the valves (10 and 16) and connect the tubes (13 and 14) to the elbows.
(4) Insert the main arm (34) into the frame casting with the pivot end behind the cast bracket arm of the inner
diaphragm casting. Aline the pivot hole in the main arm with that in the cast arm and install the pivot pin
(35).
(5) Insert the felt washer (23) in between the two arms of the trip lever (24). Insert the valve plunger pin (6) up
into the unloader valve (10) and hold it in place while installing the trip lever on the trip lever screw (12). The
long stud of the trip lever will protrude through the frame casting to support the valve plunger pin. Secure
the trip lever with the lockwasher (25) and hex nut (26).
(6) Insert the leg of the valve plunger rod (20) through the drilled hole in the main arm (34) and install the spring
stud keeper (32) with the roundhead screw (31). Hook the extension spring (33) between the plunger rod
(20) and the keeper (32). Hook the trip lever spring (30) between the trip lever (24) and the spring stud in the
frame casting.
109
Figure 45. Exploded view of unloader pilot.

(7) Hook one end of the main spring (19) around the main arm and the other end through the adjusting screw
(18). Insert the threaded end of the adjusting screw up through the hole in the frame casting and install the
adjusting nut (17). The side cover (27) need not be installed until the unloader pilot has been adjusted.

(1) Position the unloader pilot (26) on the mounting bracket
110
(11) and install the four hex head bolts (8), lockwashers (12) and hex nuts (13).
(2) Install the control line air filter (par. 106e).
(3) Install the check and bleed valve (par. 105c).
(4) Adjust the unloader pilot (par. 107) and install the side cover with the washer and wing nut.
109. Slowdown Assembly

(1) Disconnect the tube assembly (25) from the elbow (23).
(2) Remove the two hex head bolts (24) and lockwashers (21) and lift the slowdown assembly (20) from the
crankcase cover.
(3) Unscrew the tee (17) from the slowdown assembly.

(1) Unscrew the shutoff cock (6) and elbow (7) from the slowdown body (8).
(2) Loosen the locking nut (2) and unscrew the stroke adjusting screw (1) from the slowdown body.
(3) Remove the plunger pin (3) and plunger (4) and slip the O ring (5) from the groove in the slowdown body.
Figure 46. Exploded view of slowdown assembly.

(1) Clean all parts thoroughly with a clean, lint-free cloth, and wipe the exterior of the slowdown body with a
cloth dampened with cleaning solvent.
(2) Inspect all parts carefully for physical damage. The plunger and inner walls of the body should be free of
deep grooves or scratches which might impair the operating efficiency of the assembly. Replace damaged
parts.
111

(1) Slip a new O ring (5) into the groove around the inside of the slowdown body (8), and insert the plunger (4)
down into place.
(2) Assemble the plunger pin (3) into the adjusting screw (1) and screw the adjusting screw into the slowdown
body.
(3) Install the elbow (7) and shutoff cock (6).

(1) Screw the tube tee (17), with elbows (19 and 23) and drain cock (18) attached, into the slowdown body.
(2) Fasten the slowdown assembly to the crankcase cover with the two hex head bolts (24) and lockwashers
(21). The slowdown plunger pin must engage the lower end of the governor lever.
(3) Connect the tube assembly (25) to the elbow (23).
f. Slowdown Stroke Adjustment. The slowdown assembly should not be adjusted unless the engine does not return
to idle speed when the compressor unloads. Lengthen the slowdown stroke, to further reduce engine speed, by loosening
the locking nut (2, fig. 46) and turning out the stroke adjusting screw (1). Tighten the locking nut. Check operation. If the
engine still runs too fast with an unloaded compressor, turn the stroke adjusting nut out further. To increase the engine
speed while the compressor is unloaded, reverse the above procedure.
110. Governor

(1) Remove the hex nut (4) and lockwasher (3) and disassemble the control rod (2) from the upper end of the
governor lever.
(2) Remove the hex nuts (7) and lockwashers (6) from the governor mounting studs, and carefully lift the
governor (1) and mounting gasket (5) from the crankcase cover.

(1) Position the gasket (5) around the governor mounting opening, and carefully install the governor (1),
meshing the governor gear with the accessory governor drive gear. Install the hex nuts (7) and lockwashers
(6).
(2) Connect the control rod (2) to the upper end of the governor lever and install the hex nut (4) and lockwasher
(3).
112
Figure 47. Exploded view of governor and attaching parts.

c. Adjustment (fig. 48). If the governor has been removed from the engine or if incorrect adjustments are indicated
by the engine performance, complete checking of governor operation is necessary.
(1) Start and warm up the engine until operation temperatures are reached.
113
(2) Run the engine with no load, then suddenly apply full load, by opening air receiver service valve, and note
the governor action. After one or possibly two surges, the engine speed should become steady.
Figure 48. Governor adjustment.

If the governor hunts when load is applied, close the receiver service valve to idle the engine, and lengthen
the adjusting screw bracket lever by turning the adjusting nuts. Lengthening the lever makes the engine
more stable, but also increases
114
the speed droop from no load to full load. For this reason, a satisfactory governor setting must be a
compromise between stability and speed regulation.
(3) After the governor is set so that there is no hunting, tighten the adjusting nuts.
Section XI. AIR RECEIVER AND AFTERCOOLER
111. Description
The air receiver has a volumetric capacity of 6 cubic feet. It is mounted above the engine-compressor fuel tank on two
cradle-like supports and is held rigidly by straps and braces. Compressed air leaves the compressor exhaust manifold
and enters one end of the finned aftercooler (fig. 49) where the temperature of the air is lowered by its passage through a
series of cooling tubes. The cooled air then enters the air receiver through the aftercooler to receiver connection. The air
receiver is equipped with a safety valve for protection against a build-up of excess pressure. The compressed air in the
receiver may be obtained from the two receiver service valves. Two drain valves located at the bottom of the receiver
provide a means for draining off condensation.
Caution: Be sure to release all air from the air receiver before attempting to remove the hose
reels, aftercooler, receiver or any of the associated piping or fittings.
Figure 49. Aftercooler and air receiver.

115
112. Hose Reel Air Hoses (fig. 10)
a. Removal. Release the hose reel lock pins so that the reels can revolve freely. Disconnect the free ends of the
hoses from the couplings at the rear of the side tool boxes and unwind the hoses from the hose reels. Then loosen the
two hose clamps and disconnect the hoses from the hose reel service valve couplings and slip the hoses from the slots in
the hose reels.
b. Cleaning and Inspection. Do not clean hoses with cleaning solvent or other petroleum products. Wash with
warm, soapy water; then rinse with clear water and blow dry with compressed air. Examine the hoses carefully for cracks
or breaks and for signs of deterioration. If hoses or their couplings are damaged, they must be replaced.
c. Installation. Slip the end of each hose through the slot in the hose reel and connect it to the service valve hose
couplings. Hoses must unwind over the tops of the hose reels and toward the rear of the truck. Wind the hoses onto the
hose reels and connect the end of each hose to the stationary coupling mounted at the rear of the side tool boxes. Lock
the hose reels with the lock pins.
113. Hose Reel and Service Valve

(1) Remove the hose from the hose reel (par. 112a).
(2) Unscrew the service valve (1) from the end of the slip fittings (7) and disassemble the hose coupling (18)
from the valve.
(3) Remove the lock ring (4) from the groove around the reel shaft hub, and slide off the reel.

(1) Remove the two self-tapping screws (11) and lockwashers (10) and lift the lock pin assembly (9) from the
hose reel (8). If the lock pin assembly is to be disassembled, support it solidly while driving out the taper
pins (13 and 16). Then slip the collar (12), spring (14) and support (15) from the lock pin (17).
(2) Remove the four fillister head screws (2) and lockwashers (3) that fasten the retainer fitting (5) inside the
reel shaft hub, and remove the retainer fitting, slip fitting (7) and packing (6).
c. Cleaning and Inspection. Wipe the hose reels and lock pin parts with a cloth dampened with cleaning solvent.
Clean all
116
parts with compressed air. Discard and replace the packing set. Inspect the remaining parts for physical damage
which may impair the operating efficiency of the hose reel and replace, if necessary.

(1) Assemble the packing (6) and retainer fitting (5) to the slip fitting (7) and insert this assembled group into the
recess in the hose reel shaft hub. Install the four fillister head screws (2) and lockwashers (3), tightening the
screws evenly until the retainer fitting is firm. Do not overtighten these screws.
(2) Secure the support (15) to the lock pin (17) with the taper pin (16). Slide the spring (14) over the end of
Figure 50. Exploded view of hose reel.
117
Figure 51. Exploded view of aftercooler and valves.

the lock pin, and secure the collar (12) to the lock pin with the taper pin (13).
(3) Fasten the lock pi. assembly (9) to the hose reel (8)
118
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
Hose end coupling (2 req)

Service valve (2 req)
Nipple, 3/4 x 1 3/8 (4 req)
Elbow, 3/4 x 45 (2 req)
Reducing bushing, 1 to 3/4 (2
req)
Safety valve
Pipe plug
Nipple, 2 x 2
Bolt, hex hd, 1/2-20 x 2 3/4 (4
req)
Connection fitting
Connection gasket
Nut, self-locking, 1/2-20 (4 req)
Nut, self-locking, 1/2-20 (6 req)
Stud, (6 req)
Connection
Sleeve
Packing
Nut, special (6 req)
Spacer (6 req)
Spring washer (84 req)
End washer (6 req)
Packing
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
Screw, self-tapping, No. 10 x 1/2

(3 req)
Sleeve
Cotter pin, 1/16 x 3/4 (2 req)
Nut, castellated, 1/4-28 (2 req)
Flywheel guard
Brace
Nut, hex, 5/16-18 (2 req)
Engine support brace
Bolt, hex hd, 5/16-18 x 7/8 (2
req)
Nut, hex, 7/16-20
Lockwasher, 7/16
Stud
Aftercooler clamp
Aftercooler
Elbow, 3/8 x 90
Nipple, 3/8 x 6 1/2
Reducing bushing, 3/8 to 1/4
Nipple, 1/4 x 7/8
Drain cock
Nipple, 1/4 x 1
Figure 51. -Continued.

with the two self-tapping screws (11) and lockwashers (10).
(1) Apply a coat of general purpose grease to the friction surfaces of the reel shaft hub where the reel flanges
will revolve and lift the reel up into position on the hub. Install the lock ring (4) around the groove in the end
of the hub.
(2) Assemble the hose coupling (18) to the service valve (1) and screw the service valve onto the end of the slip
fitting (7).
(3) Install the hose on the hose reel (par. 112c).
114. Receiver Service Valves and Piping
a. Removal (fig. 51). Unscrew and remove the hose end coupling (1), service valve (2), nipple (3), elbow (4), nipple
(3) and reducing bushing (5) in that order.
(1) Unscrew the wheel nut (1) and remove the identification
119
1 Wheel nut
2 Identification plate
3 Handwheel
4 Packing nut
5 Gland
6 Packing
7 Stuffing box
8 Valve stem
9 Valve body
10 Disk
11 Bonnett
Figure 52. Exploded view of receiver service valve.

120
plate (2) and handwheel (3) from the valve stem (8).
(2) Unscrew and remove the packing nut (4) and stuffing box (7). Press the gland (5) and packing (6) from the
stuffing box.
(3) Unscrew the bonnet (11) from the valve body (9) lifting off the stem (8) and disk (10) with the bonnet. If
necessary, unscrew the stem from the disk.
c. Cleaning and Inspection. Clean all parts inside and out, with cleaning solvent, and allow parts to dry thoroughly
before reassembling. Discard and replace the packing.
(1) Insert the worn end of the stem (8) through the bonnet (11) and screw the stem into the disk (10). Screw
the bonnet into the valve body (9).
(2) Screw the stuffing box (7) onto the bonnet, and carefully press the packing (6) and gland (5) down into
place. Then install the packing nut (4), being careful not to overtighten it.
(3) Fasten the handwheel (3) and identification plate (2) to the end of the stem with the wheel nut (1).
e. Installation (fig. 51). In the following order, install the reducing bushing (5), nipple (3), elbow (4), nipple (3),
service valve (2) and hose end coupling (1).
115. Drain Cocks and Piping
a. Removal (fig. 51). In the following order, remove the 1-inch nipple (46), drain cock (45), 7/8-inch nipple (44),
reducing bushing (43), 6 1/2-inch nipple (42) and elbow (41).
b. Cleaning and Inspection. Clean the drain cock and all fittings with a cloth dampened in cleaning solvent and dry
with compressed air. If the drain cock is not operating properly, it must be replaced.
c. Installation (fig. 51). In the following order, install the elbow (41), 6 1/2-inch nipple (42), reducing bushing (43),
7/8-inch nipple (44), drain cock (45) and 1-inch nipple (46).
116. Aftercooler to Receiver Connection

(1) Remove the four hex head bolts (9) and self-locking nuts (12) that fasten the connection (15) to the
connection fitting (10).
(2) Remove the three self-locking nuts (13) from the studs (14), and remove the studs with the special nuts
(18), spacers (19), spring washers (20) and end washers (21) installed.
121
(3) Grasp the connection and swing the upper end forward until it clears the air receiver. Then remove the
connection, sleeve (16), packing (17) and gasket (11).
b. Cleaning and Inspection. Blow out the interior of the connection with compressed air, and wipe the exterior with a
cloth dampened in cleaning solvent. Discard and replace the packing and gasket.
c. Installation (fig. 51).
(1) Assemble the packing (17) to the sleeve (16) and insert these parts into the connection (15).
(2) Apply a thin coat of gasket cement to the gasket surface of the connection fitting (10), and carefully position
the gasket (11) on the fitting.
(3) Assemble the connection to the aftercooler intake manifold and swing it up until it meets the connection
fitting (10). Install the four hex head bolts (9) and self-locking nuts (12).
Figure 53. Aftercooler flange mounting view.

122
(4) Insert the three studs (14), with the special nuts (18), spacers (19), spring washers (20) and end washers
(21) installed, through the mounting flanges of the aftercooler and connection. Install and tighten the selflocking nuts (13) until the distance from the outer spring washer on each stud to the surface of the
aftercooler flange measures one inch (fig. 53).
117. Aftercooler
a. Removal and Disassembly (fig. 51).

(1) Remove the aftercooler to receiver connection (par. 116a).
(2) Loosen the hex nut (35) so that the clamp (38) can be swung away from the engine support brace (32).
(3) Remove the self-locking nuts (13) from the three studs (14) connecting the aftercooler manifold to the
compressor discharge manifold, and remove the studs with the special nuts (18), spacers (19), spring
washers (20) and end washers (21) installed.
(4) Lift the assembled aftercooler (40) and flywheel guard (28) from the engine-compressor. To disassemble
the flywheel guard from the aftercooler, remove the two cotter pins (26) and castellated nuts (27) and three
self-tapping screws (24). Note that plain washers (23) are located on the two studs between the guard and
aftercooler.
b. Cleaning and Inspection. Blow the dirt, leaves, twigs and other debris from between the fins of the aftercooler with
compressed air. Wipe the grease or oil from all parts with a cloth dampened in cleaning solvent. The packing used at the
aftercooler intake and outlet must be discarded and replaced. Inspect the aftercooler fins for good condition. Where fins
have been bent or crushed together, straighten and separate them as well as possible to permit free circulation of air.
c. Reassembly and Installation (fig. 51).
(1) Assemble the packing (22) to the sleeve (25) and insert these parts into the recess in the compressor
manifold discharge opening.
(2) Install the plain washers (23) on the aftercooler brace studs, and fasten the flywheel guard (28) to the studs
with the castellated nuts (27) and cotter pins (26). The brace (29) welded to the top of the guard is secured
to the aftercooler with three self-tapping screws (24).
123
(3) Lift the assembled aftercooler and guard up into position with one end of the aftercooler resting on the
engine support brace (32). Insert the three studs (14), with the special nuts (18), spacers (19), spring
washers (20) and end washers (21) installed, through the mounting flanges of the aftercooler and
compressor exhaust manifold. Install and tighten the self-locking nuts (13) until the distance from the outer
spring washer on each stud to the surface of the aftercooler flange measures one inch (fig. 53).
(4) Swing the clamp (38) underneath the engine support brace (32) and tighten the hex nut (35) securely.
(5) Install the aftercooler to receiver connection (par. 116c).
Section Xll. ENGINE-COMPRESSOR
118. Description
a. The engine-compressor actually is a four-piston-engine and four-piston compressor, with all pistons connected to
a single crankshaft in a V-type crankcase. Power from the engine bank is transmitted through the crankshaft to compress
air in the compressor bank. The crankshaft is mounted in five main bearings. Full-pressure lubrication is supplied by a
gear driven oil pump mounted on the front main bearing cap. Two bypass oil filters in the lower oil pan help to keep the
lubricating oil free from foreign matter.
b. The engine and compressor banks are equipped with wet sleeve cylinders. The engine exhaust and intake
valves, are stellite faced and each has stellite inserts with positive type valve rotators to increase valve life. Above each
cylinder in the compressor cylinder head is a compressor valve assembly. Free air is admitted through the dry-type air
cleaners and through the suction valve part of the valve assembly by the action of the piston on its downward stroke.
When the piston reaches top dead center on its upward stroke (at which time the suction valve is closed), the air is
compressed and released through the discharge valve part of the assembly into the compressor discharge manifold.
119. Cylinder Head Cover and Gasket
a. Removal (fig. 54). Unscrew and remove the four hex nuts (4) and plain washers (3) from the four cover mounting
studs, and lift off the cylinder head cover (2) and gasket (1). Twist the crankcase breather (5) clockwise until it can be
lifted from the cover.
124
1 Cover gasket, 5/8-inch thick

2 Cylinder head cover
3 Plain washer, 3/8 (4 req)
4 Nut, hex 3/8-24 (4 req)

5 Crankcase breather
Figure 54. Exploded view of cylinder head cover and gasket.

b. Cleaning and Inspection. Clean the crankcase breather with compressed air. Wipe the cylinder head cover with a
cloth dampened in cleaning solvent. If the gasket has been damaged during removal of the cover, it must be replaced.
Blow all loose dirt away from the cylinder head valves with compressed air. Wipe grit from surface of head with a cloth
dampened in cleaning solvent.
c. Installation (fig. 54). Apply a light coat of gasket cement to the gasket surfaces of the cylinder head and cylinder
head cover. Carefully position the gasket (1) around the cover mounting surface of the cylinder head. Install the cylinder
head cover on the four mounting studs and fasten securely with the plain washers (3) and hex nuts (4). Install the
crankcase breather (5) and twist it counterclockwise to lock it in place.
120. Engine Manifolds
a. Removal and Disassembly.
(1) Unscrew the exhaust nipple (2, fig. 55) and weather cap (1) from the exhaust manifold (8).
125
Figure 55. Exploded view of engine manifolds.

(2) Remove the engine air cleaners and carburetor (par. 78a) from the intake manifold (18).
(3) Drain the cooling system at least below the level of the cylinder head and disconnect the coolant hose from
the coolant outlet at the top of the exhaust manifold. Release the hose clamps (15) and loosen the hoses
(16).
126
1 Weather cap
2 Nipple, 2 1/2 x 15
3 Bolt, hex hd, 3/8-16 x 1 (4 req)
5 Connection
6 Gasket (2 req)
7 Welch plug, 1-inch (12 req)
8 Exhaust manifold
9 Washer, special, 7/16 (2 req)
10 Nut, hex 7/16-20 (6 req)
11 Bolt, hex hd, 7/16-14 x 1/4 (2
req)
13 Heat connection cover
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
Nipple, 1 x 1 3/4 (2 req)

Hose clamp (4 req)
Hose, 1 1/4 x 4 1/2 (2 req)
Clamp washer (4 req)
Intake manifold
Elbow, 3/8 x 1/4 M x 45
Tube assembly
Ventilation regulator
Connection
Nipple, 1 x 3
Stud (6 req)
Manifold gasket
Pipe plug, 1-inch
(4) Disconnect the tube assembly (20) from the elbow (19) in the intake manifold (18). Unscrew the bulb on the
water temperature gage (23, fig. 39) from the exhaust manifold (8, fig. 55).
(5) Remove four hex head bolts (3) and lockwashers (4) to detach the connections (5 and 22). Remove the
connections and the gaskets (6).
(6) Remove the six hex nuts (10), two special washers (9) and four clamp washers (17) from the studs (24) in
the engine cylinder head and lift off the exhaust manifold (8), intake manifold (18) and manifold gasket (25).
(7) Remove the nipples (14 and 23) and the pipe plug (26).
b. Cleaning and Inspection. Clean all parts, inside and out, with compressed air. Wipe grease and oil from the
manifold and gasket surface of cylinder head with a cloth dampened in cleaning solvent. The manifold gasket must be
discarded and replaced. Make certain that the manifold castings are not cracked or broken and that tubing and piping are
in good condition. Replace damaged parts.
c. Reassembly and Installation.
(1) Apply a coat of gasket cement to the gasket surface of the engine cylinder head and install the new manifold
gasket (25, fig. 55).
(2) Lift the exhaust manifold (8) up into position on the two outer studs (24) and install the special washers (9)
and hex nuts (10).
127
(3) Lift the intake manifold (18) up into position on the four inner studs (24) and install the manifold clamp
washers (17) and remaining four hex nuts (10). Tighten all six hex nuts with a torque wrench to 60 footpounds of torque.
(4) Apply a coat of gasket cement to the gasket surface of the exhaust manifold and crankcase. Install the
connections (5 and 22) and two gaskets (6) with four hex head bolts (3) and lockwashers (4).
(5) Install the nipples (14 and 23), hoses (16), and clamps (15). Connect the radiator coolant hose to the
coolant outlet opening at the top of the exhaust manifold.
(6) Connect the ventilation regulator tube (20) to the tube elbow (19) in the intake manifold.
(7) Screw the bulb on the water temperature gage (23, fig. 39) and the pipe plug (26, fig. 55) into the exhaust
manifold (8) (8) Install the engine air cleaners and carburetor (par. 78b).
(9) Screw the nipple (2), with weather cap (1), into the top of the exhaust manifold.
(10) Fill the radiator (par. 6d (4)).
121. Valve Clearance Adjustment
a. Run the engine at a fast idle for about 15 minutes to normalize heat expansion of all parts. Then turn off the
ignition switch to prevent accidental starting during the adjustment procedure.
b. Remove the cylinder head cover (par. 119a), being careful not to damage the cover gasket.
c. Remove the spark plug from the number one cylinder (nearest the radiator) and place the thumb over the spark
plug opening. Have the engine cranked slowly by hand until an outward pressure is felt against the thumb. Continue
cranking slowly until the "DC" (dead center) mark on the flywheel is alined with the timing pointer on the rear engine
support. The number one piston now is at top dead center.
d. Loosen the lock nut (fig. 56) and turn the adjusting screw in or out until a 0.014-inch feeler gage fits snugly
between the rocker arm valve contact face and the end of the valve stem. Without further movement of the screw, tighten
the lock nut securely. Adjust the clearance of the second valve of the number one cylinder in the same manner.
e. Cranking the engine one-half revolution at a time, check and adjust each set of valves in succession. Remember
that the firing order of the engine is 1 2 4 :3. In other words, check and adjust the valve sets for cylinder one,
128
cylinder two, cylinder four and cylinder three, in that order.
f. After all valves have been checked and adjusted, install the cylinder head cover and gasket (par. 119c).
Figure 56. Valve clearance adjusting screws.

122. Engine Cylinder Head and Valves
(1) Remove the cylinder head cover and gasket (par. 119a).
(2) Remove the engine manifolds (par. 120a).
(3) Remove all spark plugs and cables (par. 96).
(4) Disconnect the tube assembly (3) from the elbow (4) in the aftercooler end of the cylinder head (17).
(5) The engine cylinder head is mounted on 17 studs in the crankcase. Four of these studs protrude up through
the rocker arm brackets (8); five studs are located in line with the valve springs (10); the remaining
129
eight studs are located in line with the spark plug openings. Remove the hex nuts (14) and the special
washers (13) from all studs. Lift the rocker arm assembly from its four mounting studs and remove the eight
push rods (24). Lift the assembled cylinder head and valves straight up from the studs and place it on a
clean working surface.
(6) Remove the cylinder head gasket (18) from the studs. If there is any doubt as to the serviceability of the
gasket, it must be discarded and replaced.
1 Nipple
2 Elbow
3 Tube assembly
4 Elbow
5 Rocker arm assembly (8 req)
6 Adjusting screw (8 req)
7 Nut, hex, 3/8-24 (8 req)
8 Rocker arm bracket (4 req)
9 Spacer spring (3 req)
10 Valve spring (8 req)
11 Valve rotator (8 req)
12 Spring lock retainer (16 req)
13 Washer, special (17 req)
14 Nut, hex 1/2-20 (17 req)
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
Rocker arm shaft

Stud (4 req)
Cylinder head
Cylinder head gasket
Intake valve insert (4 req)
Intake valve (4 req)
Exhaust valve (4 req)
Exhaust valve insert (4 req)
Valve stem guide (8 req)
Push rod (8 req)
End spring (2 req)
Spring retainer (2 req)
Expansion plug, 3/4 (2 req)
Figure 57. Exploded view of cylinder head and valves.

130

(1) To disassemble the rocker arm assembly, remove one spring retainer (26) and slide the end springs (25),
rocker arm assemblies (5), rocker arm brackets (8), and spacer springs (9) from the rocker arm shaft (15).
If possible, do not disturb the setting of the adjusting screws (6) and their hex nuts (7).
(2) Compress the valve springs (10) until the spring lock retainers (12) can be removed. Then disassemble the
valve rotators (11), valve springs (10), valves (20 and 21) and valve stem guides (23) from the cylinder head
(17).
Caution
When removing valves, arrange them in the order in which they are removed so
that they can be reinserted into the same valve ports during installation.

(1) Clean and inspect all valves carefully. See that carbon or other foreign matter is removed from the valve
head and stem. Inspect the end of the valve stem and face of each valve for pitting, scoring or warping. If
warped or excessively pitted or scored, replace the valve.
(2) Inspect valve springs for broken coils and make certain that they have adequate tension. Replace weak or
broken springs.
(3) Clean the oil holes in the rocker arm shaft thoroughly. To clean the inside of this hollow shaft, the expansion
plugs (27, fig. 57) must be removed. Make certain that the shaft is not bent or distorted. Replace shaft if
necessary.
(4) Thoroughly clean the oil holes in the rocker arms and bushings, and examine the bushings for wear.
Rocker arms and their bushings are serviced only as assemblies. Carefully inspect the valve contact face of
each rocker arm for excessive grooving or pitting. If such a condition is evident, the rocker arm must be
replaced.
(5) Clean the cylinder head casting and the head mounting surface of the crankcase with a cloth dampened in
cleaning solvent. It is very important that the mating surfaces of the cylinder head and crankcase block be
absolutely clean before installing the cylinder head.
d. Reassembly.
(1) Press the valve stem guides (23, fig. 57) down into place in the cylinder head (17) and insert the valves (20
and 21) up into their proper ports. Install the valve springs
131
(10) and valve rotators (11) and compress each spring until the spring lock retainers (12) can be slipped into
the groove around the valve stem.
(2) Make certain that an expansion plug (27) is pressed into each end of the rocker arm shaft (15). Press a
spring retainer (26) into the groove at one end of the rocker arm shaft and, in the order listed, install the
following rocker arm parts: end spring (25), rocker arm assembly (5), rocker arm bracket (8), rocker arm
assembly (5), spacer spring (9), a second pair of arms (5) with a bracket (8) between, spacer spring (9), a
third pair of arms (5) with bracket (8) between, spacer spring (9), a fourth pair of arms (5) with bracket (8)
between, and another end spring (25). Compress these parts until the remaining spring retainer (26) can be
installed.

(1) Apply a light coat of general purpose grease on the crankcase mounting surface and upper surface of the
cylinder head gasket (18), and install the gasket.
(2) Lift the assembled cylinder head into position over the top of the crankcase, and very carefully lower the
head down over the mounting studs and onto the gasket. Insert the eight push rods (24) down into the rod
openings behind the rocker arm bracket mounting studs.
(3) Rotate the rocker arm brackets (8) until the stud hole in each bracket is alined with the corresponding hole
in the rocker arm shaft (15). Drop a : y8-inch or 7/16 inch bolt down into each mounting hole to keep these
Figure 58. Engine cylinder-head stud nut tightening diagram.

132
holes alined during installation. Install the rocker arm assembly on the four mounting studs, with the valve
contact faces of the rocker arms resting on the ends of the valve stems.
(4) Install and tighten the 17 hex nuts (14) and special washers (13), following the sequence shown in figure 58.
Tighten all cylinder head nuts with a torque wrench to 90 foot-pounds of torque. These nuts must be
retightened after the engine is warm and before adjusting the valve clearance.
(5) Connect the tube assembly (3, fig. 57) to the elbow (4) in the aftercooler end of the cylinder head.
(6) Install all spark plugs and cables (par. 96) and the engine manifolds (par. 120c).
(7) Run the engine at a fast idle for 15 minutes. Then retighten all cylinder head nuts with a torque wrench to
90 foot-pounds and adjust the clearance of all valves (par. 121).
(8) Install the cylinder head cover and gasket (par. 119c).
123. Compressor Air Cleaners

(1) Two pairs of air cleaners are mounted at the back of the compressor cylinder head. Both pairs are identical
in construction and are mounted in the same fashion.
(2) Reach behind the air filter connection (8) and remove the self-locking nut (11) and copper washer (10) from
the long mounting stud (9).
(3) Lift the assembled air cleaner and its gasket (7) from the cylinder head port. Remove the covers (4) and
filter elements (6) from the air filter connection.
b. Cleaning and Inspection. Blow out the filter elements and the inside of the filter connection with compressed air.
Wipe the exterior of the filter connection and cover with a cloth dampened with cleaning solvent. If the filter element
appears to be clogged or caked with dirt it must be replaced. If, upon inspection, gaskets have loosened from the air
cleaner, remount and adhere with Pliobond or No. EC11 cement.
c. Installation (fig. 59).
(1) Insert the filter elements (6) into the filter connection (8) and install gasket (7) and the cover (4), snapping
the ends of the spring (3) under the cast lugs on the connection.
133
(2) Install the assembled air cleaner on the mounting stud (9). Secure the air cleaner to the stud with the
copper washer (10) and self-locking nut (11).
Figure 59. Exploded view of compressor air cleaners.

124. Air Discharge Manifold
a. Removal.
(1) Open the receiver service valves and release the air from the air receiver.
(2) Remove the aftercooler to manifold studs and nuts (par. 117a(3)).
134
(3) Remove the eight hex head bolts (15, fig. 60) and special washers (16) and lift the air discharge manifold
(17) and gaskets (14) away from the compressor cylinder head and aftercooler. Remove the packing and
sleeve (22 and 25, fig. 51) from the manifold discharge opening.
Figure 60. Exploded view of compressor cylinder head, valves and manifold.
b. Cleaning and Inspection. Clean the interior of the air discharge manifold with compressed air. Wipe the exterior
of the Casting with a cloth dampened in cleaning solvent. If the packing (22, fig. 51) is not in good condition, it must be
discarded and replaced. Replace the four manifold gaskets.
135
c. Installation.
(1) Assemble the packing (22, fig. 51) t9 the sleeve (25), and insert these parts into the recess in the
compressor manifold discharge opening.
(2) Apply a coat of gasket cement to the gasket surfaces of the manifold (17, fig. 60) and compressor cylinder
head (13). Position the gaskets (14) around the cylinder head openings and lift the manifold up into place.
In so doing, engage the manifold discharge opening with the aftercooler inlet opening.
(3) Install the eight hex head bolts (15) and special washers (16), tightening the nuts with a torque wrench to 60
foot-pounds.
(4) Install the aftercooler to manifold studs as instructed in paragraph 117c (3).
125. Compressor Valve Assemblies
a. Removal.
(1) Open the receiver service valves and release the compressed air from the air receiver.
(2) Remove the drain cock (18, fig. 41) and disconnect the tube assemblies (15), connector (16) and tees (17)
from the valve assembly, or assemblies, to be removed.
(3) Each valve assembly (7, fig. 60) is mounted on four studs (12) in the cylinder head. From each stud,
remove a special nut (11), a spacer (10), 14 spring washers (9) and an end washer (8). Lift the valve
assembly from the cylinder head.
b. Cleaning and Inspection. Clean the valve assembly, tube assemblies and fittings with compressed air or with a
non-explosive solvent such as carbon tetrachloride. If solvent is used, dry with compressed air after cleaning. Do not
lubricate the valve assembly. Insert a pencil or punch through the elongated holes in the discharge valve seat at the
bottom of the valve. Press the valve plate at several points and note whether it snaps back into place when released. This
will indicate that the bumper springs are in good condition. If the valve is not in good condition it must be replaced with a
new valve assembly.
c. Installation.
(1) Install the valve assembly (7, fig. 60) on the four mounting studs (12) in the cylinder head.
(2) Directly across from one another, at the edge of the valve body, are two square head set screws with lock
nuts. These set screws must be adjusted so that a 3/32- inch feeler gage fits, snugly between the
136
underside of the valve body and the mounting surface of the cylinder head. Then tighten the lock nuts
securely.
(3) Install an end washer (8), 14 spring washers (9), a spacer (10), and a special nut (11) on each mounting
stud. Tighten the special nuts evenly all the way around until the distance from the uppermost spring
washer to the top surface of the valve body measures 1/8-inch.
(4) Connect the tees (17, fig. 41), connector (16) and tube assemblies (15) to the valve assembly, or
assemblies as they are installed.
126. Compressor Cylinder Head

(1) Remove the air discharge manifold (par. 124a).
(2) Remove the compressor valves (par. 125a).
(3) Remove the compressor air cleaners (par. 123 a).
(4) Remove the 17 hex nuts (6) and special washers (5) from the head mounting studs (18), and lift the
compressor cylinder head (13) and gasket (19) straight up from the studs.
b. Cleaning and Inspection. Clean out the inside of the cylinder head with compressed air. Wipe the head casting
with a cloth dampened in cleaning solvent and dry with compressed air. Discard and replace the cylinder head gasket.
c. Installation (fig. 60)
(1) Place the new cylinder head gasket (19) on the mounting studs (18). Lift the cylinder head into position
above the crankcase, and carefully lower it onto the mounting studs.
(2) Install the 17 special washers (5) and hex nuts (6). These nuts must be tightened with a torque wrench to
90 foot-pounds. Tighten the center nut first; then work alternately toward each end of the cylinder head,
using a cross-cross pattern, until all nuts are tightened.
(3) Install the compressor air cleaners (par. 123c).
(4) Install the air discharge manifold (par. 124c).
(5) Install the compressor valve assemblies (par. 125c).
Section XIII. HOUSING
127. Description
The engine-compressor housing protects the equipment from rain, snow, and accidental mechanical damage. Keep
the covers closed except when inspecting or repairing the unit. The housing includes-top, side, rear, and radiator covers
137
Figure 61. Exploded view of engine-compressor housing.

138
The top and side covers are hinged to give the operating or maintenance personnel easy access to the equipment.
128. Housing Removal
Remove the hoses and hose reels (par. 113). Turn the eight handles (9, fig. 61) up. Remove the side doors (2 and
3), and the side panels (11 and 16). Remove the hood top door (6), the hood top panel (13), and the hood top panel (5).
Remove the side panel (8), the side panel (12), the side panel (4), and the side panel (1). Remove the hood end support
(14) with the radiator guard (15), and the hood end support (7). Lift out the cross-member supports, the straps, and hood
top support with rubber packing and the hood top panels.
129. Housing Inspection and Repair
Inspect all the doors and panels for corrosion, tears, or breaks. Remove all corrosion and repaint immediately (par.
43). Straighten-any distorted surfaces, and reweld any torn spots before repainting. Inspect the handle springs (10, fig.
61) and clamp springs for breakage and replace any that are damaged. Replace any bent or broken handles.
130. Housing Installation
Install the housing in the reverse order of removal. See paragraph 128.
139
CHAPTER 4
MATERIEL USED IN CONJUNCTION WITH AIR
COMPRESSOR
Section I. PAVING BREAKER
131. Description
The two piston-type paving breakers (fig. 62) are designed for general duty demolition and wall breaking. The throttle
lever is conveniently located at the handle, which is equipped with rubber grips. The following attachments are provided
with the paving breakers: one sheeting driver (fig. 63), four moil points, two cutting chisels, one tamping rod and one
tamping pad. When not in use, the paving breakers and their attachments are stored in the engine side tool box.
140
Figure 63. Sheeting driver.

132. Tabulated Data
Manufacturer.................................................................................. Le Roi-Cleveland
Model Number .............................................................................. 52
Weight............................................................................................ 80 lbs
Overall length................................................................................. 28 in.
Bore and stroke.............................................................................. 2 x 5 5/8 in.
Recommended hose size .............................................................. in.
Air connection ................................................................................ in. pipe
Recommended air pressure .......................................................... 80 to 90 psi
Air requirements............................................................................. 60 cfm
133. Precautions
In order to safeguard the operator and to insure longer operating life of the equipment, the following precautionary
measures always must be taken.
a. Never neglect the necessary lubrication procedures (par. 135a)

141
b. If possible, avoid operating the paving breaker with air pressure greater than 90 psi.
c. Hold the paving breaker handles firmly and plant feet solidly during operation.
d. Always turn off the paving breaker before laying it down.
e. Always detach the air hose from the air connection when stopping operations for any length of time.
134. Operation
a. Attach the tool to be used to the paving breaker. The moil point, chisel and tamping rod are inserted up into the
breaker and are locked in with the retainer latch
(fig. 62). When the sheeting driver (fig. 63) is to be used, the chuck housing (fig. 62) and tappet seat must be removed
and the sheeting driver installed.
b. Fill the paving breaker oil reservoir with oil (par. 135a).
c. Blow out the air hose and connect it to the air connection of the paving breaker.
d. Operate the paving breaker at low speed for a few moments to permit even distribution of oil to all working parts.
135. Servicing
a. Lubrication. It is vitally important that the paving breaker (fig. 62) and sheeting driver (fig. 63) be well lubricated
at all times. Always fill the oil reservoir before starting operations, and check the oil supply frequently, refilling whenever
necessary. Wipe off the oil plugs before removing them to fill the oil reservoirs. Below 32 F. use engine oil, OE--10 or
OHA; above 32 F., use OE 30.
b. Preparing for Storage. To prevent the internal parts of the paving breaker (fig. 62) and sheeting driver (fig. 63)
from rusting while in storage, the following procedure is recommended.
(1) Flush the paving breaker and sheeting driver with cleaning solvent to remove grit, dirt and other foreign
matter.
(2) Flush the paving breaker and sheeting driver with light machine oil to lubricate internal parts.
(3) Wedge a cloth plug into the air connection and exhaust openings of the paving breaker to prevent dust from
entering while the tool is in storage. Wedge a cloth plug into the open end of the housing on the sheeting
driver for the same reason.
(4) Store the paving breaker and sheeting driver in its appropriate place in the engine side tool box.
142
Section II. CLAY DIGGER

136. Description
The two piston-type clay diggers (fig. 64) are light weight units designed for overhead and side wall work. The digger
is equipped with a closed handle and inside trigger. When not in use, the clay diggers and their attachments (two clay
spades, two flat picks and two moil points) are stored in the engine side tool box.
Figure 64. Clay digger.

137. Tabulated Data
Manufacturer.................................................................................. Le Roi--Cleveland
Model number ................................................................................ 31
Weight............................................................................................ 18 Ibs
Overall length................................................................................. 19 in.
Air connection ................................................................................ 3/8 in. pipe
Air requirements............................................................................. .40 cfm
138. Precautions
In order to safeguard the operator and to insure longer operating life of the equipment, the following precautionary
measures always must be taken.
a. Never neglect the necessary lubrication procedures (para. 140a).

b. If possible, avoid operating the clay digger with air pressures greater than 90 psi.
c. Always turn off the clay digger before laying it down.
143
d. Before changing attachments, turn off the air pressure at the air compressor.
e. Always detach the air hose from the air connection when stopping operations for any length of time.
f. Never operate tool unless attachment is in contact with work.
139. Operation
(fig. 64)
a. Insert the attachment to be used (clay spade, flat pick, or moil point) into the chuck of the clay digger.
b. Fill the clay digger oil reservoir with oil (par. 140a).
c. Blow out the air hose and connect it to the air connection of the clay digger.
d. Operate the clay digger at slow speed for a few moments to permit even distribution of oil to all working parts.
140. Servicing
(fig. 64)
a. Lubrication. It is vitally important that the clay digger be well lubricated at all times. Always remove the oil fill plug
and fill the oil reservoir before starting operations. Clean the surface around the filler hole before removing the plug, and
wipe the plug before it is reinstalled. Check the oil supply frequently, refilling whenever necessary. Below 32 F., use OE
10, engine oil; above 32 F., use OE 30, engine oil.
b. Preparing for Storage. To prevent internal parts of the digger from rusting while in storage, follow the procedure
outlined below:
(1) Flush the clay digger thoroughly with cleaning solvent.
(2) Flush the tool with light machine oil to lubricate all parts.
(3) Wedge a cloth plug into the air inlet and exhaust openings to prevent dust from entering while the tool is in
storage.
(4) Store the clay digger in its appropriate place in the engine Side tool box.
Section III. WOOD DRILL
141. Description
The pneumatic reversible wood drill (fig. 65) is powered by a blade-type, rotary pneumatic motor. This drill has a
wood bore capacity of two inches and is equipped with a griphandle, a dead handle, and a roll type throttle handle. The
following ship auger bits are supplied in a canvas bag: three 7/16 x 12, three , 3/4 x 12, one 1 x 12, one 2 x 12,
144
three 7/16 x 36, three 3/4 x 36, one 1 x 36, and one 2 x 36. When not in use the wood drill and ship auger set are stored
in the front tool box.
Figure 65. Wood drill.

142. Tabulated Data
Manufacturer.................................................................................. Independent Pneumatic Tool
Model number ................................................................................ 362 RHW
Weight............................................................................................ 27 1/2 lbs
Overall length................................................................................. 17 3/8 in.
Morse taper size. ........................................................................... No. 2
Recommended hose size .............................................................. 3/4-in.
Air hose connection ....................................................................... 1/2-in. pipe
145
143. Precautions
a. Never neglect the necessary lubrication procedures (para. 145a).

b. Never operate the drill with air pressures higher than 100 psi.
c. Always turn off drill before laying it down.
d. Never adjust or assemble auger bit into the wood chuck when drill is in operation.
e. Always detach air hose from drill when stopping operations for any length of time.
f. Always secure sleeves and pants legs before operating the wood borer.
144. Operation
(fig. 65)
a. Fill the oil reservoir with oil (par. 145a). Also, pour a liberal amount of oil into the throttle cap at the end of the
throttle handle.
b. Blow out the air hose and connect it to the air connection.
c. Operate drill at slow speed to insure even distribution of oil to all internal working parts.
d. Tighten the shank of the auger bit securely into the wood bit chuck. Always use properly sharpened auger bits for
best drilling results.
145. Servicing
(fig. 65)
a. Lubrication. The drill must be well lubricated at all times. The oil reservoir, located in the upper end of the motor,
must be filled before placing the drill in operation. Inspect oil level at least every four hours of operation, and replenish oil
supply if necessary. Remove the oil fill plug and fill the oil reservoir. Two grease nipples are supplied for application of
grease to vital internal points of lubrication. Apply grease sparingly through each nipple weekly. Use engine oil OE, and
grease, GAA for general lubrication.
b. Replacing Wood Chuck.

(1) Unscrew the retainer from the spindle by turning it in a counterclockwise direction.
(2) If the wood chuck bit has become jammed in the spindle socket, insert a rod through the slotted opening in
the
146
stem of the griphandle and pry down on the ejecting pin extension.
c. Preparing for Storage. To prevent internal parts of the drill from rusting while in storage, follow the procedure
outlined below:
(1) Flush the drill thoroughly with cleaning solvent; then flush with light oil to lubricate all internal parts.
(2) Wedge a cloth plug into the air inlet and exhaust openings to prevent dust from entering the tool while in
storage.
(3) Store the wood drill and auger set in its appropriate place in the front tool box.
Section IV. ROCK DRILL

146. Description
The pneumatic rock drill (fig. 66) is a piston-rotary-type unit primarily designed as a hard rock drill. However, it is
equally efficient in soft and medium formations as well. Two rock drills are supplied with the air compressor, and the
following attachments are included: four each of 2-foot, 4-foot and 6-foot drill steels and 40 each of 1-5/8-inch, 1 3/4-inch,
1 7/8-inch and 2-inch detachable rock bits. When not in use, the rock drills and attachments are stored in the compressor
side tool box.
Figure 66. Pneumatic rock drill.

147
147. Tabulated data

Manufacturer.................................................................................. Le Roi-Cleveland
Model number ................................................................................ H 111
Weight............................................................................................ 7 lbs
Overall length................................................................................. 23 5/8 in.
Bore and stroke.............................................................................. 2 5/8 x 2 3/4 in.
Air hose connection ....................................................................... -in. pipe
Recommended air pressure .......................................................... 80 psi
148. Precautions
a. Never neglect the necessary lubrication procedures (par. 150a)
b. Be sure to blow out the air hose before connecting it to the drill air connection.
c. Always turn off the drill before laying it down.
d. Inspect the nuts, bolts, and oil plug of the drill frequently for tightness. Loose nuts and bolts allow excessive play
between parts causing early wear and unnecessary loss of air pressure.
e. Clean the drill frequently (as often as once a shift) using the same flushing methods as described in paragraph
150b.
f. Always detach air hose from drill when stopping operations for any length of time.
149. Operation
(fig. 66)
a. Fill the oil reservoir of the drill with oil (par. 150a), and pour about two tablespoonfuls of oil into the air inlet.
b. Blow out the air hose and connect it to the air inlet pipe connection.
c. Operate drill at slow speed to insure even distribution of oil to all internal working parts.
d. When starting a hole use a 2-foot drill steel, even if the rock is soft and fast cutting. Start the drill with the bit
between boots at the slow speed; after the hole is approximately 1 in. deep, push throttle valve down to fast speed. When
starting a hole the largest size bit should be used until the hole is approximately 2 ft. deep; then the next smallest size is
used for the next 2 ft., and so on.
e. When drilling deep holes, blow the cuttings from the hole frequently by pulling the throttle valve up to the top
position. This will insure that the drill is cutting on fresh rock at all times.
148
150. Servicing
(fig. 66)
a. Lubrication. The drill must be well lubricated at all times. The oil reservoir must be filled before placing the drill in
operation and must be inspected and refilled (if necessary) at frequent intervals thereafter. Remove the oil fill plug and fil l
the oil reservoir. Below 32 F, use engine oil, OE-10 or OHA; above 32 F. use engine oil, OE-30.
b. Preparing for Storage. To prevent internal parts of the drill from rusting while in storage, follow the procedure
outlined below:
(1) Flush the drill thoroughly with cleaning solvent; then flush liberally with light machine oil to lubricate all
internal working parts.
(2) Wedge a cloth plug into the air inlet and exhaust openings to prevent dust from entering the tool while in
storage.
(3) Store the rock drills and their attachments in the compressor side tool box.
Section V. NAIL DRIVER
151. Description
The pneumatic nail driver and rivet buster (fig. 67) is a long-stroke piston type riveting hammer with nail driving
attachments for holding 1/2-inch and 3/4-inch diameter nail heads. Spikes can be started by hand or with the hammer.
When not in use, the nail driver, and rivet buster retainer set, 1/2-inch attachment and 3/4-inch attachment are stored in
the compressor side tool box.
152. Tabulated Data
Manufacturer............................................................Independent Pneumatic Tool Co.
Model number ..........................................................63-N
Weight......................................................................24 lbs
Overall length...........................................................20 5/8 in.
Bore and stroke........................................................1 1/16 x 6 in.
Recommended hose size ........................................ in.
Air hose connection ................................................. in. pipe
Recommended air pressure ....................................90 psi
Air requirements.......................................................30 cfm
153. Precautions
a. Never neglect the necessary lubrication procedures (par. 155a).

b. Be sure to blow out the air hose before connecting it to the air connection.
149
c. Never operate the nail driver unless a nail set is inserted into the tool and held firmly against a solid object.
d. Always detach the air hose from the nail driver when stopping operations for any length of time.
Figure 67. Pneumatic nail driver.

154. Operation
(fig. 67.)
a. Remove the plug from the end of the nail driver barrel and install the retainer set and appropriate nail driver
attachment.
b. Pour a liberal quantity of oil (par. 155a) into the air connection in the nail driver handle.
c. Blow out the air hose and connect it to the air connection.
d. Hold the nail driver with the nail set pressed firmly against a solid object. Depress the trigger slightly so that the
nail driver operates at slow speed for a few moments. This will insure even distribution of oil to all internal working parts.
e. When starting spikes with the driver, proceed carefully and at slow speed until the spike has a firm hold. Then
drive it in the rest of the way.
150
155. Servicing
(fig. 67)
a. Lubrication. Proper and sufficient lubrication is the most important factor in obtaining maximum performance from
the nail driver. Always use clean machine oil applied before placing the tool in operation, after each two to three hours of
continued operation, and when halting operations at the end of the work period. Pour the oil in the air connection. Below
32 F., use engine oil, OE-10 or OHA; above 32 F. use engine oil, OE-30.
b. Preparing for Storage.
procedure outlined below:
To prevent internal parts of the nail driver from rusting while in storage, follow the
(1) Flush a small amount of cleaning solvent through the nail driver to remove foreign matter.
Caution: Never operate the nail driver for flushing purposes without a nail set
installed and held firmly against a solid object.
(2) After flushing with solvent, flush the nail driver with light machine oil to lubricate internal working parts.
(3) Wedge a cloth plug into the inlet and exhaust openings and into the end of the barrel to prevent dust from
entering the tool while in storage.
(4) Store the nail driver and its attachments in the compressor side tool box.
Section VI. CIRCULAR SAW
156. Description
The rotary type pneumatic circular saw (fig. 68) is built for heavy duty use. The four-vane motor is designed for
operation at 80 to 100 pounds air pressure. Two sighting notches are located on the front of the saw foot. The deep notch
is a guide for making vertical cuts; the small notch for 45-degree (bevel) cuts. The bevel is adjusted by means of a wing
nut at the front of the foot. The depth of cut is adjusted by means of 'a wing nut at the rear of the foot. These wing nuts
must be tightened securely after adjustments are made. When not in use, the circular saw is stored in the front tool box,
157. Tabulated Data
Manufacturer.........................................................................................Skilsaw, Inc.
Model number .......................................................................................2127
Weight...................................................................................................32 1/2 lbs
Recommended hose :size . .................................................................. in.
Recommended air pressure . ...............................................................80 to 100 psi
151
Air requirement-normal load .................................................................55 cfm

Air requirement average .......................................................................65 cfm
Air requirement-maximum hp ...............................................................75 cfm
Figure 68. Pneumatic circular saw.

158. Precautions
a. Never neglect the necessary lubrication procedures (par. 160b).
c. Operate the saw only at recommended air pressure. Less than 80 psi will cause loss of power; more than 100 psi
will cause undue wear of moving parts.
d. Do not force the blade through the work. Allow the speed of the blade to do the cutting.
e. Keep the saw blade well sharpened. When "touching up" the blades, do not change shape or bevel of blade
teeth.
f. Always make certain that the trigger is locked before changing blades. When replacing the blade, remember that
the teeth must point in the direction of rotation.
g. Always detach the air hose from the circular saw when stopping operations for any length of time.
159. Operation
(fig. 68)
a. Rest the front of the saw foot on the work and line up the blade with the cutting line.
152
b. Press down the trigger safety locking plunger on the top of the saw handle.
c. Depress the trigger and guide the saw through the work. Do not force the blade into the material.
d. When work has been cut through, release the trigger to stop the saw.
e. Never attempt to loosen the telescopic guard or adjust the foot while the blade is rotating.
160. Servicing
(fig. 68)
a. Changing Blades. Always make certain that the trigger is locked before changing blades. Use the special wrench
provided and remove the saw stud by turning it clockwise. In replacing blade, the saw teeth must point in the direction of
rotation. After the new saw blade is in place, tighten the saw stud securely but not excessively.
b. Lubrication. There are four points of lubrication on the circular saw. Before lubricating any of these points, be
sure to clean around the fittings or plugs to prevent foreign matter from contaminating the grease or oil. One grease fitting
is located on top at the motor housing near the front handle; the other on the right side of the rear handle. The oil plug is
located on the top of the motor housing near the rear handle. The gear plug is located at the top center of the gear case.
Use the lubricants recommended in table I. Note that the gear reservoir oil level can be checked through the inspection
window on the side of the
Table I. Lubrication for-Circular Saw.
Temperature
Position
Lubricant
Interval
Below 0F.1
0 to 32 F.1
Above 32F.
Two grease
fittings.
Grease.
automo
tive and
artillery.
GAA .....
GAA.....
GAA.....
Weekly.
Oil reservoir..
Engine
oil...
OE-10...
OE-10...
OE-30...
Check
every 4
hours.
Gear case.....
Gear oil....
GOS .....
GO-75...
GO-90...
1 In low temperature. run saw "idle" for few minutes until gear case warms up.
153
Check
every 8
hours.
gear case while the saw is level. Gear oil must be up to the center of this window.
Section VII. CHAIN SAW
161. Description
The chain saw (fig. 69) is driven by a rotary vane-type air motor which is designed so that a governor is not required.
The tension of the chain is adjusted by means of the idler handle which is turned to the left to loosen, and to the right to
tighten, the chain. When not in use, the chain saw is stored in the front tool box.
162. Tabulated Data
Manufacturer.........................................................................................Mall Tool Co.
Model number .......................................................................................5P24
Weight ..................................................................................................45 lbs
Recommended hose size:
25 ft from source................................................................................5/8 in.
25 to 100 ft from source.....................................................................3/4 in.
Above 100 ft from source ..................................................................1 in.
Air requirements....................................................................................90 cfm
Recommended air pressure .................................................................80 to 100 psi
Figure 69. Chain saw.

154
163. Precautions
a. Always keep the chain saw well lubricated (par. 165a).
c. Operate the saw only at recommended air pressure. Less than 80 psi will result in loss of power; more than 100
psi will cause undue wear of moving parts.
d. Be sure to keep the air inlet strainer clean.
e. Keep the chain properly sharpened at all times. Chains should be "touched up" with a file after every 4 hours of
continuous operation. Do not attempt to remove much metal, and maintain the original cutting angles (bevels) on all
cutting edges.
f. Always detach the air hose from the air connection when stopping operations for any length of time. Then brush
the chain with OE, engine oil.
164. Operation
(fig. 69)
a. Normal Operation. The bumper, which is the part of the drive housing fastened to the saw plate, must be placed
and held against the log before the teeth begin cutting. The saw guide must be kept in the middle of the cut so that the
teeth returning in the upper groove do not cut into the sides of the kerf. Feed the saw into the timber slowly. The rate of
feed will depend on the kind and size of timber. When making a deep cut, the saw slot should be spread with a wedge to
prevent pinching of the guide bar and chain saw. Many times it will be found possible to cut faster if operators advance
their ends separately. Do not expect to cut fast with a dull chain. Sharpen or "touch up" the chain at least every 4 hours of
continuous operation.
b. Tree Felling. Turn the saw to cut down at an angle of about 30 from the horizontal. Make a cut at this angle on
the falling side of the tree in about one-fourth to one-third of its diameter. Then make a horizontal cut in to meet the end of
the angle cut. Remove the cutout piece. Make a horizontal cut on the opposite side of the tree about one-quarter of the
tree diameter above the cutout wedge. As soon as the tree inclines, remove the saw a safe distance away. When felling
heavy trees, it may be advisable to insert a wedge in the cut.
c. Underwater Cutting. For underwater cutting, remove the 3/4-inch pipe plug under the dead handle and screw this
plug into the exhaust port near the sprocket. Install at 3/4-inch standard 45 street elbow and an exhaust hose or pipe into
the exhaust port. The exhaust hose or pipe must be of sufficient length to reach above the surface of the water. If the cut
is being made
155
in shallow water so that the water pressure is not too great, a short length of pipe may be sufficient to carry the exhaust up
above the cutting plane to enable the worker to watch the cut.
165. Servicing
(fig. 69)
a. Lubrication. Proper and sufficient lubrication is most important in obtaining maximum performance from the chain
saw. A chain should never be permitted to run dry. Keep the oil reservoir filled with OE, engine oil. The oil fill plug is in
the drive housing, painted blue or red. In extremely cold weather, or to cut wood which contains a considerable amount of
pitch, mix kerosene with the oil. Brush the chain itself with OE, engine oil. Before installing a chain into the chain guide,
apply a thin film of graphite into the guide groove.
b. Adjusting Chain Tension. Chain tension is very important for ease of operation and long chain life. A chain that is
too loose may jump out of the chain guide and bind, causing the motor to stall. A tight chain places a load on the motor
and undue strain on the chain. When properly adjusted, it should be possible to grasp the chain and lift it approximately
l/2-inch above the groove near the center of the guide. The chain may be loosened by turning the idler handle to the left
after lifting the small locking knob above it to unlock the idler handle. To tighten the chain turn the idler handle to the right.
c. Sharpening the Chain. All chain cutting teeth should be sharpened at the same time, because it is important that
all teeth be of equal height. The height of chain teeth should be checked with a straight edge while filing or grinding
procedure goes on. It is possible to file saw teeth to one-fourth of their original height without impairing saw cutting ability.
If sharpening is to be done by hand, a mill bastard file 8-inches long and with round edges should be used. Do not try to
take off too much metal at one time. Long even strokes in one direction, taking care not to rock the file while it is cutting,
should result in a well controlled sharpening job. Care must be given in maintaining equal tooth height and also in
maintaining the clearance between the height of the cutter and raker. Normally, this distance should be 1/32 inch;
however, the difference in the hardness of woods may require different clearance dimensions. In general, the harder the
wood, the smaller this clearance must be. The chain must be held firmly and in a straight line during the filing operation.
Use two straight steel bars 18-inches long, held in a vise to hold the chain teeth straight and level. A straight edge and
feeler gage should be used for constant checking of tooth height and clearances.
156
d. Preparing for Storage. When not in use, thoroughly brush the chain with OE, engine oil. When storing for
extending periods, remove the chain from the guide and submerge in engine oil. Never let the chain rust. Cutting edges
will not hold up and a rusty chain will no longer be flexible. Inject an ounce or two of light machine oil or kerosene through
the air inlet opening. This will prevent rust from forming in the cylinder. Then stuff the inlet and exhaust openings with
clean cloth to prevent the entrance of dirt and dust into the internal mechanism of the saw. Store the saw and chain in the
front tool box of the compressor.
Section VIII. GREASE GUN KIT
166. Description
The grease gun kit (fig. 70) consists of a high pressure gun, a low pressure gun, and all of the adapters and
attachments necessary for proper lubrication of various types of equipment. All of the adapters and the guns are packed
in a convenient carrying case, which is stored in the front tool box.
Figure 70. Grease gun kit.

157
167. Tabulated Data

Manufacturer.........................................................................................Gray Co., Inc.
Model number .......................................................................................225-047
Weight...................................................................................................25 lbs
Recommended hose size ..................................................................... in.
Recommended hose pressure..............................................................80 to 100 psi
Air requirements....................................................................................1 cfm max
168. Precautions
a. Be sure to blow out the air hose before connecting it to the air inlet of the grease gun.
b. Be sure to attach the proper nozzle to the grease gun. The nozzle with the round adapter is for the high pressure
gun having the small piston. The nozzle with the hexagon adapter is for the low pressure gun having the larger piston.
c. Be sure to lubricate the gun regularly (at least every 2 to 3 weeks) as instructed in paragraph 170a.
169. Operation
(fig. 70)
a. Filling the Grease Gun by Suction.

(1) Before filling the gun for the first time, lubricate the inner wall of the grease gun tube with OE, engine oil.
(2) Attach the actuator to the grease gun by engaging the ball in the end of the grease gun with the socket in
the end of the actuator.
(3) Connect a 1/4-inch air hose to the air source and to the air line coupler.
(4) Attach the air line coupler to the fitting in the actuator and press the actuator trigger, driving the slider to the
nozzle end of the tube. Disconnect the coupler and remove the actuator.
(5) Attach the pull handle to the grease gun by engaging a steel ball with the notch in the handle. With the
opening of the tube completely submerged in lubricant, slowly drive the pull rod outward 'as far as possible
until the gun has been filled with grease.
(6) Screw the nozzle securely onto the grease tube with the nozzle gasket in place.
(7) Rap the pull handle sharply with the heel of the hand, push the rod inward, and remove the handle.
158
(8) Attach the actuator to the grease gun tube and with the gasket in place, screw the actuator into the tube ring
as tightly as required to affect an air seal.
(9) Select an adapter from the grease gun kit and attach it to the grease gun nozzle outlet.
b. Filling the Grease Gun Manually.

(1) Remove the actuator and nozzle from the grease gun tube.
(2) Using the pull handle as instructed in a above, pull the rod outward as far as possible, drawing the grease
slider toward the actuator end of the tube.
(3) Hold the tube with the open end up and pack solidly with grease. Screw the nozzle securely upon the tube
with the nozzle gasket in place.
(4) Remove the pull handle as instructed in a above. Then attach an adapter to the nozzle outlet.
(5) Connect the air line coupler to the grease gun.
c. Operating the Grease Gun.

(1) Press the actuator trigger, allowing the pistol to discharge grease.
(2) Release the trigger for a second or two while the actuator piston completes its stroke. The completion of
the stroke will be evidenced by a slight click, and the grease slider will then recharge to the nozzle.
(3) Continue to alternately press and release the trigger at the fastest practical speed, considering the physical
characteristics of the grease being dispensed.
(4) If necessary to bleed air from the high pressure grease tube, press down upon the small valve located in the
grease gun nozzle.
170. Servicing
(fig. 70)
a. Lubrication. The grease gun must be lubricated weekly with OE, engine oil. Apply the lubricant to the cylinder
walls of the actuator. Also, squirt 6 to 8 drops of oil into the air line fitting of the actuator. Remove the actuator from t he
grease gun. Hold the grease gun tube with the open end up, and allow several drops of oil to run down into the tube
around the pull rod and down to the O ring.
b. Correcting Air Leaks
(1) If air leaks around the trigger when it is fully depressed, it is possible that the valve stem of the actuator has
be come unseated. Press the trigger down and tap it sharply with a hammer directly above the valve stem.
159
(2) If air leaks where the actuator is screwed into the tube, the gasket between the grease gun and the actuator
may be worn. Reverse or replace the gasket.
(3) If air leaks into the grease, disassemble the grease gun and remove the slider assembly, which is the
leather cup assembly at the end of the pull rod. It is possible that the slider 0 ring or leather cups may be
dry or worn. Lubricate these items as described in a above. If the air leak continues, replace the leather
cups and slider O ring.
(4) If the air line coupler should leak, it is possible that the valve seat is worn. Disassemble the air line coupler,
and replace the valve seat.
c. Correcting for Insufficient Dispensing. If the actuator operates, but insufficient material is dispensed, these
possible causes and remedies are suggested: Check the supply of lubricant within the grease gun. If lubricant supply is
exhausted, refill the grease gun as instructed in paragraph 169. Do not operate the actuator trigger too rapidly. Follow the
operating instructions carefully as outlined in paragraph 169c. Inspect the nozzle adapters or dispensing adapters
carefully for signs of clogging. If necessary, remove, disassemble and thoroughly clean these parts with cleaning solvent.
Dry with compressed air, and reassemble the adapters.
d. Preparing for Storage.
(1) Flush the grease gun and adapters which have been used with cleaning solvent to remove all grease from
the equipment. Then blow these parts dry with compressed air.
(2) Place the grease guns and accessories in their appropriate places within the grease gun kit box as shown in
figure 70. Close and lock the grease kit box and place the box in its appropriate position in the compressor
front tool box.
Section IX. PNEUMATIC TOOL ACCESSORIES
171. Description
(fig. 71)
In addition to the various pneumatic tools supplied with the equipment a tire inflating attachment (2), a blow gun
attachment (1), and two air line oilers (3) are included among the accessories. The air line oilers are designed to be
connected into the air line between the compressor and the tool being used. Air passing through the oiler picks up a fine
160
mist of oil from the oil reservoir which aids in lubricating the internal mechanism of the pneumatic tool being used. The
blow gun attachment is used primarily for cleaning purposes or drying purposes and can be attached directly to the end of
the air line. The tire inflating attachment includes an air gage which is attached by a chain to the inflating tool.
172. Tabulated Data
Air line oiler:
Manufacturer .............................................................................. The Rucker Co.
Model number............................................................................. 3
Oiler capacity .............................................................................. 1 pint
Blow gun attachment:
Manufacturer .............................................................................. Gates Rubber Co.
Specification number .................................................................. JAN-B-622
Tire inflating attachment:
Manufacturer .............................................................................. Gates Rubber Co.
Specification number .................................................................. T-2226
Figure 71. Pneumatic tool accessories.

161
173. Precautions
a. Never direct the stream of air from the blow gun attachment at nearby individuals. The air under this pressure
could be very injurious to the person.
b. Check the oil level of the air line oiler frequently.

c. Install the air line oilers as close as possible to the tools used. The oiler will operate satisfactorily at a distance as
great as 25 feet from the pneumatic tool.
174. Operation
The air line oiler can be used to add an antifreeze solution to the air entering the tool by connecting it before the
regular oiler. This is usually necessary in extreme cold weather to keep the moisture in the air from freezing in the line or
tool.
175. Servicing
a. The tire inflating attachment, blow gun attachment and air line oilers require no servicing other than keeping them
clean and free from dirt and muck at all times. When the equipment is to be stored for any length of time brush out the
oiler with cleaning solvent and blow dry with compressed air.
b. To adjust the air line oiler for the tool being used it is necessary to operate the tool, holding the palm of the hand
over the exhaust of the tool. If the lubrication is correct, a small amount of oil will collect in the hand. If no oil is coming out
of the exhaust, adjust the needle valve inside the oiler reservoir by turning it counterclockwise. If an excess of oil appears
from the exhaust, adjust it clockwise.
162
CHAPTER 5
FIELD AND DEPOT MAINTENANCE
Section I. INTRODUCTION
176. General
Instructions in this chapter are published for the information and guidance of maintenance personnel responsible for
third and higher echelons of maintenance of the air compressor. They contain information on maintenance which is
beyond the scope of the tools, equipment, or supplies normally available to using organizations.
177. Procedure
Paragraphs 178 through 235 describe the complete disassembly, repair, and reassembly of each major unit or system
comprising the air compressor. Before proceeding with overhaul, check to see that replacement parts are available.
Section II. TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
178. General
The tools and equipment as listed in this section are those that are required to perform field and depot maintenance on
the air compressor. Tools and equipment issued as on-equipment tools and common mechanics hand-tools have not
been enumerated in this section.
179. Field and Depot Maintenance Tools and Equipment
Special tools required for field and depot maintenance are listed below.
Tool
Stock No.
Tool, valve, check ................................................
41-8967.500.005
Reference (Pars. )
185h
Punch, shot..........................................................
41-6434.500.100
187b
Extractor, plug......................................................
41-3164.500.021
185m
163
Tool
Stock No.
Reference
(Pars.)
Wrench, jet, main . ..............................................
41-9665.500.283
187d
Wrench, seat, valve..............................................
41-9729.700.085
185 g
Reamer, high speed steel, hand, straight

shank, straight flute, carburetor throttle
bushing
41-R-2308-825
185l
Driver, bushing, 5/16 in., length overall 4 in .........
41-D2870
185l
Gage, depth, carburetor float ...............................
41-G-130-225
187g
Lifter, float axle (Zenith #C161-168)
..............................
.......
185f
Tool, valve, check, for installation (Zenith ............
..............................
.......
187e
#C161-161).
191a
Tool, reseating, shutterstat (Kysor #B-2441)........

Wrench, torque indicating.....................................
41-9847.500.150
................
.........
Puller, gear and bearing, 2 arm type. 12 in .........

capacity.
41-6272.348.120
196c
222a
224b
Compressor, piston ring, hand type, with

ratchet.
41-2430.500.500
223c
Tool, mica undercutter, hand type........................
41-8963.780.600
196d(2)
Press, arbor, bench type ......................................
41-6228.500.080
196c
196e
198c
220b
222c
223a, c
224b
225b
Indicator, dial, universal, 1 in., with 3/8 in.

sleeve.
41-4791.500.600
191b
202h(2)
202h(3)
222b
Caliper, micrometer, outside, single, 3 to 4 in ......
41-1945.700.030
222b(2)
Caliper, micrometer, outside, 5 to 6 in..................
41-1945.700.050
223b
Caliper, micrometer, inside, 1 1/2 to 12 in.....
41-1940.500.015
223b
225b
164
Tool
Stock No.
Reference
(Pars.)
Expander, piston ring, 5% in. piston size...............................................
41-3160.800.057
223a
223c
Puller, cylinder sleeve ............................................................................
41-6272.300.500
225b
Grinder, crankshaft ................................................................................
40-5145.500.510
222 c
Section IIl. FUEL PUMP

180. Description
The fuel pump is mounted at the foot of the crankcase on the compressor side of the unit. The rotation of the
camshaft eccentric actuates the rocker arm which pulls the diaphragm downward against the diaphragm spring, creating a
vacuum within the pump chamber. On the suction stroke of the pump, fuel from the fuel tank enters through the inlet into
the sediment bowl, is filtered by the screen, and passes into the pump chamber through the inlet valve. On the return
stroke, the diaphragm spring pushes the diaphragm upward, forcing fuel from the pump chamber through the outlet valve
and to the carburetor. When the carburetor bowl is filled, the flute in the carburetor will shut off the needle valve, thus
creating a pressure within the pump chamber. This pressure will hold the diaphragm downward against the diaphragm
spring pressure, where it will remain inoperative in the downward position until the carburetor requires further fuel and the
carburetor needle valve opens. The rocker arm spring supplies the tension which keeps the rocker arm in constant
contact with the camshaft.
181. Fuel Pump Disassembly
(fig. 72)
a. Remove fuel pump (par. 75a).

b. Before disassembling the fuel pump, file a mark across the diaphragm flanges. These file marks will serve as a
guide during reassembly to make certain that the inlet and outlet holes will match the position of the fuel line.
c. Loosen the thumb nut at the top of the lifting bail (1) and lift the bail, metal fuel bowl (2), bowl gasket (3), and
screen (4) from the pump.
d. Remove the ten cover screws (5) and lockwashers (6) and lift the pump cover (7) from the assembly. Invert the
pump cover, and remove the two retainer screws (11), the valve cage
165
Figure 72. Exploded view of fuel pump.

retainer (10), valve cage assemblies (9), and valve cage gaskets (8) from the cover.
e. Remove the retainer washers (22) from the rocker arm pin (21). Drive out the rocker arm pin and carefully
disassemble
166
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Lifting bail
Fuel bowl
Bowl gasket
Screen
Cover screw (10 req)
Cover lockwasher (10 req)
Pump cover
Valve cage gasket (2 req)
Valve cage assembly (2 req)
Valve cage retainer
Retainer screw (2 req)
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
Diaphragm assembly
Diaphragm spring retainer
Diaphragm spring
Pump body
Rocker arm link
Rocker arm
Mounting gasket
Rocker arm bushing
Rocker arm spring
Rocker arm pin
Retainer washer (2 req)

the rocker arm (17) rocker arm link (16) and rocker arm spring (20) from the pump body (15). Press the bushing
(19) from the rocker arm.
f. Lift straight up on the diaphragm assembly (12), removing the diaphragm assembly, diaphragm spring retainer
(13), and diaphragm spring (14) from the pump body.
182. Fuel Pump Inspection and Cleaning
a. Clean all parts thoroughly with cleaning solvent, and dry with compressed air.
b. Inspect the diaphragm carefully for signs of deterioration or other damage.
c. Inspect the fuel pump screen for indications of gum or varnish deposits in the holes. If the screen cannot be
cleaned with an available solvent, then it should be replaced.
d. Examine the pump body carefully for signs of damage particularly at the rocker arm holes. The reciprocal motion
of the rocker arm may sometime loosen the rocker arm pin and eventually wear the rocker arm hole in the body into an
oval shape. Correction requires replacement of the fuel pump body.
e. Discard the pump mounting gasket and fuel bowl gasket. These gaskets should be replaced at regular overhaul
periods.
183. Fuel Pump Reassembly
(fig. 72)
a. Assemble the rocker arm link (16) to the rocker arm (17) with the bushing (19).
b. Insert the rocker arm and link into the body and temporarily hold it into place with a drift pin of appropriate size.
Install the rocker arm spring between the cast button inside of the pump body and the small ear on the rocker arm spring
(20).
c. Insert the diaphragm spring (14) into the pump body (15). Place the diaphragm spring retainer (13) on top of the
spring, 167
167
and insert the pull rod of the diaphragm assembly (12) down through the spring and oil sea!, which is pressed into the
pump body.
d. Press on the diaphragm in such a manner that the pull rod is tilted slightly away from the rocker arm link. Invert
the pump body until it is upside down, and allow the link to fall into engagement with the pull rod. Bring the diaphragm
back to level position in order to hook the pull rod onto the link.
e. Hold the drift pin with the left hand and carefully drive the drift pin out of the pump body with the permanent rocker
arm pin (21). Note that the rocker arm pin has a head on one end and a tapered hollow end at the other. Install the
retainer washer (22) over the hollow end of the pin. Rest the head of the rocker arm pin on a solid surface and spread or
"mushroom" the hollow end of the pin with a ball peen hammer or round-point punch.
f. Invert the cover casting and drop the valve gage gaskets (8) down into the two drive pockets of the cover. Insert
the valve cage assemblies (9) down into the valve holes on top of the valve cage gaskets. The inlet valve must be
installed with the legs upward; the outlet with the legs downward. Place the valve cage retainer (10) down on the valves so
that the two pairs of arms rest on the edges of the valve assemblies and the two small holes in the retainer are aligned
with the screw holes in the cover casting. Install and tighten the retainer screws (11).
g. Turn the pump cover right side up. Install the bowl gasket (3) on the edge of the cover casting. Place the screen
(4) over the gasket in such a way that the rim of the screen lies close against the gasket. The two small metal projections
near the center of the screen should be facing up. Install the fuel bowl (2) and lifting bail (1) and tighten the lifting bail nut
securely.
h. Lock the partially assembled pump body in a soft-jaw vise. Position the partially assembled cover on top of the
pump body and line up the file marks. Level the diaphragm by moving the rocker arm. Hold the rocker arm in while
installing the cover screws (5) and cover lockwashers (6). Be sure that these screws pass through the holes in the
diaphragm easily and without chewing the fabric. Tighten the screws only enough so that they just touch the lockwashers.
i. Push the rocker arm back and forth several times, releasing it with a snap. Tighten the cover screws, using a
crisscross pattern from side to side until all screws are secure.
j. Install the pump to the crankcase as instructed in paragraph 75b.
168
Section IV. CARBURETOR

184. Description
The carburetor is a down draft unit, incorporating a primary and secondary venturi. The main discharge tube is located in
one of the two supporting arms and terminates at the center of the secondary venturi. All air is taken from inside the air
intake. This balanced construction enables the carburetor to maintain correct air-fuel ratios even though the air cleaner
may become restricted. The accelerating pump and the power (or economizer) systems are controlled by engine manifold
vacuum. The accelerating pump system is vacuum operated. The accelerating pump instantly delivers fuel directly into
the air stream on sudden throttle openings. It also controls the volume of discharge of this fuel. The power jet controls the
additional fuel required for maximum power at wide-open throttle operation. It is called an economizer or a bypass jet in
some carburetors.
185. Carburetor Disassembly
(fig. 73)
a. Remove the carburetor (par. 78a).

b. With a file, make match marks on the choke bracket (2) and the air intake body (5) to aid in reassembling these
parts. Remove the five screws with lockwashers (4 and 9), raise the air intake body (5) until the gasket (12) can be
loosened, and lift the air intake body from the fuel bowl.
c. With the choke in the wide-open position, file off the end of the riveted fillister head screw (7). Remove this screw
(7) and the choke plate spring (8). Then remove the choke shaft and lever (13) so that the choke plate (6) can be lifted
from the air intake body. Remove the fillister head screw (14).
d. Remove the vent and idle well (11) and the well seal washer (10), using the fingers only. Remove the air intake
gasket (12), then remove the assembled pump (49), guide (50), spacer (51), and pump spring (52) from the fuel bowl.
e. Remove the check valve with jet (47) and the well seal washer (10). It may be necessary to use a small wire hook
to lift the well seal washer from the recess in the fuel bowl.
f. Remove as a group, the float (15), float axle (17), axle retainer plugs (16), and the needle portion of the fuel valve
and seat (19). Use the special tool, float axle lifter (par. 179) to do this. Insert the forked end of the float axle lifter into the
bowl and under the float axle (17). Use the edge of the bowl as a fulcrum to pry the axle and retainer plugs up out of the
fuel bowl.
g. Unscrew and remove the fuel valve seat (19) and fiber washer (20). Use the special tool, valve seat wrench
(par. 179).
169
Figure 73. Exploded view of carburetor.

170
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
Nut, square, No. 6-36

Choke bracket
Screw, fil hd, No. 8-36 x
Screw, with lockwasher (2 req)
Air intake body
Choke plate
Screw, fil hd, No. 6-32 x 3/8
Choke plate spring
Screw, with lockwasher (3 req)
Well seal washer
Vent and idle well
Bowl-to-intake gasket
Choke shaft and lever
crew, fil hd, No. 8-32 x
Float
Axle retainer plug
Float axle
Check valve
Fuel valve and seat
Fiber washer (3 req)
Bowl channel plug
Main jet adjusting screw
Main jet
Fiber washer
Fiber washer
Fuel screen
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
Channel plug
Throttle shaft and lever
Stop screw spring
Stop screw
Shaft seal retainer
Shaft seal
Throttle shaft bushing
Idle adjusting needle
Adjusting needle spring
Flange gasket
Shaft hole plug
Throttle body
Throttle plate
Throttle plate screw
Bowl-to-body gasket
Venturi
Screw, with lockwasher
Idle channel bushing
Fuel bowl
Bowl channel plug
Check valve, with jet
Channel plug
Pump
Guide
Spacer
Pump spring

for this purpose. Remove the channel plug (48) and fiber washer (20) from the pump cylinder.
h. Screw the special check valve tool (par. 179) into the check valve (18) until firmly attached. Strike the crossbar
sharply with sliding weight to remove the check valve. Do not leave the check valve disk on the channel.
i. Unscrew and remove the main jet adjusting screw (22) and fiber washer (20). Remove the main jet (23) and fiber
washer (24). Unscrew and remove the channel plug (27) and fiber washer (25) from the fuel bowl. Then remove the fuel
screen (26) from the plug (27)..
j. Remove the two screws with lockwashers (43) and lift the fuel bowl (45), bowl-to-body gasket (41), and the venturi
(42) from the throttle body (38). Remove the idle channel bushing (44) only if it is obviously damaged and in need of
replacement.
k. Unscrew and remove the idle adjusting needle (34) and spring (35) from the throttle body. With the throttle
open, file off: the riveted ends of the throttle plate screws (40). Use a flat file with the edges ground smooth. Remove the
throttle plate screws (40) and throttle plate (39) from the throttle body. Re move the throttle shaft and lever (28), shaft seal
(32) and seal retainer (31). Remove the stop screw (30) and stop screw spring (29).
171
l. Insert a 5/16-inch rod through the shaft hole and lightly tap out the shaft hole plug (37).
NOTE
If the throttle shaft bushings (33) must be replaced, remove them one at a time and
ream as instructed below.
Insert a 3/8-inch fine thread tap into one of the bushings (33). Drive out the bushing from the opposite side with a 5/16inch rod. Install a new bushing (33) with the special bushing driver (par. 179). Insert the special reamer (par. 179)
through the old bushing and ream the new bushing to size. Repeat this operation to install a new bushing on the opposite
side.
m. Drill a No. 46 hole in the center of the bowl channel plug (21). Screw the special plug extractor (par. 179) into the
hole counterclockwise until firmly seated. Strike sharply on the opposite end to remove the plug. Repeat the above
operation to remove the second bowl channel plug (46).
186. Carburetor Cleaning and Inspection
(fig. 73)
a. Clean all metal parts thoroughly with a cleaning solvent and blow them dry with compressed air. Blow out all
passages (channels) in the air intake, fuel bowl, and throttle body. Make certain that all carbon deposits have been
removed from the blower and the idle ports. It is advisable to reduce the flow of compressed air in each channel to insure
the removal of all particles of dirt. Never use a wire or a drill to clean out a jet or channel.
b. Inspect the machined surface of the air intake body for dents, warpage, or any other damage that might cause air
leaks which would upset the fuel delivery characteristics of the carburetor. Replace the air intake body if such damage is
evident.
c. Examine the fuel bowl to make certain that the secondary venturi is not loose and to insure that gasket surfaces
have not been damaged to the part where air leaks might result.
d. Several carburetor parts should be automatically replaced at every overhaul period. These parts are all gaskets
and fiber washers, the fuel valve and seat (19), the pump (49), the choke plate spring (8), and the check valve (18).
e. Examine the float parts carefully for damage. The float must be replaced if loaded with gasoline, dented, or if the
float axle bearing is excessively worn. Replace the axle if wear can be detected visually on bearing surface.
f.
Inspect the point of the idle adjusting needle (34). It must be smooth and free of ridges. If damaged, the idle
adjusting needle must be replaced.
172
g. Inspect the throttle plate for burrs or damaged edges. Do not attempt to clean the throttle plate with a wire wheel
or a sharp instrument.
h. Examine the throttle shaft and lever for wear. If the throttle shaft is noticeably worn or if the lever is loose on the
shaft, this assembly must be replaced.
i. Inspect the point of the idle adjusting needle (34). It within the limits set up by the choke assembly screw.
j. Inspect the bearing surfaces of the choke shaft and lever. See that the shaft is straight and that the lever is
securely fastened to the shaft.
187. Carburetor Reassembly
(fig. 73)
a. Install the shaft hole plug (37) into the throttle shaft opening of the throttle body (38), and stake it in place with a
sharp chisel. Then place the shaft seal retainer (31) and the shaft seal (32) on the throttle shaft and lever (28). Insert the
throttle shaft and lever into the throttle body while holding the throttle body with the flanged end down. Rotate the shaft to
the wide open position with the cutout section of the shaft facing away from the idle discharge ports. Insert the throttle
plate (39) with the bevel on the leading edge away from the idle discharge ports. Close the throttle and center the plate so
that the bevel fits the bore snugly; then start the throttle plate screws (40). Hold the throttle in the closed position and, at
the same time, press in on the end of the throttle shaft to press the packing snugly in place while tightening the throttle
plate screws securely. Screw the idle adjusting needle (34) with spring (35) into the throttle body. Seat it lightly against the
needle seat and then back out one and one-half turns as a preliminary adjustment.
b. Install the bowl channel plugs (21 and 46) with the special shot punch (par. 179).
c. Assemble the fuel screen (26) to the channel plug (27).
install this group of parts in the fuel bowl.
Install the fiber washer (25) on the filter plug, and
d. Install the main jet (23) and fiber washer (24) with the special main jet wrench (par. 179). Install the main jet (23)
and fiber washer (20) into the fuel bowl.
e. Install the check valve (18), disk side down, in the bottom of the fuel bowl and flush with the casting. Use the
special check valve tool (par. 179) for installation. Then screw the valve channel plug (48) and fiber washer (20) down
into place in the fuel bowl.
173
f. Screw the fuel valve seat (19) and its fiber washer (20) into place, with the special valve seat wrench (par. 179).
Then place the fuel valve needle into the fuel valve seat with the knob end of the needle up.
g. Hold the free end of the float (15) and engage the knob end of the needle (19) with the slotted end of the float
lever. Lift the float and needle and slip the float axle (17) through the float lever; then lower the axle into the slots and the
casting. Press down firmly on the float lever directly over the fuel valve and check the float for correct level. This float
level can be checked with the special Zenith carburetor float depth gage (par. 179) as shown in figure 74. A tolerance of
plus or minus 1/32 inch from the gage setting is permitted. Install the axle retainer plugs (16) with a flat end punch. Allow
approximately 1/64 inch tolerance above the machined surface.
h. Insert the well seal washer (10) down into its opening in the fuel bowl. Then install the check valve with jet (47)
open end down, into the same opening above the seal washer. The valve will extend approximately 1/64 inch above the
surface of the bowl casting.
i. Install the pump (49), guide (50), spacer (51), and pump spring (52), in that order, into the pump cylinder. Position
the bowl-to-intake gasket (12) on the fuel bowl. Then insert the vent and idle well (11) into the well on top of the bowl
gasket, and put the well seal washer (10) in place on top of the idle jet.
j. Place the air intake body (5) upright on a bench, with the bowl cover end toward the right. Hold the choke plate (6)
with
Figure 74. Checking carburetor float level.

174
the long side down and the spring anchor clip away from you. Insert the plate into the air intake and hold it in position in
line with the choke shaft holes. Insert the choke shaft and lever (13) through the shaft boss and the choke plate. Rotate
the choke shaft and lever clockwise until the lock lever stop is against the stop boss. Move the choke plate to the closed
position. Hold the choke in the closed position and install the fillister head screw (7) through the eye of the choke plate
spring (8). Do not tighten this screw completely as the spring (8) should be free. Rivet the end of the screw (7), using a
flat-end punch held in a vise as a mandril to support the screw. Avoid bending the choke shaft. Then hold the choke in
open position and hook the free end of the choke plate springs (8) over the anchor clip in the choke plate (6).
k. Hold the assembled air intake body in position over the bowl, and guide the pump spring (52) into the pump guide
tube. At the same time, guide the vent and idle well (11) with the well seal washer (10) into place. Install but do not tighten
the three screws with lockwashers (9). Install the choke bracket (2) and the two screws with lockwashers (4), alining the
file marks on the choke bracket with those on the air intake body. Then tighten all five screws (4 and 9) evenly and
securely.
I. Install the venturi (42) with its small end up. Position the bowl-to-body gasket (41) on the throttle body (38),
making certain that all channel openings are in alinement. Then assemble the throttle body to the fuel bowl (45) and install
and tighten the screws with the lockwashers (43).
m. Install the carburetor (par. 78b).
Section V. SHUTTERSTAT
188. Description
The shutterstat is a thermostatic valve which controls the flow of air under pressure. Single inlet and outlet fittings
are provided for external air connections. The passage of air is controlled by a needle valve which is coupled to a
thermostat element and a liquid bulb. At normal temperature, air under pressure will pass through the needle valve.
When the temperature of the bulb approaches 180 F., the thermostat element expands to close the needle valve and cut
off the air. The needle is precision ground and lapped. The body of the shutterstat is rolled aluminum.
189. Shutterstat Adjustment
(fig. 75)
Remove the screw and lockwasher and take off the jacket from
175
Figure 75. Shutterstat adjustment.

176
around the center of the shutterstat. Turn the adjusting wheel to the left to increase the spring tension for higher
temperature setting or turn the adjusting wheel to the right for lower temperature setting. After adjusting the shutterstat,
install the jacket, lockwasher, and screw.
190. Shutterstat Disassembly
(fig. 76)
a. Remove shutterstat (par. 81a.).

b. Remove the jacket (17) by removing the screw and lockwasher (12). In removing the jacket, the seal rings (18)
may bind if dry. Two or three drops of shutter fluid at the top of the jacket will free the seal rings.
c. Place the shutterstat in a vise using two - x -inch spacers in the slotted slides to protect the shutterstat.
Remove the two locking set screws (13). Remove the base assembly (14). Be careful of the base assembly as the
bellows are easily dam. aged by rough handling.
d. Take the shutterstat from the vise and remove the adjusting spring (15) and the push pin (8). The adjusting wheel
(16) should be left in the same position as it may not be necessary to readjust.
e. Place the shutterstat, with the spacers, in the vise with the end cap up. Remove the end cap (1), screen (4), felt
(3), and gasket (2). Remove the needle seat cap (5) and the spacer gasket (6). Remove the needle (7). Remove the two
screens (11) and felt (10) from the outlet opening on the side of the shutterstat body (9).
191. Shutterstat Inspection
Carefully clean and inspect all parts. If necessary, replace any worn parts. Replace all the gaskets. Wash all parts in
shutter fluid or other noncorrosive solvent. Blow all parts and openings with clean, dry, compressed air.
a. Seating a Replacement Needle. To prepare the valve bushing, inside the shutterstat body, it will be necessary to
resurface the valve bushing and the needle seat cap. Use the shutterstat reseating tool B-2441 (par. 179). Secure the
body in a drill press, and with the reseating tool, clean the bushing surface. Do not remove more than 1/32 inch of stock,
or the shutterstat body must be replaced. Remove an equal amount of stock from the end of the push pin. Remove any
burrs with a tapered 1/4-inch wood dowel. Do this by hand to avoid too much pressure. Place the needle in the bushing
and apply a drop of light oil. Screw a new seat cap into the bushing without the spacer gasket. Tighten the seat cap with a
socket wrench, slowly working the seat surface
177
Figure 76. Exploded view of shutterstat.

178
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
End cap
Gasket
FeltScreen
Seat cap
Spacer gasket
Needle
Push pin
Body
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Felt
Screen
Screw and lockwasher
Set screw
Base assembly
Adjusting spring
Adjusting wheel
Jacket
Seal ring

against the needle point. Remove the seat cap, clean all parts, and blow out the bushing with compressed air to remove
any foreign particles. Place the spacer washer on the seat cap and firmly screw it into the bushing to prevent air leakage.
b. Checking Needle Travel. With the shutterstat completely dismantled with the needle and seat cap in place, place
the body assembly in the vise with the bushing adjusting stem up. Insert the push pin against the needle. Attach a dial
indicator to the body with the plunger against the push pin. Turn the indicator to zero. Insert a small pin through the hole
in the needle seat cap and move the needle to the other side of the seat. Use a light pressure. The needle travel should
not be less than 0.005 inch or more than 0.006 inch. If the travel is more than 0.006 inch, tighten the needle cap to make
the correction. If the travel is less than 0.005 inch, replace the spacer gasket and recheck the needle travel. Install the
shutterstat end cap. Connect an air line to the fitting in the end cap. Plug the side opening with a 1/8-inch IPS pipe plug.
With the air applied hold the shutterstat body under water and test for leakage out of the threaded end of the bushing.
With the pin, move the needle to the upper seat. Test for air leaks. If either seat shows air leakage, rotate the needle with
a small shank screwdriver. This will lap the needle and the seats. Lap the needle with the air applied.
192. Shutterstat Reassembly
(fig. 76)
a. Place the body in a vise, with the spacers, and the end cap (1) down. Drop the push pin (8) and adjusting wheel
(16) into place, and install the adjusting spring (15). Screw in the base assembly (14), and lock the set screws (13) into
position. Install the jacket (17), locking into place with the screw and lockwasher (12). This screw also serves as a lock
for the adjusting wheel (16).
b. Install the shutterstat (par. 81b).
179
Section VI. WATER PUMP

193. Water Pump Disassembly
(fig. 77)
a. Remove the fan guard (par. 87a).
b. Remove the radiator water inlet connection and gasket (par. 86)
c. Remove the pump (par. 86).
Figure 77. Exploded view of water pump.

d. Remove the eight hex head bolts (1) and copper washers (2) that attach the pump cover (3) and its gasket (4) to
the water pump body (10).
e. Unscrew the special nut (6) from the drive shaft and remove the impeller (7) and the woodruff key (5). Remove
the pump seal (14) and seal seat (13) from the shaft.
f. If necessary to replace the pump body (10) or mounting gaskets (11), unscrew and remove the six hex head bolts
(8 and 12) and lockwashers (9) that fasten the body to the crankcase.
180
194. Water Pump Cleaning and Inspection

(fig. 77)
a. Examine all water pump parts for evidences of excessive rust, scale or corrosion. Clean or replace parts as
necessary.
b. If the pump cover gasket (4) and mounting gaskets (11) appear badly worn or damaged, discard them and replace
with new gaskets.
c. Inspect the pump seal (14) carefully for good condition and replace, if necessary.
195. Water Pump Reassembly
(fig. 77)
a. Apply shellac to the gasket surfaces of the water pump body (10) and crankcase, and position the gaskets (11) on
the pump body.
b. Fasten the pump body (10) and mounting gaskets (11) to the crankcase with the six hex head bolts (8 and 12) and
lockwashers (9). Tighten the bolts securely.
c. Slide the seal seat (13) and pump seal (14) over the pump shaft and up against the pump body. Insert the
woodruff key (5) into the key slot of the shaft, and press the impeller (7) into place. Install and tighten the special nut (6).
d. Fasten the pump cover (3) and cover gasket (4) to the pump body with the eight hex head bolts (1) and copper
washers (2).
e. Reconnect the radiator water inlet connection to the water pump body (par. 86).
f. Install the fan guard (par. 87b).
Section VII. GENERATOR AND VOLTAGE REGULATOR
196. Generator
a. Description. The 24-volt shunt generator is driven by a drive belt connected to the crankshaft pulley. Two brushes
are employed which are held in separate brush holders mounted on the commutator-end frame. Torsion springs are used
to apply proper brush pressure on the commutator. The armature shaft rotates in ball bearings on either end of the
generator. A ventilating fan is mounted on the armature shaft. Pole shoes strengthen and improve distribution of the
magnetic field and support the field coils in the field frame.
b. Removal. Refer to paragraph 92c.
c. Disassembly (fig. 78). Remove the band cover (14) by snapping back the, catch. Disconnect the leads from the
brush holders that are attached to the commutator-end frame (21), by
181
Figure 78. Exploded view of generator.

182
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
Woodruff key
Armature
Field coil
Field coil
Pole shoe
Field frame
Lockwasher
Screw
Terminal stud
Stud bushing
Washer
Lockwasher
Nut, hex, No. 12-24 (4 req)
Band cover
Pole shoe screw
Cover plate screw
Lockwasher
End cover plate
Cover plate gasket
Commutator-end bearing
Commutator-end frame
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
Brush
Lockwasher
Screw
Brush arm spacer
Brush arm
Brush spring
Screw
Lockwasher
Inner bearing retainer plate
Drive-end bearing
Outer bearing retainer plate
Drive-end frame
Spacing collar
Fan
Pulley
Washer
Shaft nut
Through-bolt
Washer
Lockwasher
Screw

removing the screws (24) and lockwashers (23). Detach the commutator-end frame by removing the two through-bolts
(39) and washers (40). Tap with a soft hammer to loosen, if necessary. Detach the field frame (6), using a soft hammer, if
necessary. Separate the armature (2) and drive-end frame (33) by placing the armature in soft jaws of a vise. Take off
the shaft nut (38) and washer (37). Remove the pulley (36) with a gear and bearing puller (par. 179) and slide off the
drive-end frame. Remove the woodruff key (1). Remove the screws (42) and lockwashers (41), and separate the fan (35)
from the pulley. Remove the spacing collar (34). Take out the three screws (28) and lockwashers (29), and remove the
inner bearing retainer plate (30). Press out the drive-end bearing (31) with the outer bearing retainer plate (32). Use an
arbor press (par. 179) for this purpose supporting the inner bearing race where possible. The field frame, including
lockwasher (7), screw (8), terminal stud and lead (9), stud bushing (10), washer (11), lockwashers (12), the lower hex nut
(13), pole shoe screws (15), pole shoes (5), and the field coils (3 and 4), cannot be disassembled. The field coils are
varnished and baked in place and are not serviced separately. If the coils are defective, replace the complete frame and
field assembly. Lift the ends of the brush springs (27) over the stops. The brush arms (26), brush springs, and brush arm
spacers (25) will slide off the pins. Lift out the brushes (22). Remove the cover plate screws (16) and lockwashers (17),
and
183
take off the end cover plate (18) and cover plate gasket (19). Remove the commutator-end bearing (20).
NOTE
The bearing may remain on the shaft when the commutator-end frame is removed.
Leave it on the shaft if it is not defective.
d. Cleaning and Inspection.

(1) General. Clean and inspect ail parts, and replace any defective parts.
(2) Armature. Do not clean the armature by any degreasing method, since this would damage the insulation
and ruin the armature. Wipe with a clean cloth slightly dampened with carbon tetrachloride or similar
solvent. If the commutator is rough, out-of-round, worn, has high mica, filled slots, or is burned, turn down
the commutator in a lathe, and undercut the mica. Use a mica undercutter (par. 179) for this purpose, if
available, or use a hacksaw blade as shown in figure 79. Follow the numerical sequence (1), (2), and (3) in
figure 79.
Figure 79. Correct method of undercutting mica.

(a) Ground. Use a test lamp to check for grounds from the ends of the commutator segments to the end of the
armature shaft or lamination. Do not place the test probes on the commutator or bearing surface or the
arching will mar the polished surfaces. If the test
184
lamp lights, indicating a ground, and if the ground is not apparent and repairable, replace the
armature.
(b) Open. An open-circuited armature is easily detectable, since this condition produces badly burned
commutator bars. The bars connected to the open armature coils soon burn, since every time they
pass under the brushes they interrupt a flow of current, causing heavy arcing. Check the armature
coil continuity with a test light. If one or more coils are open, replace the armature.
(c) Short (fig. 80). A shorted armature may be detected on a growler. When an armature is placed on
the growler, and a hacksaw blade held above each armature coil, the blade will be alternately
attracted to and repelled from a shorted armature coil. Replace a shorted armature. Before
discarding an armature, inspect the commutator slots. Copper and brush dust sometimes collects in
the slots and shorts adjacent bars.
(3)
Field. Test the field coil current draw by connecting a battery and an ammeter between the two field
leads. The current draw at 24-volts should be from 0.66 to 0.74 amperes. Replace the frame and field
assembly if the field coil current is not between the limits specified.
(4)
Brushes. Replace the brushes as instructed in paragraph 92b.
(5)
Brush springs. The brush springs must have enough tension to provide proper pressure between the
brushes and the commutator after the generator is assembled. After reassembling the brushes, brush
springs, and brush arms to the commutator-frame end, place the commutator in position and check with
a spring scale the amount of pull needed to raise the brush arms from the brushes. Replace the springs
if the tension is not 28 ounces.
(6)
Bearings. Replace the ball bearings if they roll rough, or sloppily. Otherwise, clean the bearings by
rotating them in carbon tetrachloride, or similar solvent. Dry them with compressed air and immediately
relubricate with grease, ball and roller bearing BR.
(7)
Commutator-end frame. Replace the commutator-end frame if the holders or pins are damaged in any
way. The frame is of riveted construction and must be replaced as a unit.
e. Reassembly (fig. 78). Install the outer bearing retainer plate (32) in the drive-end frame (33). Place the drive end
bearing
185
Figure 80. Testing armature on a growler.

(31) against the outer bearing retainer, and attach the inner bearing retainer plate (30) with the screws (28) and
lockwashers (29). Fasten the fan (35) to the pulley (36) with the screws (42) and lockwashers (41). Instant the spacing
collar (34). Press the drive-end frame on the armature in an arbor press (par. 179). Insert the woodruff key (1) in the
armature shaft. Press on the pulley and install the shaft washer (37) and shaft nut (38). Reassemble the commutator-end
frame (21). Put the brush arm spacers (25) over the pins. Place the brush springs (27) in the brush arms (26) with the
straight end of the spring through the hole in the brush that is to be installed toward the pulley end of the generator. Slide
each arm and spring assembly over the pins, and hook the bent end of each spring over the stops. Install the
commutator-end bearing (20) in the commutator-end frame and fasten the cover plate gasket (19) and end cover plate
(18) with the cover plate screws (16) and lockwashers (17).
186
Insert the armature and pulley assembly into the drive end of the field frame (6). Put the commutator-end frame assembly
on the commutator-end. Line up the through-bolt holes. Install the brushes (22). Check the brush spring tension (d (5)
above). Be sure that the brushes are correctly seated and follow the contour of the commutator. Install and tighten the
through-bolts (39) with their lockwashers (40). Fasten the brush leads with the screws (24) and lockwashers (23). Install
the band cover (14).
f. Testing. Mount the generator on a test stand or on the unit if no test stand is available. Connect the field terminal
(fig. 32) to the generator frame with a jumper lead. Connect an ammeter in series with the armature terminal, the
batteries, and the generator frame. Connect a voltmeter across the batteries. Run the generator, increasing the speed to
1, 650 rpm. The -generator output should be 10 amperes at 26 volts. If the generator fails the test, check further
according to d above.
g. Installation. Refer to paragraph 92d.
197. Voltage Regulator
a. Description. The voltage regulator consists of a voltage regulator, current regulator and cutout relay, The voltage
regulator limits the voltage of the electrical system, protecting the batteries, distributor points and other accessories from
excessively high voltage. The current regulator prevents the generator from exceeding its maximum output. The cutout
relay closes the circuit between the generator and batteries when the generator is operating at sufficient speed to charge
the batteries. When the generator slows down or stops, the cutout relay opens the battery to-generator circuit to prevent
discharge of the batteries through the generator. All three of these units are adjustable.
b. Removal. Refer to paragraph 91a.
c. Disassembly (fig. 81).
(1) Never disassemble the regulator unless some part requires replacement. This disturbs the electrical and
mechanical settings and makes it necessary to completely reset the unit.
(2) Remove the cover screws (2) and washers (21), and lift off the cover (1). Remove the relay armature (6) by
unsoldering the lead and removing the screws (9) and lockwashers (8). Remove the current regulator
contact support (4, end unit) by unsoldering the lead and removing the screws (17), lockwasher (19), two
insulating washers (3), two insulators (22), upper contact support, and the other insulating washer (3).
187
Figure 81. Exploded view of regulator.

188
Remove the voltage regulator upper contact support (4, middle unit) by removing the screws (17), removing
the screws (17), lockwashers (19), insulating washer (3), two insulators (22), upper contact support, and the
other insulating washer (3). The connector (20) comes off with the upper contact support. To remove either
the current regulator or voltage regulator armature, take off the spring (10). Drill out the two rivets that
mount the armature spring hinge to the regulator frame. Support the frame to avoid bending it, center
punch the rivet head, and use a 3/32-inch drill. Remove an armature only if it is damaged, bent, or if the
contact is burned, or worn away.
d. Cleaning and Inspection. Inspect all the parts. Clean dirty, burned, or oxidized contact points. If contacts are
badly pitted they should be replaced. Use a riffer or spoon file to clean out any pits that may have formed on the flat
contact. The insulators, screws, washers, and leads must be in good condition.. If the coil windings, stationary relay
contact point, or insulators, are burned or otherwise defective, replace the complete regulator. The regulator is of riveted
construction, and only the parts shown detached in figure 81 are serviceable items.
e. Reassembly (fig. 81). If the current regulator or voltage regulator armature has been removed, install a
replacement armature with the screws, lockwashers, and nuts, furnished with the replacement armature. Assemble the
screws down so they do not ground against the cover. Install the voltage regulator contact support (4, middle unit). An
insulating washer (3) goes next to the regulator frame, then the contact support, two small insulators (22), the connector
(20), insulating washer (3), lockwasher (19), and screws (17). Note that this connects the connector to the contact
support. Install the current regulator contact support (4, end unit). An insulating washer (3) goes next to the regulator
frame, then the contact support, two small insulators (22), insulating washer (3), connector (20), insulating washer (3),
lockwasher (19), and screws (17). This fastens the connector (20). The connector is insulated from the current regulator
contact support. Resolder the lead to the upper contact support. Install the relay armature (6) with the screws (9) and
lockwashers (8). Resolder the lead to the relay armature. Install the two springs (10).
f. Test and Adjustment.
(1) Cutout Relay. Connect the regulator to the batteries and generator. Connect a voltmeter from the
GENERATOR terminal to GROUND and insert an ammeter in series with the BATTERY terminal as shown
in figure 82. Increase the generator speed until the cutout relay contacts close. The contacts should close
189
Figure 82. Checking the cutout relay setting.
Figure 85. Adjusting cutout relay air gap.
190
Figure 84. Adjusting cutout relay point opening.

at 25.5 volts. If the contacts do not close at the specified voltage, disconnect the regulator. Measure the air
gap between the armature and the center of the core with the contacts closed (fig. 88). The air gap should
be 0.017 inch. Loosen the adjusting screws at the back of the relay and raise or lower the armature as
191
Figure 85. Adjusting cutout relay closing voltage.

required. Tighten the screws after adjustment. Measure the contact point opening with the contacts open
(fig. 84). The contact point opening should be 0.32 inch. Bend the upper armature stop with an offset
screwdriver to adjust the contact point opening as required. Connect the regulator (fig. 82) and check the
192
closing voltage. If the contacts still do not close at 25.5 volts turn the adjusting screw (fig. 85). Raising the
screw raises the closing voltage.
(2) Voltage regulator. Disconnect the lead from the BATTERY terminal and connect a 7-ohm resistor between
the BATTERY terminal and the regulator base (fig. 86). Connect a voltmeter across the 7-ohm resistor.
Operate the generator at medium speed, and with the regulator at operating temperature, note the voltage
setting. The voltage regulator contacts should open at 28.5 volts. The regulator cover must be, on for this
test. If the contacts do not open at the specified voltage, disconnect the regulator. Measure the air gap with
the points just touching between the center of the winding core and the armature (fig. 87). Push the
armature all the way down by hand, release until the points come together and then measure the air gap.
The air gap should be 0.075 inch. Adjust the air gap by loosening the contact mounting screws, and raising
or lowering the upper contact support as required. Tighten the screws after adjustment. Turn the adjusting
screw (fig. 88) in to increase the voltage setting or out to decrease the setting. After each change of voltage
Figure 86. Checking voltage regulator setting.
193
setting put the cover on the regulator and connect the regulator as in figure 86. Reduce the generator speed
until the contact points close, then bring up the speed until the contacts open at the voltage setting.
(3) Current regulator. Connect the regulator to the batteries and generator. Bridge the voltage regulator
contacts (fig. 89), and insert an ammeter in the BATTERY line. Operate the generator at medium speed and
note the current regulator setting. The contacts should open at 10 amperes. If the contacts do not open at
the specified current, disconnect the regulator. Measure the air gap between the armature and the center of
the core with the contacts closed. Refer to the center unit in figure 87, and adjust the contacts the same as
Figure 87. Adjusting voltage regulator air gap.

for the voltage regulator discussed in (2) above. The air gap should be 0.075-inch. Turn the adjusting
screw of the center unit (fig. 88) in to increase the current setting, and out to decrease the current setting.
After each change of current setting put the cover on the regulator and connect the regulator as in figure 89.
194
Reduce the generator speed until the contact points close, then bring up the speed until the contacts open at
the current setting.
Figure 88. Adjusting voltage regulator setting.
195
Figure 89. Checking current regulator setting.

g. Installation. Refer to paragraph 91b.
Section VIII. STARTING MOTOR AND MAGNETIC SWITCH
198. Starting Motor
a. Description. The 24-volt starting motor is equipped with a Bendix-type drive which automatically meshes with the
flywheel ring gear for starting and unmeshes after starting. The Bendix-type drive is housed in the drive housing. The
armature shaft rotates in three bronze bushings in the commutator-end frame, center bearing and drive housing. The four
brushes are held in brush holders which are an integral part of the commutator-end frame. Torsion springs provide the
proper brush pressure in the commutator. Field poles support the four-coil field coil assembly and strengthen and improve
distribution of the magnetic field.
c. Disassembly (fig. 90). Detach the commutator-end frame (36) by removing the cover band (29), disconnecting the
field coil leads from the brush holders, and removing the through-bolts (39) and lockwashers (38). Tap the commutator-end
196
frame lightly with a soft hammer to loosen it. Remove the commutator-end spacer washer (1) from the
armature shaft. Do not remove the dowel pin (35). Detach the field frame (6). Detach the drive housing
(28) by removing the center bearing screws (10) and lockwashers (11). Place the armature (2) in soft vise
jaws, bend down the tong of locking clip (19) and unscrew the Bendix-drive head spring screw (20). Slip the
Bendix-drive off the armature shaft. Remove the woodruff key (3) and slip off the drive head assembly (18),
the center bearing (12), and the spacer washer (24). Disassemble the Bendix-drive further, if required, by
bending down the tong of the locking clip (19) and removing the shaft spring screw (21). Separate the drive
spring (23) and the driving shaft assembly (22). Remove the roundhead screws (30) and lockwashers (31),
and the brushes (32). Detach the brush springs (33) by catching the straight section with pliers and lifting
them off. Remove the commutator-end plug (37), and press out the commutator-end bushing (34) in an
arbor press (par. 179). Do not disassemble the field frame because the field coil assembly (4) and pole
shoes (5) are varnished and baked in place. The field frame assembly includes the pole shoe screws (7),
insulation strip (8), terminal stud (9), terminal stud bushing (13), insulating washer (14), hex nut (15),
lockwasher (16), and locknut (17). Remove the pipe plug (25) and oil wick (26). Press out the drive-end
bushing (27) in an arbor press (par.179).
d. Inspection and Cleaning. Inspection and cleaning of the starting motor is similar to that given for the generator.
Procedures in the following paragraphs are referenced where applicable.
(1) General. Refer to paragraph 196d(1).
(2) Armature. Refer to paragraph 196d(2).
(a) Ground. Refer to paragraph 196d(2) (a).

(b) Open. Refer to paragraph 196d(2) (b).
(c) Short. Refer to paragraph 196d(2) (c).
(3) Fields. Do not attempt to clean the field coils because they are protected with a corrosion proof varnish.
Check the field coils for opens and grounds with a test light. Replace the field frame assembly if the coils
are defective.
(4) Brushes. Replace the brushes as instructed in paragraph 94c.
(5) Brush springs. The brush springs must have sufficient tension to provide the proper pressure between the
197
Figure 90. Exploded view of starting motor.
198
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Commutator-end spacer washer

Armature
Woodruff key
Field coil assembly
Pole shoe
Field frame
Pole shoe screw
Insulation strip
Terminal stud
Center bearing screw
Center bearing lockwasher
Center bearing
Terminal stud bushing
Insulating washer
Nut, hex, 3/8 -16
Terminal stud lockwasher
Terminal stud locknut
Drive head assembly
Locking clip
Head spring screw
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
Shaft spring screw

Driving shaft assembly
Drive spring
Spacer washer
Pipe plug
Oil wick
Drive-end bushing
Drive housing
Cover band
Screw, rd hd, No. 8-32 x 5/16 (4 req)
Brush lead lockwasher
Brush
Brush spring
Commutator-end bushing
Dowel pin
Commutator-end frame
Commutator-end plug
Through-bolt lockwasher
Through-bolt
Figure 90. -- Continued.
brushes and commutator after the unit is reassembled. Check by placing the armature and the commutatorend frame together in their normal operating position. Place the. brushes in their holders with the springs in
place. Check with a spring scale the amount of pull needed to raise the brush arms from the brushes.
Replace the springs if the tension is not from 36 to 40 ounces.
(6) Bearings. Replace the bearings if they are worn. Wear will not be even, but on the side which sustains the
greatest thrust during starting. Where bearing is lubricated by an oil wick, drill an oil hole for the wick.
Remove all cuttings and install a new wick.
(7) Brush holders. Replace the brush holders if they are bent, warped, cracked, or burned.
e. Reassembly (fig. 90). Slip the brush springs (33) on the brush arm hinge pins. The long tong of the spring goes
back of the arm. Catch the short hooked end of the spring and hook it over the stop pin. Attach the brushes (32) with the
roundhead screws (30) and lockwashers (31) to the brush holders. At the same time, attach the two brush grounding
leads to the grounded brush holders. Attach the other ends of the leads to the commutator-end frame (36). Place the
armature (2) in soft vise jaws. Install the spacer washer (24) and the center bearing (12). Insert the woodruff key (3) in
199
the armature shaft and slide on the drive head assembly (18) over the key. Install the drive spring (23) over the drive
head. Place the driving shaft assembly (22) in its position inside the drive spring, and mated with the drive head. Use new
locking clips (19), and install the head spring screw (20) in the drive head and the shaft spring screw (21) in the driving
shaft assembly. Insert the armature into the drive housing (28) until the shaft mates with the drive-end bushing (27).
Install the oil wick (26) and pipe plug (25). Fasten the center bearing to the drive housing with the screws (10) and
lockwashers (11). Place the commutator-end spacer washer (1) on the shaft next to the commutator. Place the field frame
followed by the commutator-end frame (36) into position. Lift the brushes as the commutator is brought into position.
Fasten the assembly with the through-bolts (39) and lockwashers (38). Install the commutator-end plug (37). Fasten the
field coil leads to the brush holders. Install the cover band (29).
f. Testing.
(1) No-load test. Connect the starting motor in series with a freshly charged 24-volt battery and an ammeter
with a 0-50 ampere range. At no-load the starting motor should draw 30 amperes and run at 6,000 rpm.
Read the motor speed with a tachometer. If the speed or current drain is not as specified, check the
brushes, commutator, field coils, and bearings as in d above.
(2) Torque test. Torque testing equipment is required for conducting a stall torque test on the starting motor.
With the motor connected in series with a freshly charged 24-volt battery, an ammeter with a 0-300 ampere
range, and a voltmeter connected across the motor terminals, run the stall torque test. When the motor
stalls, the current should be 200 amperes, the voltage 6.6 volts, with a torque of 21 ft-lbs. If the motor fails
this test, check the brushes, commutator, field coils, and bearings as in d above.

199. Magnetic Switch
a. Description. The 24-volt magnetic switch is used with the starting switch in the starting circuit to close the circuit
between the batteries and starting motor. It consists essentially of a coil, plunger, contact disk, a terminal cap assembly
and return spring. When the coil is engaged through the starting switch, the plunger moves the contact disk to make
200
electrical contact and complete the batteries-to-starting motor circuit. The contacts and terminals on the magnetic switch
are capable of handling the large current which flows to the starting motor during starting. The return spring pushes the
plunger and contact disk up to the initial position when the coil is de-energized.

c. Disassembly (fig. 91). Take out the three cover screws (12) with the rubber washers (13), and remove the cover
(11) and the cover gasket (10). Lift out the slotted spring retainer washer (9), contact spring (8), spring retainer washer
(7), and contact disk (6). Lift out the plunger (5). Disconnect the coil leads from the terminal cap assembly (3). Lift off the
terminal cap assembly and the terminal cap gasket (2). Remove the return spring (4) from the case and coil assembly (1).
Unscrew the two terminal studs (16), and remove the lockwashers (15) and plain washers (14). Unscrew the two terminal
nuts (19), and remove the lockwashers (18) and plain washers (17).
d. Inspection and Cleaning. Wipe the switch parts with a clean cloth slightly moistened with carbon tetrachloride.
After cleaning, blow the case and coil assembly and the terminal cap assembly dry with compressed air. Do not soak the
gaskets. Connect a variable resistance, a 24-volt battery, and an ammeter in series with the two coil leads. Adjust the
voltage to 24-volts and read the ammeter. Replace the case and coil assembly if the current is not between 3.1 and 3.5
amperes. Inspect the switch parts for cracks, or corroded surfaces. Flex the springs to detect hidden cracks. Replace
the gaskets and washers if they are cracked, or oil-soaked. Clean a corroded plunger or core surface with fine sandpaper.
e. Reassembly (fig. 91). Place the lockwashers (15) and plain washers (14) on the terminal studs (16), and screw
the studs into the terminal cap assembly (3). Attach the plain washers (17), lockwashers (18), and terminal nuts (19).
Place the return spring (4) over the spindle inside the case and coil assembly (1). Place the plunger (5) over the return
spring. Place the terminal cap gasket (2) on the case and coil -assembly and set the terminal cap assembly on the gasket.
Connect the coil leads. Set the contact disk (6) over the plunger; and install the spring retainer washer (7), contact spring
(8), and slotted spring retainer washer (9). Be sure the washers are cupped around the spring. Place the cover gasket
(10) over the terminal cap assembly. Press the cover (11) over the gasket, and while holding it down, install the rubber
washers (13) and the cover screws (12).
201
Figure 91. Exploded view of magnetic witch.
202
f. Testing. Test the solenoid coil as in d above. Connect a voltmeter across the coil terminals. Insert all the
resistance into the circuit and then decrease resistance slowly until the switch closes. Note the closing voltage. Increase
the resistance and not the opening voltage. The switch should close at not more than 10 volts and open at from 0.5 to 3
volts. Refer to d above if the switch does not meet specifications.
Section IX. DISTRIBUTOR AND COIL
200. Description
a. Distributor. The distributor provides current to the primary winding of the ignition coil at the proper time, and also
distributes the high tension voltage to the proper spark plug. The breaker contacts of the distributor are connected in the
coil primary circuit so that the rotation of the cam opens the coil circuit at the proper instant to generate a spark. The
distributor cap and rotor are arranged so that the high tension voltage is connected to the correct spark plug for firing each
cylinder. The distributor has centrifugal governor control of the timing, and the cam is connected to the drive shaft through
the governor. This is arranged so that as the speed is increased, the relationship of the cam to the breaker arm is
changed by the centrifugal governor action. The rate or amount of spark advance is controlled by the weight springs and
the centrifugal governor.
b. Ignition Coil. The ignition transforms the low voltage supplied by the batteries into the high voltage needed to jump
the spark plug gap. The coil has two windings, one the primary winding which consists of a comparatively few turns of
heavy wire, and the secondary winding which consists of many turns of very fine wire. The secondary winding is wound on
a soft iron core, while the primary winding is wound around the outside of the secondary winding. A soft iron shell
encloses the outside of both windings and serves to complete the magnetic circuit. Carefully selected and tested
insulation is placed between the winding layers, the primary and secondary windings, and between the outside of the
primary winding and the soft iron shell. Whenever current is built up and broken in the primary winding, a voltage is
induced in the secondary winding. The design of the coil is such that the induced voltage will be high enough to produce a
spark at the spark plug.
203
Figure 92. Exploded view of distributor and coil.

204
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
Coupling rivet
Drive coupling
Lower drive shaft thrust washer
Base assembly
Felt wick
Pipe plug
Seal washer
Shaft seal
Upper drive shaft thrust washer
Ignition coil
Lead clamp
Governor weight
Fillister head screw, No. 10-32 x 7/16 (2 req)
Governor spring
Antirattle spring
Cam and stop plate
Capacitor mounting screw
Capacitor
Breaker arm spring clip
Plain washer, No. 6
Lockwasher, No. 6
Clamp screw
Breaker contact set
Cap and cover screw
Cap assembly
Cap sealing washer
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
Fillister head screw, No. 10-32 x 11/16

Cap cover plug
O-ring
Distributor cap cover
O-ring
Rotor
Primary lead assembly
Fillister head screw, No. 8-32 x 3/16
Breaker plate screw
Breaker plate holder
Breaker plate
Cam sleeve felt wick
Cam retaining snap ring
Cam spacer
Drive shaft
Receptacle screw
Nut, hex, No. 10-32
Receptacle
Receptacle seal
Lockwasher, No. 6
Cap contact spring
Connector
Drain plug
Drain plug washer
Drive shaft bearing

201. Distributor Disassembly
(fig. 92)
a. Remove the distributor (par. 97a).

b. Take out the six fillister head screws (27) and lift the distributor cap cover (30). Remove the O-ring (31) from the
top of the base assembly (4).
c. Make a sketch of the relationship between the rotor (32) and the offset drive torque. Pull the rotor from the top of
the cam and stop plate.
d. Disconnect the primary lead assembly (33) and the lead from the connector (48), by removing the nuts (43) and
lockwashers (46). Remove the two fillister head screws (13), and lift out the ignition coil (10). Lift out the two lead clamps
(11).
e. Take out the two breaker plate screws (35) and holders (36). Lift the breaker plate (37) out of the base.
f. Remove the cam sleeve felt wick (38) and the cam retaining snap ring (39) from the cam sleeve. Lift out the cam
and stop plate (16) and the cam spacer (40).
205
g. Slip the governor springs (14) off the lugs on the weight carrying plate. Slide the governor weights (12) off the
pivots and remove the spring from the weight pins.
h. Take out the four receptacle screws (42), and remove the receptacle (44). Remove the receptacle seal (45) and
O-ring (29), and pull the connector (48) from the base.
202. Distributor Cleaning, Inspection, and Repair
(fig. 92)
a. Distributor Cap.
(1) Take out the three cap and cover screws (24) and detach the distributor cap cover from the cap assembly
(25). Remove the cap sealing washers (26) from the cap towers. Remove the cap contact spring (47) from
the cap connector pin.
(2) Discard the cap if it is cracked, has corroded terminals, or if carbon runners have formed either on the inside
or outside surfaces. Inspect the contacts on the inside of the cap. After normal use these contacts become
slightly burned on the inside tip. If burning is excessive or uneven, replace the cap. If burning is found on
the horizontal face of the contacts, it indicates the rotor is too short and must be replaced. Clean the
contacts with carbon tetrachloride, but do not file. Do not clean the carbon contact with solvent. Wipe
thoroughly and inspect for cracks and an oil soaked condition. Replace the cap if the carbon contact is not
in good condition.
(3) Replace the rubber sealing washers if they are rough, or do not fit properly.
(4) Thoroughly clean the distributor cap cover in a cleaning solvent, and inspect for cracks, or other damage.
Place the cover on the base, and inspect to make sure it touches the base on all sides. Replace the cover if
it is distorted.
(5) Place the sealing washers on the cap towers and install the cap in the distributor cap cover. Install the three
cap and cover screws (24), and tighten them evenly.
b. Rotor. Discard the rotor if it is cracked, has a loose contact strip, or if burning is found on top of the strip. Inspect
the contact end. If burning is excessive, replace the rotor. If burning is only slight, clean with carbon tetrachloride. Do not
file. Inspect the contact spring, and replace the rotor if the contact does not spring instantly back when the contact button
206
is pressed against the rotor. Apply the pressure to the contact button to avoid setting the spring. Clean the button so that
it makes a good contact on the carbon contact in the center of the cap.
c. Ignition Coil. Never dip-clean, or steam-clean the ignition coil since this causes injury to the windings and
insulation, and produces early failure. Clean by wiping with a clean, dry cloth. Inspect the terminals for stripped, or
crossed threads. Check coil head for cracks, chipped places, or burned paths that would allow high tension leakage to
ground. Note the condition of the coil case, making sure that it is not punctured, or that the seams have not opened up.
Test the coil on a coil tester. Replace the coil if it is damaged mechanically, or electrically in any way.
d. Breaker Plate.
(1) Remove the clamp screw (22), plain washers (20) lockwashers (21), and spring clip (19). Take off the
primary lead assembly (33). Remove the fillister head screw (34), and lift the contact from the plate. Take
out the capacitor mounting screw (17), and lift out the capacitor (18).
(2) Clean all parts with a cloth dampened in a cleaning solvent.
(3) Rub contacts with linen tape that has been dampened in carbon tetrachloride. Dry with clean tape to
remove any residue.
(4) Test capacitor for capacity and grounds on a tester. Replace the capacitor if grounded, leaky, or if the
capacity is not between 0.18 to 0.21 microfarads. Inspect the lead and replace condenser if the lead or
terminal is chafed, partially broken, or damaged.
(5) Inspect the plate for stripped threads, and damaged or worn pivot pin. Replace the plate if any of these
conditions are found. Check the primary terminal for grounds with a test light and test probes. Replace the
plate if the primary terminal is grounded.
(6) Inspect the breaker contact set (23). If the contacts are a grayish color and are not pitted or burned, they
need not be replaced. Replace the breaker contact set if the contacts are rough, burned, or pitted.
(7) Install the contacts on the plate and turn the distributor lever on the pivot. It must turn easily without binding
or looseness. Remove the lever and inspect the pivot. Replace the plate if wear is evident on the pivot, or if
the pivot is loose or not perpendicular to the plate. If the pivot is in good condition, install a new breaker
207
contact set to get the correct pivot fit.

(8) Assemble the contacts, capacitor, and primary lead assembly on the plate. Install the distributor lever spring
and the spring clip on the inside of the terminal.
(9) Place one drop of light oil on the distributor lever pivot pin. Operate the lever once or twice and remove the
excess oil.
e. Connector.
(1) Clean the primary connector (48) with a cloth dampened in a cleaning solvent.
(2) Inspect for damaged or corroded connector pin, lead, and terminal. Check for grounds with a test light and
test probes, and replace the connector if grounded.
(3) Inspect seals and seal seats. Replace them if they are rough or damaged.
f. Cam and Stop Plate. Clean the cam and stop plate in a cleaning solvent and inspect the cam lobes and weight
slots for wear. Replace the cam if the lobes are grooved, or if the sides of the weight slots are rough.
g. Governor. Clean the weights (12), springs (14), antirattle spring (15), and spacer (40) in cleaning solvent, and dry
thoroughly. Replace the weights if the pivot holes are, worn, or if they are a loose fit on the pivots. Replace -the springs if
they are bent or distorted.
h. Base Assembly and Drive Shaft.
(1) Cleaning. Wipe the drive shaft (41) and inside of the base assembly (4) as clean as possible with cloth
dampened with cleaning solvent. Do not soak. Dry immediately with clean, dry compressed air.
(2) Inspection.
(a) Inspect the base assembly for cracks or other damage. Make sure the groove for the cap O-ring is
smooth and clean. Remove the pipe plug (6) and take out the felt wick (5). Inspect the wick for
damage and soak in medium engine oil. Fill the wick cavity with light high-temperature grease, and
insert the wick. Wipe off the excess grease. Coat plug with Permatex No. 2, or equivalent, and install
the plug.
(b) Clamp a dial indicator (par. 179) on the base assembly with the plunger resting against the side of
208
the shaft. With a spring scale apply a 5 pound pull in line with the plunger. Install new drive shaft
bearings (51) if the side play is more than 0.005 inch.
(c) Clamp a dial indicator on the base with its plunger against the end of the shaft. Move the shaft to its
two extreme positions and read the total end play. End play can also be measured with a flat feeler
gage inserted between the drive coupling (2) and lower drive shaft thrust washer (3). If the end play is
less than 0.003 inch, tap the lower end of the shaft to loosen. If the end play is more than 0.010 inch,
remove the coupling and install additional thrust washers between the base assembly and coupling.
(3) Repair.
(a) Remove the coupling rivet (1) and take the drive Coupling (2) off the shaft. Take off the lower drive
shaft thrust washer (3), and remove the burr from the rivet hole in the shaft. Pull the shaft out of the
base assembly and remove the upper drive shaft thrust washer (8), shaft seal (8), and seal washer
(7). Measure the inside diameter of the bearing; replace the bearings if this diameter is greater than
0.505 inch. Drive out the old bearings with an arbor press (par.179) or bolt that rests on the bearing
without gouging the bearing bore.
(b) Install the new bearings of correct size to give proper bearing diameter (0.4995 0.500), and press the
bearings into place with an arbor press. Install the lower bearing flush with the bottom of the base;
install the upper bearing flush with the face of the bearing bore. Continue the oil hole in the base
through the :bearing, using a drill of the same diameter. Remove all burrs from the inside of the
bearing. Do not mar the bearing.
(c) Soak the bearings in engine oil and drain off the excess oil. Do not get oil into the upper part of the
base.
(d) Install the seal washer (7) and shaft seal (8) in the top of the bearing bore.
(e) Grease the upper drive shaft thrust washer (9) and install it on the shaft. Place the shaft in the
bearings and install the lower drive shaft thrust washer (3) and collar. Drill the rivet hole in the shaft to
209
correspond with the hole in the collar. Install the coupling rivet (1) and swage it so both ends are
riveted over and the rivet spreads to fill the rivet hole.
(f) Check the end and side play of the shaft.
203. Distributor Reassembly (fig. 92)
a. Place a small amount of grease on the weight pivot pins, weight pivot holes, cam yoke slats, and weight spring
lugs and pins. Place the governor weights (12) in position and install the governor springs (14). Make sure the springs are
properly seated on the weight pins and carrying plate brackets.
b. Apply a film of medium engine oil to the upper end of the drive shaft. Place the cam and stop plate (16) in position
over the shaft and weights. Place the rotor (32) on the cam and check the relation between the rotor and the cam and
stop plate. If not correct, lift the cam and turn 180.Remove the rotor. Install the snap ring (39) and felt wick (38). Add 5
to 10 drops of medium engine oil to the wick.
c. Place the breaker plate (37), with breaker contact set (23), in the base and turn it so the locating lug fits into the
slot. Install the breaker plate screws (35) and holders (36).
d. Place the connector (48), with receptacle (44), O-ring (29), and receptacle seal (45) into position on the base
assembly. Make the connector assembly fit tightly. Install the receptacle screws (42).
e. Place the ignition coil (10) in position in the base assembly and arrange the leads so they will reach the coil
terminals without kinks or cramping. Install the coil fillister head screws (13) and lead clamps (11).
f. Connect the primary lead assembly (33) to the coil terminal under the cover plug. Connect the connector lead to
the second coil terminal.
g. Adjust the contact gap as instructed in paragraph 95.
204. Distributor Final Assembly (fig. 92)
a. Place the rotor (32) on the cam and press down firmly. Turn the shaft and arrange the leads so as to not interfere
with the rotor.
b. Install the O-ring (31) in the groove in the base assembly. Install the cap contact spring (47) on the cap connector
pin. Place the distributor cap cover (30) and cap assembly (25) on the base taking care that the spring enters the coil high
210
tension terminal, and that the O-ring is in its proper place. Make sure the leads are not closed to the secondary terminal,
or do not extend beyond the coil so that the leads are pinched between the cover and the base assembly.
c. Coat all base plugs and pipe connectors with Permatex No. 2 and install them.
d. Connect an air hose to one of the ventilating air holes in the base and plug the other holes. Apply 6 pounds of air
pressure and submerge the unit in water. If bubbles appear at any point except around the drive shaft, correct the cause
of the leak.
e. Time the distributor according to paragraph 98.
f. Install the distributor as instructed in paragraph 97b.
Section X. GOVERNOR
205. Description
A small heavy-duty governor mounted on the crankcase top cover controls the engine speed through the gasoline
carburetor throttle. Incorrect governor adjustments, carburetor settings, or binding governor linkage may cause a surging
of engine speed known as "hunting." Should this condition exist, check the governor levers and rods for binding. Refer to
paragraph 110. The slightest drag on the linkage will cause the governor to over travel as it opens and closes the
carburetor butterfly valves to maintain a constant speed. Lubricate the control rods frequently to prevent binding.
206. Governor Disassembly
(fig. 93)
a. Remove the governor (par. 110a).

b. Unhook the governor spring (9). Unscrew the top hex nut (34) and remove the level (36). Remove the four oval
fillister head screws (13) and lockwashers (12) and remove the governor mechanism with the gasket (10). Remove the
four cap screws (28) with lockwashers (27) and lift off the speed change bracket (33) with its attached parts. The
nameplate (24) and escutcheon pins (25) need not be removed. Pull the gear (15) and remove the thrust washer (14).
Slide the base and bushing assembly (11) off the shaft. Pull the lower thrust bearing (2) and remove the spacing washer
(8). Pull the upper thrust bearing (2). Remove the hair pin clips (5), weight pins (6), and weight assemblies (7). Lift the
thrust sleeve (3) from the spider and shaft assembly (4). Drive out the taper pin (18) from the speed change lever (31)
211
Figure 93. Exploded view of governor.
212
and shaft (32). Slide off the lever. Drive out the taper pin (18) from the bracket (35) and remove the bracket and shaft.
Drive out the taper pin (18) from the throttle lever (16) and pull off the lever. Reach inside the governor body (23) and
unscrew the yoke (37). Remove the plug (26) and oil seal (19). Remove the two snap rings (20) and withdraw the ball
bearings (21). Slide the rocker shaft (22) from the governor body. Do not tamper with the screws (30) and hex nuts (29).
It is not necessary to remove the button (17).
207. Governor Cleaning and Inspection
(fig. 93)
Inspect the oilite bearing (1) in the top of the governor body. If any wear is apparent, replace the bearing. Soak the
new bearing in engine oil before installation. Inspect the pin holes in the spider and shaft assembly (4) and weight
assemblies (7). If the holes do not look round, replace both these assemblies. Replace the weight pins (6) if they show
any wear. Replace the thrust bearings (2) if they show any wear.
Inspect the gear (15) for cracks and broken or
chipped teeth. Replace a damaged gear. Check the governor spring (9) for cracks. Replace a cracked spring. If the oil
seal (19) shows any sign of having leaked, replace it. Inspect the ball bearings (21). If they are loose or missing any steel
balls, replace a defective bearing. Replace the gasket (10) and taper pins (18).
208. Governor Reassembly

(fig. 93)
a. Insert the rocker shaft (22) into the governor body (23). Press the two ball bearings (21) over the ends of the shaft
and seat them in the governor body. Install the two snap rings (20). Install the plug (26) in the recess in the governor body
and slide the oil seal (19) over the shaft extension. Screw the yoke (37) into the threaded hole in the rocker shaft, inside
the governor body. Slide the throttle lever (16) over the shaft extension and drive in the taper pin (18). Slide the bracket
(35) over the shaft (32) and drive in the taper pin (18). Insert the shaft into the speed change bracket (33). Slide the
speed change lever (31) over the shaft and drive in the taper pin (18). Place the thrust sleeve (3) over the spider and shaft
assembly (4). Install the weight assemblies (7), weight pins (6), and hair pin clips (5). Install the upper thrust bearing (2)
over the shaft and thrust sleeve. Install the spacing washer (8) and lower thrust bearing (2) on the shaft below the weight
assembly brackets. Slide the base and bushing assembly (11) on the shaft. Install the thrust washer (14) and
213
Figure 94. Exploded view of air receiver.

214
press on the gear (15). Place the speed change bracket on the governor body and install the four cap screws (28) and
lockwashers (27). Place the gasket (10) on the base and bushing assembly flange and insert the governor mechanism
into the governor body. Install the four screws (13) and lockwashers (12). Insert the lever (36) through the hole in the
auxiliary adjusting screw bracket and install the hex nut (34). Hook the governor spring (9) through the lever and throttle
lever.
b. Install the governor (par. 110b).

c. Adjust the governor (par. 110c).
Section XI. AIR RECEIVER
209. Air Receiver Removal
a. Remove hose reel air hoses (par. 112a.), hose reel and service valves (par. 113a), the receiver service valves and
piping (par. 114a), drain cocks and piping (par. 115a), and aftercooler to receiver connection (par. 116a).
b. Remove the cap screws (4, fig. 94), special washers (3) and special nuts (2) to release the straps (1) which
encircle the air receiver (5) and fuel tank.
c. Remove eight hex nuts (11), four lockwashers (10), eight plain washers (9) and two rods (8). Lift off the air
receiver (5). Remove the pipe plug (6) as desired.
d. Remove four hex head bolts (14), hex nuts (12) and lockwasher (13) to detach the braces (15) from the supports
(7) and rear engine support (4, fig. 102). Remove the support (7, fig. 94).
210. Air Receiver Cleaning and Inspection
(fig. 94)
a. Wipe off all parts with a cloth to remove accumulation of dust, dirt or lubricants. Use a solvent if necessary.
b. Inspect the air receiver (5) for signs of corrosion, particularly around the fittings welded into the air receiver.
c. Examine the supports (7), braces (15) and straps (1) for mechanical damage and corrosion. Replace damaged
nuts, washers and pipe plugs.
d. Inspect the packing (16) for deterioration and replace if defective. Cement new packing to the supports (7) with
Pliobond adhesive or its equivalent.
215
211. Air Receiver Repair
a. It is possible to repair by welding minor leaks in the air receiver which are caused by corrosion. Do not attempt to
repair serious defects; replace the air receiver in such cases.
b. Straighten any bends or twists in the supports, braces or straps. Replace badly damaged parts.
212. Air Receiver Installation
a. Place the supports (7, fig. 94) on the fuel tank. Fasten the braces (15) to the supports (7) and the rear engine
support (4, fig. 102) with four hex nuts (12, fig. 94), lockwashers (13) and hex head bolts (14).
b. Place the air receiver (5) on the supports (7) and install with two rods (8), eight plain washers (9), four lockwashers
(10) and eight hex nuts (11).
c. Guide the straps (1) around the fuel tank and air receiver (5) and secure with two special nuts (2), special washers
(3) and special cap screws (4). Be sure the air receiver seats properly on the supports.
d. Screw in the pipe plug (6) tightly.
e. Install the aftercooler to receiver connection (par. 116c) drain cocks and piping (par. 115c), receiver service valves
and piping (par. 114e), hose reel and service valves (par. 113e), and hose reel air hose (par. 112c).
Section XII. ENGINE-COMPRESSOR
213. Description
a. The engine-compressor is a combination four-piston engine and four-piston compressor which is housed in a V-8
type crankcase and uses a single crankshaft mounted in five main bearings. The engine and compressor sections form
separate banks on either side of the crankcase.
b. The engine-compressor is mounted on a front and rear engine support which are attached to the H-type frame
supporting the entire air compressor. A two-section crankcase coveris mounted on the center of the crankcase. A lifting
bail and the tachometer drive are installed in the cover.
c. Two oil pans are employed on the underside of the crankcase. The lower oil pan holds the oil filters. The upper
oil pan attaches directly to the crankcase; oil seals are employed where the crankshaft extends from the crankcase and
upper oil pan.
d. oil pump is mounted on the front bearing cap. Oil is drawn from the sump through an oil intake screen, and is
216
discharged through two tube assemblies. One tube leads to the oil filters; the other tube leads to the crankcase when oil is
delivered to the front camshaft bearing support and hollow camshaft. The main bearings are lubricated with oil through
passages to the camshaft bearings. The connecting rod bearings are connected by oil passages in the crankshaft to the
main bearings. The accessory drive is lubricated by means of oil flow through a tube assembly from the tappet chamber.
Oil is supplied intermittently to the engine cylinder head through a tube assembly from the rear camshaft bearing support.
e. The gear cover assembly encloses the front of the crank case. The accessory drive components are mounted to
the gear cover assembly.
214. Engine-Compressor Removal
a. Removal from Truck. Remove the hood top door (6, fig. 61). Remove the nuts, vibration dampeners, and washers
that fasten the engine-compressor to the mounting springs on the truck frame. Refer to paragraph 231. Insert a lifting
hook in the lifting bail (fig. 95) and lift the engine-compressor from the truck frame. Remove the housing (par. 128) before
proceeding with engine-compressor disassembly.
b.
Removal from Frame (fig. 96). Remove the radiator and fan (par. 88a). Remove the cotter pins (8) and
Figure 95. Lifting the engine-compressor.
217
Figure 96. Engine-compressor frame and mounting.
218
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Cap screw (2 req)

Nut (2 req)
Washer, plain, % (2 req)
Vibration dampener
Retainer
Rebound unit
Nut (2 req)
Pin, cotter, 1/8 x 1 1/4 (2 req)
Front engine, support
Cap screw (4 req)
Lockwasher (8 req)
Bond strap
Nut (4 req)
Special nut
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
Spacer
Spacer
Cap screw 5/8-18 x 3 (2 req)
Frame
Cap screw (2 req)
Cap screw
Lockwasher (2 req)
Bond strap
Lockwasher (2 req)
Cap screw (2 req)
Lockwasher (4 req)
Bond strap
Nut (2 req)
unscrew the nuts (7). Withdraw the cap screws (1) with the retainers (5), vibration dampers (4) and washers (3). Unscrew
the special nuts (14). Withdraw the cap screws (17) with the spacers (16). Lift the engine-compressor from the frame (18)
and lower it to suitable supports placed under the rear engine support and front end of the upper oil pan. Do not rest the
equipment on the oil pan. Lift off the rebound units (6) and spacers (15).
c. Inspection of Frame (fig. 96). While the engine-compressor unit is out of the frame (18), inspect the bond straps
(12, 26, and 22) for breaks or frayed surfaces. Inspect the bond strap bolts and nuts for tightness and check the
lockwashers for breaks. Inspect the front engine support (9) for cracks. Replace any parts that are damaged in any way.
Do not re-use old cotter pins.
215. Engine-Compressor Installation
a. Installation on Frame (fig. 96). Place the rebound units (6) spacers (15) on the frame (18), and lower the enginecompressor to the frame over the spacers and rebound units. Put the spacers (16) over the cap screws (17) and insert
them through the frame and the rear support. Screw on and tighten the special nuts (14). Put the washers (3), vibration
dampers (4), and retainers (5) over the cap screws (1). Insert the cap screws through the front engine support (9) and the
upper oil pan. Screw on and tighten the nuts (7) and install the cotter pins (8).
b. Installation on Truck. To install the engine-compressor on the truck frame, lift the unit and place it on the truck
frame spring mountings. Refer to paragraph 233 for correct spring mounting assembly. Install the hood top door.
216. Crankcase Covers, Lifting Bail, and Tachometer Drive
a. Removal (fig. 97). Before taking off the crankcase covers, the following items must be removed: governor (par.
110a), distributor (par. 97a), water pump (par. 193), intake manifold (par. 120a), carburetor (par. 78a),
219
Figure 97. Exploded view of Crankcase covers, lifting bail, and tachometer drive.
220
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Lifting bail
Nut, elastic stop, 3/4-16 (2 req).
Copper washer
Bolt, hex hd, 3/8-16 x 1 1/4 (22 req)
Cap screw, 3/8-24 x 1 1/4 (3 req)
Nut, hex, 3/8-24 (2 req)
Plug nut
Gasket
Shaft
Body
Bushing
Gear
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
Roll pin
Gasket
Stud
Nut, hex, 3/8-24 (3 req)
Bolt, hex hd, 5/16-18 x 1 1/2
Copper washer
Front half cover
Side gasket
Front gasket
Nut, hex, 3/4-16 (2 req)
Leaf spring
Rear gasket
Gasket
Rear half cover
unloader pilot (par. 108a), and the slowdown assembly (par. 109a). Remove the two nuts (9) and lockwashers (8) that
hold the tachometer body (13) to the front half cover (22). Lift out the tachometer drive assembly, comprised of the plug
nut (10), gasket (11), shaft (12), body, bushings (14), gear (15), and roll pin (16). Do not disassemble the tachometer
drive assembly. Remove the gasket (17). Remove the two hex head bolts (20) and copper washers (21). Remove the 22
hex head bolts (4) and lockwashers (5) that fasten the front half cover and the rear half cover (30) to the crankcase.
Remove the three cap screws (6), lockwashers (7), and nuts (19) that hold the covers together. Remove the gasket (29).
Lift off both covers. Carefully remove the two side gaskets (23), front gasket (24) and rear gasket (28). The four studs
(18) need not be removed, if they are not bent and their threads intact. Unscrew the two hex nuts (25), and remove the
two plain washers (26), and the leaf spring (27) from the underside of the rear half cover. Lift off the lifting bail (1), with the
elastic stop nuts (2), and copper washers (3) from the rear half cover.
b. Inspection. Inspect all parts for damage. Replace cracked covers. Replace the complete tachometer drive
assembly if the tachometer drive gear shows any sign of wear. Replace all gaskets.
c. Installation. (fig. 97). Put the copper washers (3) over the threaded ends of the lifting bail (1) and under the
elastic stop nuts (2). Insert the lifting bail with the washers into the two holes in the rear half cover (80). Put the leaf
221
spring (27) over the threaded ends of the lifting bail and install the plain washers (26) and nuts (25). Position the rear half
cover and the front half cover (22) together, with the gasket (29) between them. Insert the cap screws (6) with
lockwashers (7) through the two cover flanges and install the nuts (19). Use care in alining the cover halves. Place the
gaskets (23, 24, and 28) on the crankcase. Set the covers on the gaskets and aline all the holes. Fasten the covers to the
crankcase with the hex head bolts (4) and lockwashers (5). Install the hex head bolts (20) and lockwashers (21) in the
front of the front half cover. Place the gasket (17) over the studs (18) in the top of the front half cover. Insert the complete
tachometer drive assembly over the studs and on the gasket. Put the lockwashers (8) over the studs and install the nuts
(9). Reinstall the slowdown assembly (par. 109e), unloader pilot (par. 108e), carburetor (par. 78b), intake manifold
(par. 120c), water pump (par. 195), distributor (par. 97b), and governor (par. 110b). Adjust the governor (par. 110c), the
carburetor (par. 77b) and/or unloader pilot (par. 107) if necessary.
217. Oil Pans

(1) Remove the engine-compressor (par. 214).
(2) Unscrew three pipe plugs (12) from the lower oil pan (9). Drain out all the oil (fig. 16). Remove the oil filters
(16) as instructed in paragraph 42i (1).
(3) Pull out the dipstick (1), remove the O-ring (22), and screw out the pipe extention (21). Unscrew the 30 cap
screws (11) and lockwashers (10). Carefully drop the lower oil pan (9) and disconnect the oil line to the filter
cases. Remove the pipe plug (13) and oil filter seal (17). Carefully remove the end gaskets (18) and the
side gaskets (8).
(4) Insert a lifting hook in the lifting bail (fig. 95) and tighten the hoist cables to support the engine-compressor
during the time the upper oil pan is removed. Unscrew the 20 cap screws (7) and lockwashers (6). Carefully
lower the upper oil pan (4) and remove it from the engine-compressor. Use care, in removing the two oil pan
gaskets (3). Lift out the rear oil seal (2) and the front oil seal (5). It is not necessary to remove the special
nuts (20), or the gasket (19).
b. Inspection and Cleaning. Inspect both oil pans for breaks, or cracks. Replace a damaged oil pan. Replace all
gaskets. Refer to paragraph 42i (2) for the oil filter maintenance. Inspect the front and rear oil seals. Replace
222
Figure 98. Exploded view of oil pans.
223
the seals if they are cracked, visibly worn, or otherwise damaged. Replace a bent, or twisted dipstick.
c. Installation.
(1) Place the rear oil seal (2, fig. 98) and the front oil seal (5) in the recesses in the ends of the upper oil pan
(4). Fasten the two oil pan gaskets (3) to the upper oil pan with shellac. See that all the holes in the
gaskets line up with the holes in the upper oil pan. Support the upper oil pan in position under the
crankcase and install and tighten the 20 cap screws (7) with their lockwashers (6). Screw in the pipe
extension (21). Install the O-ring (22) and insert the dipstick (1). Fasten the end gaskets (18) and the side
gaskets (8) to the oil pan (9) with shellac. See that the holes in the gaskets line up with the holes in the oil
pan. Support the oil pan in position, connect the oil line to the filter cases, and install and tighten the 30 cap
screws (11) with their lockwashers (10).
(2) Install the oil filters (16) as instructed in paragraph 42i(3). Install the pipe plugs (12 and 13) and refill with oil
(fig. 16).
(3) Install the engine-compressor (par. 215).
218. Oil Intake Screen
a. Removal.
(1) Remove the lower oil pan as instructed in paragraph 217a.
(2) Pull out the long cotter pin, permitting the intake screen to drop down out of the suction line connection
(fig. 99).
b. Cleaning and Inspection.

(1) Wash the intake screen in cleaning solvent.
(2) Clean the inside of the suction line connection with a stiff brush and cleaning solvent.
(3) Inspect the intake screen to make certain that it is not torn.
c. Installation.
(1) Insert the intake screen up into the suction line connection. Aline the holes in the screen tabs with those in
the lower edge of the connection and insert the cotter pin (fig. 99).
224
Figure 99. Removing the oil intake screen.

(2) Install the lower oil pan (par. 217c) and fill the lubricating system with oil (fig. 16).
219. Oil Pump and Oil Line

(1) Drain and remove the lower oil pan (par. 217a).
(2) Pull out the cotter pin (27) and remove the oil intake screen (28) from the suction line connection (4).
(3) Remove the two hex head bolts (1) and lockwashers (2) that fasten the suction line connection (4) to the
pump cover. Then remove the two hex head bolts (1), lockwashers (2) and plain washers (3) that attach the
connection to the mounting boss within the upper oil pan and lift out the connection. Discard the connection
gasket (6).
(4) Disconnect the connector (16) and tube assembly (17) from the pump body and crankcase oil passage.
225
Figure 100. Exploded view of oil pump and oil lines.
226
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
12
13
Bolt, hex hd, 5/16-18 x 7 (8 req)

Suction line connection
Dowel pin (2 req)
Connection gasket
Oil pump cover
Snap ring
Pump gear
Drive shaft
Bolt, hex hd, 7/16-14 x 3/4 (2 req)
Oil pump body
Oil pump body
14
16
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
Drive gear
Taper pin, No. 2 x 1 L
Connector, 5/8 x 1/2 MPT (2 req)
Tube assembly
Idler shaft
Woodruff key, No. 5
Idler gear
Connector, 5/16 x 1/8 MPT
Tube assembly
Elbow, 90
Reducing bushing, 3/8 x 1/8
Pressure relief plunger
Pressure relief spring
Cotter pin, 1/8 x 3
Intake screen
(5) Disconnect the tube assembly (22) from the elbow (23) and the connector (21). The connector screws into
a reducing bushing (24) and the elbow screws into the oil pan filter connection.
(6) Remove the two hex head bolts (11) and lockwashers (12) that attach the oil pump assembly to its mounting
boss, and carefully lower the pump down out of the upper oil pan.
b. Oil Pump Disassembly (fig. 100).

(1) Unscrew the reducing bushing (24) from the oil pump cover (7) and remove the pressure relief plunger (25)
and spring (26).
(2) Support the hub of the drive gear (14) to prevent damage to the gear or shaft (10) while driving out the taper
pin (15). Remove the gear from the shaft.
(3) Remove the four hex head bolts (1) and lockwashers (2) and separate the pump cover (7) from the pump
body (13). Lift the pump gear (9) and shaft (10) and the idler gear (20) from the pump body. The pump
gear need not be pressed from its shaft except for replacement purposes.

(1) Clean all parts thoroughly with cleaning solvent and dry with compressed air.
(2) Inspect all gears for chipped or broken teeth.. Damaged gears must be replaced. If the pump gear or idler
gear is damaged, replace both gears.
(3) Examine the inside of the pump housing for signs of scoring. Also make certain that the plunger (25, fig. 100)
227
and its bore are not scored. Replace damaged parts with new ones.
(4) Check tube assemblies carefully for dents or crimps which might restrict the flow of oil. Replace damaged
tube assemblies, if necessary.
d. Oil Pump Reassembly (fig. 100).

(1) Install the idler gear (20) on the idler shaft (18). Secure the pump gear (9) to the drive shaft (10) with the
woodruff key (19), and install the snap ring (8). Insert the assembled shaft and gear into the pump body,
meshing the pump gear with the idler gear.
(2) Attach the drive gear (14) to the drive shaft with the taper pin (15), supporting the hub of the drive gear firmly
while driving the pin into place.
(3) Position the pump cover on the pump body by means of the locating dowel pins (5) and install the four hex
head bolts (1) and lockwashers (2). Insert the spring (26) and plunger (25) into the pressure relief opening
in the pump cover (7) and screw the reducing bushing (24) into place.

(1) Lift the assembled oil pump carefully up into the upper oil pan, meshing the pump drive gear with the
crankshaft gear and alining the pump body mounting holes with the tapped holes in the mounting boss.
Install the two hex head bolts (11) and lockwashers (12).
(2) Screw a connector (16) into the pump body and the tapped crankcase oil passage, and install the tube
assembly (17) between the two connectors.
(3) Screw the connector (21) into the reducing bushing (24) and the elbow (23). Install the tube assembly (22)
between the elbow and connector.
(4) Apply a thin coat of shellac to the gasket surfaces of the pump and the suction line connection (4) and
position the gasket (6) on the connection. Loosely attach the bracket arms of the suction line connection to
the mounting boss within the upper oil pan with two hex head bolts (1), lockwashers (2) and plain washers
(3). Shift the connection toward the pump until the connection flange bears against the pump cover flange
and install and tighten two hex head bolts (1) and lockwashers (2). Then tighten the two hex head bolts that
attach the suction line bracket arms to the cast mounting boss.
(5) Install the oil intake screen (28) and cotter pin (27).
lubricating system with oil (fig. 16).
228
Install the lower oil pan (par. 217c) and fill the
220. Gear Cover and Accessory Drive
a. Removal. Remove the engine-compressor (par. 214). Remove the governor (par. 110a), thd distributor (par. 97a),
and the water pump (par. 193). Remove the tachometer drive and front half cover (par. 216a). Remove the fan (par. 88a),
the fuel pump (par. 75a), the shutterstat (par. 81a), and the fan belt (par. 85). Remove the 10 hex head bolts (19, fig. 101)
and lockwashers (18). Disconnect the tube assembly (8), elbow (7) and connector (11). Withdraw the two taper pins (20)
from the bottom of the gear cover (1). Pry the cover slightly to loosen the taper pins. Lift off the gear cover. Watch for the
oil seal half (21). to not let it drop to the floor. Take off the two gaskets (17). The gear cover assembly comes off as a
unit. Do not disassemble unless there is evident damage. To remove the accessory drive housing (6), withdraw taper pin
(10), pull governor drive gear (9), and remove the hex head bolts (18), and lockwashers (15). Carefully pry the gear cover
and housing apart. They are doweled together with taper pins (14). Do not remove the thrust plug (22).
b. Inspection (fig. 101). Replace all taper pins and the two cover gaskets. Inspect the governor drive gear (9) for
worn or broken teeth. Replace a damaged gear. Inspect the accessory drive gear (5). If the gear is worn, or the teeth
cracked or broken, replace the gear. Pull the gear over the woodruff key (16). Press a new gear on the accessory drive
shaft (3) over the key. It is not necessary to remove the pipe plug (4). Inspect the inside surface of the gear cover bushing
(2). If the bushing shows signs of wear, pull out the oil seal (23) and press the bushing out of the cover with an arbor
press (par. 179). Press in a new bushing and install the oil seal. Inspect the drive housing bushings (12). The bushings
(12), gear cover (1), accessory drive housing (6), and thrust plug (22) are not serviced separately. Damage on any one of
these components results in replacing the complete assembly.
c. Installation (fig. 101). Insert the drive shaft (3) into the gear cover (1). Start the two taper pins (14) into the gear
cover. Carefully press the accessory drive housing (6) over the pins. Install the hex head bolts (13) and lockwashers (15).
Put the governor drive gear (9) on the end of the shaft and drive in the taper pin (10). Shellac the two gaskets (17) to the
crankcase. With the oil seal half (21) in position in recess in the bottom of the cover, position the cover against the
229
crankcase and in stall the two taper pins (20). Install the 10 hex head bolts (19) and lockwashers (18). Connect the elbow
(7), tube assembly (8) and connector (11) to the accessory drive housing (6) and tappet chamber in the crankcase. Install
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Gear cover
Gear cover bushing
Accessory drive shaft
Pipe plug
Accessory drive gear
Accessory drive housing
Elbow, 1/4 x 1 MPT x 90
Tube assembly
Governor drive gear
Taper pin
Connector, 1/4 x 1/8 MPT
Drive housing bushing
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
Bolt, hex hd, 7/16-14 x 2 (4 req)

Taper pin
Woodruff key
Gasket
Bolt, hex hd, 3/8-16 x 1/4 (10 req)
Taper pin
Oil seal half
Thrust plug
Oil seal
Figure 101. Exploded view of gear cover assembly.

the water pump (par. 195), fan, (par. 88b), shutterstat (par. 81b), fan belt (par. 85), fuel pump (par. 75b), tachometer drive
and front half cover (par. 216c), distributor (par. 97b), and governor (par. 110b). Install the engine-compressor (par. 215).
230
221. Flywheel and Rear Engine Support
a. Removal.
(1) Remove the engine-compressor (par. 214) and the housing (par. 128).
(2) Remove the shutter air filter (par. 82a), starting motor (par. 93a), and aftercooler (par. 117a).
(3) Remove the two hex head bolts (14, fig. 94), hex nuts (12) and lockwashers (13) to detach the braces (15)
from the rear engine support (4, fig. 102).
(4) Support the engine-compressor with a cable hooked on the lifting bail (1, fig. 97) to take the weight off the
rear engine support (4, fig. 102).
(5) Remove the nuts (14, fig. 96), spacers (15 and 16), and cap screws (17) holding the rear engine support to
the frame (18).
(6) Unscrew the locknuts (1, fig. 102) from the flywheel bolts (10, fig. 103) through the flywheel (2, fig. 102). Lift
off the flywheel and ring gear (3). Remove the six cap screws (5) and lockwashers (6) that fasten the rear
engine support to the crankcase and upper oil pan. Pull the taper pins (7) and lift out the rear engine
support. The hex head bolts (8), hex nuts (11), and lockwashers (10) need not be removed if the timing
indicator (9) is undamaged. The ring gear is integral with flywheel and is not serviced separately.
b. Inspection (fig. 102). Replace the taper pins (7). Replace the timing indicator (9) if bent or cracked. Examine the
ring gear (3) for cracked or broken teeth. Replace both the flywheel and ring gear as an assembly if the ring gear is
damaged.
c. Installation.
(1) Install the timing indicator (9, fig. 102) if it was replaced. Place the rear engine support (4) against the
crankcase and drive in the two taper pins (7). Install the cap screws (5) and lockwashers (6) that fasten the
rear support. Position the flywheel (2) and ring gear (3) over the flywheel bolts (10, fig. 103) through the
crankshaft flange and install the locknuts (1, fig. 102). Install the spacers (15 and 16, fig. 96), cap screws
(17), and nuts (14) that fasten the rear engine support to the frame.
(2) Remove the cable from the lifting bail (1, fig. 97).
231
Figure 102. Exploded view of flywheel and rear support.

(3) Fasten the two braces (15, fig. 94) to the rear engine support (4, fig. 102) with two hex head bolts (14,
fig. 94), hex nuts (12) and lockwashers (13).
(4) Install the aftercooler (par. 117c), starting motor (par. 93b) and shutter air filter (par. 82e). Install the
housing (par. 130) and engine-compressor (par. 215).
222. Crankshaft and Main Bearings
a. Removal.
(1) Remove the engine-compressor from the truck (par. 214). Remove the housing (par. 128). Remove the
upper and lower oil pans (par. 217a), flywheel (par. 221a), and radiator and fan (par. 88a). Remove the
engine cylinder head (par. 122a) compressor cylinder head (par. 126a), and the pistons, connecting rods
and rings (par. 223a).
(2) Remove six cap screws (9, fig. 106) and the three outer bearing caps (10) with the lower main bearing
232
shells (7 and 9, fig. 103). Mark the bearing caps so they can be installed in their original positions. Push the
exposed upper bearing shells (7 and 9) counterclockwise (facing the front of the engine) until they can be
removed. Keep each pair of bearing shells together and tag them so they can be installed in their original
positions.
(3) Support the crankshaft (8) to prevent it from dropping. Remove four cap screws (9, fig. 106) and the front
and rear bearing caps (8 and 11) together with the front and rear bearing shells (7, fig. 103).
(4) Remove the crankshaft and place it on a clean surface. Do not use chains to support the crankshaft or the
bearing surfaces will be marred. Remove the cap screw (2), lockwasher (3) and washer (4). Remove the
crankshaft pulley (5) and gear (6) with a gear and bearing puller (par. 179). Do not lose the woodruff keys
(11 and 12).
b. Inspection.
(1) Inspect the crankshaft gear for broken or chipped teeth. Replace the gear if it is damaged in any way.
Examine the crankshaft pulley for cracks and replace it if damaged.
(2) Inspect the crankshaft bearing surfaces for cuts, scoring and cracks. Check the crankshaft journals with an
0to 4-inch outside micrometer caliper (par. 179) for wear, concentricity and taper. The journals should be
3.748 to 3.749 inches in diameter. Set the crankshaft on center blocks and check for straightness using a
dial indicator (par. 179) or a suitable stand and setup.
(3) Inspect the bearings for scoring and wear. Measure the thickness of the bearing shells. The bearing
thickness should be 0.1250 to 0.1255 inches. If any bearing shell is worn beyond the minimum, replace all
the bearings. This will eliminate the danger of a shutdown when another bearing fails.
c. Repair. Remove small defects in the crankshaft journals with strips of emery cloth well oiled. Wrap the strip
around the journal to prevent lapping the journal to a oval shape. If the crankshaft is worn excessively or bent, it must be
ground in a crankshaft grinder (par. 179) or replaced with an undersize crankshaft which is: available in two sizes:
0.010and 0.030 inch undersize. By installing an undersize crankshaft, the engine compressor can be put in operating
233
Figure 103. Exploded view of crankshaft, fan, and main bearings.
234
condition without waiting for repair of the original. A bent crankshaft must be straightened in a hydraulic press before
grinding. If the crankshaft is ground down, undersize bearings must be installed. Undersize bearings are available in two
sizes: 0.010 and 0.030-inch undersize.
d. Installation.
(1) Press on the crankshaft gear (6, fig. 103) over the woodruff key (11) using an arbor press (par. 179). Also
press the crankshaft pulley (5) over the woodruff key (12).
(2) Install the upper bearing shells (7 and 9) in the crankcase. The bearing backs must be clean and dry. Coat
the bearing surfaces with clean engine oil OE.
(3) Support the crankshaft (8) in position under the crankcase. Mesh the timing marks on the camshaft gear (2,
fig. 105) with those on the crankshaft gear (6, fig. 103). Install the front and rear bearing caps (8 and 11,
fig. 106) and their main bearing shells (7, fig. 103) with four cap screws (9, fig. 106). Install the three center
bearing caps (10) and main bearing shells (7 and 9, fig. 103) with six cap screws (9, fig. 106). Tighten all
the cap screws to 150 foot-pounds of torque.
(4) Install the flywheel (par. 221c). Turn the crankshaft over by rotating the flywheel. No difficulty should be
experienced in turning the crankshaft over.
(5) Install the pistons, connecting rods and rings (par. 223c). Install the compressor cylinder head (par. 126c),
engine cylinder head (par. 122e), oil pans (par. 217c) and radiator and fan (par. 88b). Install the housing
(par. 130) and engine-compressor on the truck (par. 215).
223. Pistons, Connecting Rods, and Rings
a. Removal and Disassembly (fig. 104). Remove the compressor bank cylinder head (par. 126a). Remove the
engine bank cylinder head (par. 122a). Remove the lower oil pan (par. 217a). Unscrew the connecting rod bolt nuts (14)
and remove the bearing caps (1). The lower bearing shell (2) comes with the cap. Push the piston (5) through the cylinder
bore. Remove the rings (6, 7, 9, and 10) with a piston ring expander (par. 179). Remove the upper bearing shell. Do not
let it drop out of the engine. Keep the pairs of shells with their corresponding caps. Tag the pistons so they can be
returned to their original positions. Note the relative positions of the inner face of the rod and the T-slot of the piston.
235
Figure 104. Exploded view of piton and connecting rod.
236
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Bearing cap
Bearing shell
Connecting rod
Pin retainer
Piston
Oil control ring
Third groove ring
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
Expander
Second groove ring
Top groove ring
Piston pin
Piston pin bushing
Connecting rod bolt
Connecting rod bolt nut
Figure 104. Continued.

Take out the connecting rod bolts (13) and put them with their corresponding caps. Remove the pin retainers (4). Drive
out the piston pins (I1) and separate the connecting rods (3) and piston pin and bushings (12) from the piston. Press the
bushings from the connecting rod with an arbor press (par. 179).
b. Cleaning and Inspection.

(1) The connecting rod bearing shells should be free from nicks or scratches and show no signs of overheating.
An overheated bearing will show dark discoloration. Check the bearing shell thickness. The thickness
should be from 0.0952 inch to 0.0956 inch. Replace all connecting rod bearings if any bearing shell is worn
to less than the minimum thickness. If an undersize crankshaft is installed, undersize bearing shells must be
installed. Refer to paragraph 222c. Undersize bearings are available in two sizes: 0.010- and 0.030-inch
undersize.
(2) Clean the pistons by soaking them in carbon tetrachloride or similar solvent. Clean any carbon deposits.
Replace a cracked or broken piston. Check the pistons with a 5 to 6 inch outside micrometer caliper
(par. 179) to determine out of round by taking readings at several points around the diameter. The
diameter of the piston should be 5.4955 to 5.4965 inches at the skirt bottom. Check the piston clearance by
inserting the piston, top down, in the cylinder sleeve bore. Use a feeler gage. The clearance of the piston
skirt to cylinder sleeve should be 0.0035 to 0.0055 inches.
(3) Check cylinder sleeve diameter for size and concentricity using a 1 1/2 to 12 inch inside micrometer caliper
(par. 179). Take several readings the same way as checking pistons. If the sleeve diameter is greater than
5.501 inch, replace the sleeve (par. 225). If the sleeve diameter is between 5.500 and 5.501 inches and the
piston to sleeve clearance is greater than 0.0055 inches replace the piston. Check the gap clearance of
new piston rings
237
by placing them in a sleeve, square them up in the bore with a piston, and measure the gap with a feeler
gage. The piston ring gap should not be less than 0.015 inches.
(4) Check the piston pin to connecting rod bushing clearance. This should be from 0.0007 to 0.0012 inches. If
this clearance is more than 0.0012 inches, press out the bushing in an arbor press (par. 179) and install a
new bushing.
(5) Roll each piston ring in its groove and check the side clearance in several locations. Refer to figure 104 for
correct ring position. The side clearance for each ring is as follows: Top groove ring (10, fig. 104), 0.0020 to
0.0045 inch; second groove ring (9), third groove ring (7), and oil control ring (6), 0.0015 to 0.0035 inch. Do
not use a ring whose side clearance is greater than the maximum.
c. Reassembly and Installation (fig. 104).

(1) Press new piston pin bushing (12) into the connecting rod (3). Use an arbor press (par. 179) for this
purpose.
(2) Install the piston rings (6, 7, 9, and 10) with a piston ring expander (par. 179) spreading the gap only enough
to slide them into place. Start with the oil control ring (6) and proceed to the top of the piston. Put the
expander (8) in the third ring groove before installing the third groove ring (7). Heat the piston (5) in warm
water, locate the piston T-slot and connecting rod (3) in their original relative position, then insert the piston
pin (11) with a very light tap. Put in the pin retainers (4).
(3) Put the connecting rod bolts (13) through their connecting rod holes. Coat the cylinder walls with clean
engine oil. Place piston ring compressor (par. 179) over the top of the piston and apply enough pressure to
compress the rings so the piston is snug. Insert the piston assembly into the cylinder bore. Check to see
that the side of the connecting rod with the least chamfer faces the adjacent connecting rod, and the Tslotted side of all pistons face towards the engine bank. Guide the piston into the bore with the ring
compressor, releasing the tension enough to allow the piston to enter the bore without binding of the rings.
(4) Clean the backs of the bearing shells (2), lubricate their surfaces with engine oil, and install them in the
connecting rod. Position the connecting rods on the crankshaft.
238
Rotate the crankshaft if necessary. Install the bearing caps (1) with their bearing shells. Tighten the connecting rod bolt
nuts to 90 foot-pounds of torque.
224. Camshaft and Gear
a. Removal. Remove the fuel pump (par. 75a). Remove the crankcase covers (par. 216a). Remove the gear cover
(par. 220a). Remove the engine cylinder head and valves (par. 122a) and lift up and tie the valve tappets (16, fig. 106)
so they will not catch the cams on the camshaft (3, fig. 105). Turn the engine so the timing marks on the camshaft gear
(2) and crankshaft gear (6, fig. 103) coincide. Note this position. Pull the camshaft and gear from the crankcase. Twist
the gear to disengage it while pulling. Do not remove the cup plugs (1 and 4, fig. 105).
Figure 105. Exploded view of camshaft and gear.

b. Inspection. Inspect the camshaft gear (2, fig. 105) for chipped or broken teeth. Examine the camshaft (3) for
scratches or obvious wear. Slight scratches can be removed with crocus cloth. Clean any residue from the camshaft
surface. If the gear is damaged, pull it off over the Woodruff key (5) using a gear and bearing puller (par. 179). Carefully
press on the new gear with an arbor press (par. 179). If the camshaft is damaged beyond repair, replace the camshaft
and gear as a unit. The camshaft and front cup plug (1) are not serviced separately.
c. Installation. Insert the camshaft (3, fig. 105) and camshaft gear (2) in the front of the crankcase. Be careful in
meshing the gears. See that the timing marks on the camshaft and
239
crankshaft gears coincide. Turn the engine over if necessary. Release the valve tappets (16, fig. 106) and install the
cylinder head and valves (par. 122e). Install the fuel pump (par. 75b). Install the gear cover (par. 220c). Install the
crankcase covers (par. 216 c).
225. Crankcase and Cylinder Sleeves
a. Removal (fig. 106). Remove the engine-compressor from the frame (par. 214). Remove both cylinder heads
(pars. 122a and 126a), crankcase covers (par. 216a), rear support (par. 221a), gear cover (par. 220(a), crankshaft and
main bearings
Figure 106. Exploded view of crankcase and sleeves.

240
(par. 222a), oil pans (par. 217a), camshaft (par. 224a), and pistons, connecting rods and rings (par. 223a). After
removing the main bearings, be sure to keep them with their bearing caps (8, 10, and 11), and cap screws (9). Do not
loose the dowel pins (7). Place the oil seal half (5) on a clean surface. The pipe plug (6) and drain cock (12) need not be
removed unless damaged.
b. Inspection. Measure the inside diameter of the cylinder sleeves (4, fig. 106) with an inside micrometer caliper
(par. 179). Check the sleeves for out of round by taking several measurements down the base and around the inside
diameter. They should measure from 5.500 to 5.501 inches. Replace the sleeves if one measures greater than the
maximum out-of-round. Remove a sleeve by driving it up from the bottom with a mallet and a hardwood block, or with a
cylinder liner puller (par. 179). Before installing a new sleeve make sure the crankcase bore and sleeve upper seating
surface are clean. Install new packing rings (3) in the crankcase grooves. Apply a liberal amount of soap to the rings and
grooves. Guide the new sleeve into the bore and carefully drive it into place. Clean the crankcase in solvent and remove
all dirt and grease deposits.
NOTE
Test the cooling system for leaks into the crankcase after installing a cylinder sleeve.
Insert the camshaft (3, fig. 105) into the crankcase (1, fig. 106) and measure the camshaft to bushing clearance. On all
bushings (13 and 14) this clearance should be from 0.0015 to 0.0035 inches.
Drive out any camshaft bushing where the clearance is greater than 0.0035 inch. Press in a new bushing with an arbor
press (par. 179). If the rear bushing is at fault, replace the Welch plug (15). Replace any valve tappets (16) that show
scratches or nicks. Replace worn oil seals.
c. Installation. Replace the crankshaft and main bearings (par. 222d) with the bearing caps (8, 10, 11), dowel pins
(7) and cap screws (9). Tighten the cap screws to 150 foot-pounds of torque. Install the oil seal (5) in the crankcase
recess. Install the pistons, connecting rods and rings (par. 223c) and camshaft (par. 224c). Insert the valve tappets (16).
Install the oil pans (par. 217c), gear cover (par. 220c), rear support (par. 221c), crankcase covers (par. 216c), and both
cylinder heads (pars. 122e and 126c). Install the engine-compressor in the frame (par. 215).
Section XIII. TOOL BOXES AND RUNNING BOARDS
226. Description
The three tool boxes on the front and sides of the engine-compressor contain all the air-operated tools furnished with
the equipment.
241
Figure 107. Exploded view of tool boxes and running boards.

242
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
Cap screw, No. 10-24 x 3/8 (4

req)
Hinge pin spring
Nut
Washer, plain, 5/16 (24 req)
Cap screw, 5/16-24 x 3/4 (12
req)
Compressor-side tool box
Mud guard
Front running board
Front spacer
Cap screw, 1/2-20 x 1 1/2 (2 req)
Front tool box
Cap screw, 1/2-20 x 1 1/2 (4 req)
Nut
Cap screw, 1/2-20 x 1 (14 req)
Cap screw, 3/8-24 x 7/8 (8 req)
Running board step
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
Nut
Nut
Nut
Side tool box support
Engine-side tool box
Rear door brace
Cap screw, 5/16-24 x 1 (32 req)
Cap screw, 1/2-20 x 1 1/4 (8 req)
Vibration dampener
Nut
Nut
Cap screw, 1/2-20 x 1 (24) req)
Nut
Rear running board
Rear spacer
Nut
Cap screw, 1/2-20 x 1 3/4 (2 req)
Cap screw, 1/2-20 x 1 1/2 (2 req)
a. The compressor-side tool box contains the rock drills and the nail driver. Air hoses are attached to each of these
units.
b. The engine-side tool box contains the paving breakers and the clay diggers. Air hoses are attached to each of
these units.
c. The front tool box contains the circular saw, the chain saw, the wood drill, and the grease gun kit. The front tool
box also contains three connecting air hoses.
227. Tool Box and Running Board Removal
(fig. 107)
Remove the engine-compressor unit (par. 214). Remove the two rear door braces (24). Remove the nuts (3), cap
screws (5), and plain washers (4). Lift off the mud guards (7). Remove the nuts (30), cap screws (26), and lift off the
compressor side tool box (6) and the engine-side tool box (23). Remove the nuts (29), plain washers (28), cap screws
(25), and remove the vibration dampeners (27). Remove the nuts (33), cap screws (31), plain washers (32), and lift off
four side tool box supports (22). Remove the nuts (19), cap screws (17), and take off two running board steps (18).
Remove the nuts (36), cap screws (37 and 38), and lift off the rear running board (34). Take off two rear spacers (35).
Remove the nuts (20), cap screws (16),
nuts (21), cap screws (12), plain washers (13), and lift off the
243
Figure 108. Exploded view of unit spring mounting.

244
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Nut
Washer
Vibration dampener
Spring
Plate
Cap screw
Spring plate
Plate
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Spacer
Spacer
Bumper
Stud
Nut, hex, 3/8-24 (4 req)
Washer, flat
Cap screw
Figure 108--continued.
front running board (8). Remove the nuts (15), cap screws (10), plain washers (14), and lift off the front tool box (11). Lift
off two front spacers (9). Take out the cap screws (1) and remove the hinge pin springs (2).
228. Tool Box and Running Board Inspection and Repair
Clean all mud and dirt from frame and tool box parts. After cleaning, inspect for rust. Sand ail rust spots and repaint
immediately. Check for cracks, dents, and broken welds. Inspect the hinge pin springs and the rear door braces.
Replace these units if they are damaged in any way. Replace cracked vibration dampeners. Weld broken or torn welded
seams; any torn surfaces. Pound out dents. Repaint as instructed in paragraph 43. Repaint any repaired surface
immediately.
229. Tool Box and Running Board Installation
(fig. 107)
Install two hinge pin springs (2), at the rear of the side tool boxes, with the cap screws (1). Place two front spacers (9) on
the truck frame, and put the front tool box (11) over the spacers. Install the cap screws (10), plain washers (14), and nuts
(15). Place the front running board (8) behind the front tool box. Install the cap screws (12), plain washers (13), nuts (21),
cap screws (16), and nuts (20). Place two rear spacers (35) over the holes in the rear of the truck frame. Place the rear
running board (34) over the spacers. Install the cap screws (37 and 38) and nuts (36). The longer cap screws (37) go
towards the rear. Place the running board steps (18) in position, and install the cap screws (17) and nuts (19). Install the
side tool box supports (22) with the cap screws (31), plain washers (32), and nuts (33). Place the vibration dampeners
(27) in position at the bottom corners of the side tool boxes, and install the cap screws (25), plain washers (28), and nuts
(29). Place both side
245
tool boxes (6 and 23) over their supports, and install the cap screws (26) and nuts (30). Place the mud guards (7) in
position and install the cap screws (5), plain washers (4), and nuts (3). Install the rear door braces (24). Install the enginecompressor unit (par. 215).
Section XIV. UNIT SPRING MOUNTING
230. Description
The engine-compressor unit is mounted on four spring mountings. These mountings isolate the equipment to prevent
vibration while operating or moving the equipment.
231. Spring Mounting Removal
(fig. 108)
Remove the nuts (1), washers (2), vibration dampeners (3), and cap screws (6). Lift the engine-compressor from the
truck frame (par. 214). Lift off the plates (5). Take out the cap screws (16) with washers (15) and lift out the spring
assemblies. Unscrew the nuts (14) and remove the lockwashers (13). Lift off the bumpers (11) and separate the spacers
(9 and 10) and plates (7 and 8) from the springs (4). Do not unscrew the stud. (12).
232. Spring Mounting Cleaning and Inspection
Clean the mounting assembly parts in carbon tetrachloride or similar solvent, except the bumpers and vibration
dampeners. Clean off all rust or corrosion with steel wool or a buffing wheel. Inspect all parts for breaks or cracks.
Replace any damaged springs, spacers, or plates. Wash the bumpers and vibration dampeners in water. Dry thoroughly.
Inspect them for flaws or nicks. Replace any bumper or vibration dampener that shows any sign of weakness. Repaint as
instructed in paragraph 43.
233. Spring Mounting Installation
(fig. 108)
Place one spring plate (7) on each of the truck frame brackets. Set the springs (4), the other spring plates (7), and
plates (8) with stud (12) on the springs. Put the flat washers (15) on the cap screws (16), insert the cap screws through
the springs, and screw them into the plates. Put the spacers (9 and 10) and the bumpers (11) over the stud. Install the
lockwashers (13) and hex nuts (14). Put the plates (5) on the springs. Lower the engine-compressor to the truck frame
(par. 215). Insert the cap screws (6) through the springs. Install a washer (2) on
246
each of the cap screws (6). Put on the vibration dampeners (3), the other washers (2), and install the nuts (1).
Section XV. ENGINEERING DATA
234. Recommended Wrench Torques
Main bearing bolts............................................................................................................................... 150 ft-lbs
Connecting rod bolts ........................................................................................................................... 90 ft-lbs
Cylinder head studs, engine bank....................................................................................................... 90 ft-lbs
Cylinder head cover, engine bank ...................................................................................................... 40 ft-lbs
Cylinder head studs, compressor bank .............................................................................................. 90 ft-lbs
Compressor valve assembly studs ..................................................................................................... 25 ft-lbs
Manifold studs, engine bank ............................................................................................................... 60 ft-lbs
Flywheel bolts ..................................................................................................................................... 125 ft-lbs
Fan and crankshaft pulley studs ......................................................................................................... 40 ft-lbs
235. Table of Clearances
In all cases original manufacturing clearances and dimensions are used herewith:
Piston diameter, at skirt bottom . ....................................................................................................
Cylinder sleeve diameter ................................................................................................................
Clearance, piston to cylinder at skirt bottom...................................................................................
Piston top groove ring width ...........................................................................................................
Clearance, top groove ring in top groove........................................................................................
Piston second groove ring width .....................................................................................................
Second groove width ......................................................................................................................
Clearance, second groove ring .......................................................................................................
Piston third groove ring width..........................................................................................................
Third groove width ..........................................................................................................................
Clearance, third groove ring............................................................................................................
Piston oil control ring width .............................................................................................................
Fourth groove width ........................................................................................................................
Clearance, oil control ring ...............................................................................................................
Gap. piston rings............................................................................................................................
Gap, expander ring, under third ring ...............................................................................................
Clearance, piston to piston pin, selective fit, not ............................................................................
interchangeable.
Connecting rod & cap bore .............................................................................................................
Rod bearing shell thickness ............................................................................................................
Crankpin diameter ..........................................................................................................................
Clearance, connecting rod bearing running....................................................................................
Connecting rod bushing diameter ...................................................................................................
Piston pin diameter .........................................................................................................................
Clearance, pin to bushing ...............................................................................................................
Main bearing bore . .........................................................................................................................
Main bearing shell thickness...........................................................................................................
Main bearing journal diameter ........................................................................................................
Clearance, main bearing running....................................................................................................
247
5.4955-5.4965
5.500-5.501
.0035-.0055
.1235-.1240
.0020-.0045
.1230-.1240
.1255-.1265
.0015-.0035
.1230-.1240
.1255-.1265
.0015-.0035
.2480-.2490
.2505-.2515
.0015-.0035
.015 min.
.0625 min.
.0001-.0003
3.4415-3.4425
.0956
3.2480-3.2490
.0013-.0043
1.5007-1.5010
1.4998-1.5000
.0007-.0012
4.002-4.003
.1250-.1255
3.748-3.749
0.02-.005
Center main bearing width ..............................................................................................................

Crankshaft journal width .................................................................................................................
Clearance, main bearing end..........................................................................................................
1.649-1.651
1.655-1.657
.004-.008
Camshaft journal diameter..............................................................................................................

Camshaft, bushing inside diameter ................................................................................................
Clearance, camshaft bushing running ............................................................................................
2.2470-2.2480
2.2495-2.2605
.0015-.0035
Intake valve guide bore...................................................................................................................

Intake valve stem diameter .............................................................................................................
Clearance, intake valve stem..........................................................................................................
.4370-.4380
.4345-.4355
.0015-.0035
Exhaust valve guide bore................................................................................................................

Exhaust valve stem diameter..........................................................................................................
Clearance, exhaust valve stem.......................................................................................................
.4370-.4380
.4335-.4345
.0025-.0045
Crankshaft-camshaft gear backlash ...............................................................................................

Crankshaft-oil pump drive gear backlash .......................................................................................
Accessory drive-ignitor drive gear backlash ...................................................................................
Camshaft-accessory drive gear backlash.......................................................................................
Oil pump idler-oil pump gear backlash ...........................................................................................
.006
.006
.006
.006
.008-.014
248
CHAPTER 6
SHIPMENT, LIMITED STORAGE AND
DEMOLITION TO PREVENT ENEMY USE
Section I. SHIPMENT AND LIMITED STORAGE
236. Limited Storage
a. General. To insure perfect operating conditions at all times, all air compressors not intended for immediate use
must be subjected to certain services prior to storage. This procedure is designed to protect exterior surfaces of the air
compressor, as well as the interior surfaces, against rust or corrosion for a period of 30 days. Before proceeding to
prepare the air compressor for storage, open the service valves at the rear of the air receiver to relieve the air pressure;
then close the valves.
b. Inspection. Perform preventive maintenance services (par. 47).
c. Cleaning and Painting.
(1) Remove grease and dirt from the exterior of the engine compressor. Be sure surfaces are dry and spray or
brush all exterior surfaces of the engine-compressor and accessories with compound No. AXS858.
(2) Remove dirt, dust, grease and other foreign materials from the housing. Use solvent where necessary.
Touch up or repaint surfaces (par. 43).
d. Lubrication. Lubricate the entire unit (pars. 41 and 42).
e. Protection in Storage.
(1) Drain the fuel tank (par. 72).
(2) Drain the cooling system (par. 80a).
(3) Remove the batteries from the unit (par. 90d) and service (par. 90a and b). Check specific gravity
(par. 90c). Batteries should be stored in a warm, dry place. Be certain that all filler plugs are tight and that
the tops of the batteries are clean and dry.
NOTE. .The electrolyte of charged batteries not in service will show a gradual and continuous
drop in specific gravity, as the acid will slowly react with the active materials, even when there is
no closed external circuit. This drop, when the batteries are kept below 80 F, will average about
0.001 per day over a month's time. When storing batteries, they should be recharged every 30
249
Figure 109. Placement of demolition charges.

250
days, to keep them ready for service. This charging should be at one ampere per positive plate
per cell. This means that a 25-plate battery should be charged at 12.0 amperes.
(4) Blow the filter elements and the inside of filter connections with compressed air. Refer to lubrication order
(fig. 16).
(5) Tag the unit indicating that the cooling system is dry and batteries are removed.
237. Domestic Shipment
a. General. Information in this section is published for the guidance of personnel responsible for packaging and
shipping the air compressor. Refer to paragraph 236 for preparation for shipment.
b. Hoisting and Blocking. Since the air compressor is mounted on a truck, refer to TM 9-819 for instructions for
hoisting and blocking the truck for shipment.
Section II. DEMOLITION OF AIR COMPRESSOR TO
PREVENT ENEMY USE
238. General
When capture or abandonment of the air compressor is imminent, the responsible unit commander must make the
decision either to destroy the equipment or render it inoperative. Based on this decision, orders are issued which cover
the desired extent of destruction. Whatever method of demolition is employed, it is essential to destroy the same vital parts
of all air compressors and all corresponding repair parts.
239. Preferred Demolition Methods
Explosives and mechanical means, either alone or in combination, are the most effective methods of demolition to
employ. Listed below are the vital parts in order of priority of demolition for each preferred method. In each case,
completion of the first three steps will render the equipment inoperative. Completion of the additional steps listed will
further destroy the unit.
a. Demolition by Explosives (fig. 109). Place as many of the following charges as the situation permits and detonate
them simultaneously with detonating cord and a suitable detonator:
(1) Two 2-pound charges on the engine and compressor valve covers.
(2) A 2-pound charge on the crankcase cover.
NOTE
The above charges are the minimum requirement for this method.
251
(3) A 2-pound charge on the aftercooler.

(4) A 1/2-pound charge between the starting motor and the engine block.
(5) A 1/2-pound charge between the battery charging generator and the engine block.
b. Demolition by Mechanical Means. Use sledge hammers, crowbars, picks, axes, or any other heavy tools which
may be available, together with the tools normally included with the air compressor, to destroy the following:
(1) The air compressor instrument panel.
(2) The compressor valves and engine valve rocker arm assemblies.
NOTE
The above steps are the minimum requirement for this method.
(3) The distributor and governor.
(4) The storage batteries.
(5) The radiator.
(6) The fire extinguisher.
240. Other Demolition Methods
If the situation prevents employing either of the preferred methods, use the following, either singly or in combination.
a. Demolition by Weapons Fire. Fire on the air compressor with the heaviest weapons available. Direct the fire
toward both sides of the equipment.
b. Demolition by Scattering and Concealing. Remove all easily accessible vital parts such as the spark plugs, fuel
pump, and starter motor and battery charging generator brushes. Scatter these parts through dense foliage, bury them in
dirt or sand, or throw them into a lake, stream, or other body of water.
c. Demolition by Burning. Pack rags, clothing, or canvas under and around the equipment. Saturate this packing
with gasoline, diesel fuel, or some other inflammable liquid, and ignite it.
d. Demolition by Submersion. Totally submerge the unit in a body of water to provide some water damage and
concealment. Salt water will do the greatest damage to metal parts.
e. Demolition by Misuse. Perform the first step listed below to put the governor out of action and the remaining steps
to make the air compressor inoperative.
(1) Remove the slowdown assembly and break the linkage between the governor and carburetor.
(2) Drain radiator and crankcase.
252
(3) Open the service valves and start the engine.

(4) Run the air compressor at maximum speed until failure occurs.
241. Training
All operators should receive thorough training in the destruction of the air compressor. Simulated destruction, using all
methods listed above, should be included in the operator training program. It must be emphasized in training that
demolition operations are usually necessitated by critical situations when the time available for destruction is limited. For
this reason, it is necessary that operators be thoroughly familiar with all methods of destruction and be able to carry out
demolition instructions without reference to this or any other manual.
253
APPENDIX I
REFERENCES
1. Accessory Equipment
TM 9-819, 2 1/2 ton, 6 x 6, Cargo Truck M34, M35, and M36; Chassis Truck M44, M45, and M46; Crane Truck M108;
Dump Truck M47 and M59; Gasoline Tank Truck M49; Shop Van Truck M109; Tractor Truck M48; Water Tank
Truck M50.
TM 5-687, Inspection and Preventive Maintenance Services for Fire Protection Equipment and Appliances.
TM 9-1799, Ordinance Maintenance: Fire Extinguishers.
2. Auxiliary Equipment
TM 5-4004, Saw, Circular, Portable, Pneumatic, 12 in. Blade, Skillsaw, Model 2127.
TM 5-4089, Drill, Rock, Pneumatic, Portable: Cleveland Model H-111.
TM 5-4087, Drill, Wood Boring, Thor Models 362 RHW, 362 RXW, 363 RYW.
3. Dictionaries of Terms and Abbreviations
SR 320-5-1, Dictionary of United States Army terms.
SR 320-50-1, Authorized Abbreviations.
4. Lubrication and Painting
LO 5-5065, Lubrication Order.
TM 9-2851, Painting Instructions for Field Use.
5. Preparation for Export Shipment
TB 5-9711-1, Preparation of Corps of Engineers Equipment for Overseas Shipment.
TB 5--9713-1, Preparation for Export, Spare Parts for Corps of Engineer Equipment.
6. Preventive Maintenance
TB 5-5065-1, Preventive Maintenance Services.
TM 5-505, Maintenance of Engineer Equipment.
7. Publications Indexes
SR 110-1-1, Index of Army Motion Pictures, Kinescope Recordings and Film Strips.
SR 310 20-3, Index of Training Publications.
254
SR 310-20-4, Index of Technical Manuals, Technical Regulations, Technical Bulletins, Supply Bulletin, Lubrication
Orders, and Modification Work Orders.
SR 310-20-5, Index of Administrative Publications.
SR 310-20-6, Index of Blank Forms.
SR 310-20-25, Index of Supply Manuals-Corps of Engineers.
FM 21-8, Military Training Aids.
8. Supply Publications
ENG 7 & 8-5065, Compressor, Air: Truck-Mounted; Gasoline-Driven; 210 CFM; LeRoi Model (66-3270.210.460).
255
APPENDIX II
IDENTIFICATION OF REPLACEABLE PARTS
Section I. STANDARD HARDWARE

Engineering stock No.
Code
No.
Part No.
Manufacturers part No.

Code
No.
Federal supply
class and item
identification No.
Description
Part No.
914
45-1760.004.001
770
013-1062
.................................
914
45-1760.010.007
770
013-1073
.................................
910
910
914
33-2344.500.170
33-2344.500.180
45-2680.004.003
770
770
770
83-223-28
83-223-20
013-718
.................................
.................................
.................................
914
45-2736.500.001
770
33-574
.................................
914
45-3632.450.007
770
013-435
.................................
914
45-3688.003.001
770
182-42
227-6877
STANDARD HARDWARE AND PARTS

BUSHING, pipe: iron; black headed; FS WW-P471; Type I; 3/8 x 1/8 in.
BUSHING, pipe: iron; black; headed; FS WW-P471; Type I; 1 x 3/4 in.
CLAMP, hose: water, 1 3/4 in ........................................
CLAMP, hose: water; 1 7/8 in ........................................
COUPLING, pipe: malleable iron; 150 lb. pressure;
reducing; threaded; FS WW-P-521; black; 3/8 x
1/4 in.
COUPLING, pipe: malleable iron; 150 lb. pressure;
straight; threaded; FS WW-P-521; black; Type
I; 1/8 in.
ELBOW, pipe: cast iron; 125 lb pressure; straight;
threaded; FS WW-P-501; 45-deg; black; 3/4 in.
ELBOW, pipe: malleable iron; 150 lb pressure; FS
WW-P-521; reducing; threaded; 90-deg; black;
1/4 x 1/8 in.
256
Quantity
per
unit
1
2
10
4
2
2
1
914
45-3716.453.001
770
182-192
.................................
914
45-3716.970.005
770
013-404
.................................
914
45-3772.830.003
770
182-219
.................................
914
45-3772.830.004
770
013-503
.................................
914
45-3772.900.005
770
013-504
.................................
912
42-5416.500.200
770
623
09-5
124545
012-4545
912
42-5416.500.270
770
09-10
012-0051
912
912
42-5416.500.330
42-5416.500.540
770
770
09-19
09-41
.................................
.................................
914
45-5600.001.060
770
013-57
.................................
914
45-5600.003.008
770
013-2
192-9450
914
45-5600.004.070
770
35-51-49
.................................
914
45-5600.005.020
770
013-111
192-9479

WW-P-521; straight; threaded; 45-deg; black;
1/8 in.
WW-P-521; straight; threaded; 90-deg; galvanized; Type II; 3 in.
W-P-521; street; straight; threaded; 90-deg;
black; Type I; 1/4 in.
WW-P-521; street; straight; threaded; 90-deg;
black; 3/8 in.
ELBOW, pipe; malleable iron; 150 lb pressure; FS
WW-P-521; street; straight; threaded; 90-deg;
galvanized; Type II; 1/2 in.
KEY, woodruff: nickel steel; single; No.5, 3/8 x 5/8 in.
KEY (Supplied under Stock No.912 42-5416.500
200).
KEY, woodruff: nickel steel; single; No.10, 5/32 x
7/8 in.
KEY, woodruff: nickel steel; single; No.15, 1/4 x 1 in
KEY, woodruff: nickel steel; single; No.127, 1/4 x
2 1/8 in.
NIPPLE, pipe: FS WW-N-351; wrought iron; std;
black; 1/8 in. ips, 6 in. long.
black 1/4 in. ips, 5 in. long.
257
1
2
1
1
2
2
1

Code
No.
Part No.

Code
No.
Federal supply
class and item
identification No.
Description
Part No.
914
45-5600.007.014
770
013-5
914
45-5600.010.020
770
33-158-20
914
45-5600.010.030
770
33-158-38
914
45-5600.025.025
770
013-10
913
43-4074.030.280
770
04-801
913
43-4074.060.180
770
B53-26
913
43-4092.070.160
770
53-295
913
43-4162.040.240
770
199-6597
913
43-4162.050.200
770
04-955
913
43-4164.540.160
623
134569
STANDARD HARDWARE AND PARTSContinued

192-9453
black; in. ips, 1 3/8 in. long.
192-9463
black; 1 in. ips, 2 in. long.
192-9488
black; 1 in. ips, 3 in. long.
1
black; 2 1/2 in. ips, 2 1/2 in. long.
NUT, castellated: FS FF-B-571; Type A-4; steel;
2
semifinished; NF; hex; rh 1/4 in.; 28 threads per
in.
NUT, castellated: FS FF-B-571; Type A-4; steel;
4
semifinished; NF; hex; rh; 5/8 in.; 18 threads per
in.
NUT, Elastic Stop: steel; NF; hex; rh; 3/4 in.; 16
4
threads per in.
199-6597NUT, jam: regular; steel; finished; FSF F-B-571,
8
grade 6; NF; hex; Type A; rh; 3/8 in.; 24 threads
per in.
5310-266-0344NUT, jam: regular; steel; finished; FS FF-B-571, 1
grade 6; NF; hex; Type A; rh; 1/2 in.; 20 threads
per in
22-7208NUT, jam: regular; steel; semifinished; FS FF-B1
571, grade 5; NC; hex; Type A; rh; cadmium
plated; 3/8 in.; 16 threads per in.
258
Quantity
per
unit
4
2
1
913
43-4164.035.180
476
RA-172
.................................
913
43-4164.040.160
770
04-403
.................................
913
43-4260.008.320
476
R-157
011-3102
913
43-4286.010.240
770
04-13
5310-011--0633
913
43-4286.012.240
674
X-991
5310-010 3084
913
43-4350.010.320
606
8X-1372
010-3088
913
43-4355.008.360
699
T21S-8
5310-266 4172
913
43-4445.030.200
770
53-274
.................................
770
04-101
913
43-4445.035.180
770
04-102
5310-266-0386
913
43-4445.040.160
770
04-108
.................................
770
04-103
770
04-104
913
43-4445.045.140
.................................
NUT, jam: regular; steel; semifinished; FS FF-B571, grade 5; NC; hex; Type A; rh; 5/16 in.; 18
threads per in.
NUT, jam: regular; steel; semifinished; FS FF-B571, grade 5; NC; hex; Type A; rh 3/8 in.; 16
threads per in.
NUT, machine screw: brass; NC; hex; rh; screw
No. 6; 32 threads per in.
NUT, machine screw; steel; NC; hex; rh; screw
NUT; machine screw; steel; NC; hex; rh; screw
NUT, machine screw; steel; NF; hex; rh; screw
No. 10; 32 threads per in. (IMO 50).
NUT, machine screw: steel; NF, sq; rh; screw No.
8; 36 threads per in.
NUT, regular: steel; black; semifinished; FS FFB-571; NC; hex; Type A2; rh; 1/4 in.; 20 threads
per in. (IMO 50).
NUT (Supplied under Stock No. 913 43-4445.030.
200).
NUT, regular: steel; black; semifinished; FS FF- 1
B-571; NC; hex; Type A2; rh; 5/16 in.; 18 threads
per in. (IMO 25).
per in. (IMO 25).
NUT (Supplied under Stock No. 913 43-4445.040.
160).
per in. (IMO 25).
259
1
8
2
2
1
4
20

Code
No.
Part No.

Code
No.
Federal supply
class and item
identification No.
Description
Part No.
913
43-4445.050.130
770
04105
222-7222
913
43-4489-030.280
770
04-601
5310-222-7217
913
43-4489.035.240
674
X250-1
5310-265-9214
770
04-602
.................................
913
43-4489.040.240
770
04603
5310-265-9215
913
43-4489.045.200
770
04-604
5310-265-9216
913
43-4489.050.200
770
04-605
5310-265-9217
913
43-4489.070.160
770
04-608
5310-265-9220
913
434519.012.240
623
115596
199-6562

per in.
NUT, regular: steel; black; semifinished; FS FFB-571; NF; hex; Type A2; rh; 1/4 in.; 28 threads
per in. (IMO 100).
NUT, regular: steel; black; semifinished; FS FF-B571; NF; hex; Type A2; rh; 5/16 in.; 24 threads
per in. (IMO 100).
NUT (Supplied under Stock No. 913 43-4489.035
240).
per in. (IMO 25).
per in.
per in.
per in. (IMO 5).
NUT, regular: steel; cadmium plated; semifinished;
260
Quantity
per
unit
26
...............
24
34
913
43-4519.035.180
770
53-27
431-4347
912
42-6880.050.100
770
07-5
5315-010-8634
770
07-3
...........................
912
42-6880.100.200
770
07-41
912
42-6880.100.300
770
07-50
912
42-7100.003.050
770
010-201
011-3389
912
42-7100.003.070
770
010-202
011-1828
912
42-7100.010.070
674
X-74
010-3573
912
42-7100.020.130
770
010-30
010-3585
912
42-7100.020.150
770
010-31
010-3586
912
42-7100.070.100
770
010-98
010-0359
912
42-7100.090.170
770
010-131
191-4365
910
910
910
910
08-4700.300.055
08-4700.700.070
08-4700.700.7100
08-4700.700.250
770
770
770
770
19-87
019-11
019-15
019-35
448-0856
...........................
...........................
...........................
FS FF-B-571; NC; hex; Type A2; rh; bolt No.

12; 24 threads per in. (IMO 5).
NUT, regular: steel; cadmium plated; semifinished;
FS FF-B-571; NC; hex; Type A2; rh; 5/16 in.; 18
threads per in.
PIN, cotter: split; FS FF-P--386; steel; Type B; 1/16
x 1 in. (IMO 100).
PIN (Supplied under Stock No. 912 42-6880.050
100).
PIN, cotter: split; FS FF-P-386; steel; Type B;
1/8 x 2 in.
PIN, cotter: split; FS FF-P-386; steel; Type B;
1/8 x 3 in.
PIN, taper: steel; single; size No. 000, 0.125 in.
large end,1/2 in. long.
PIN, taper: steel; single; size No. 000, 0.125 in.
large end dia, 3/4 in. long.
PIN, taper: steel; single; size No. 1, 0.172 in. large
end dia, 3/4 in. long.
PIN, taper: steel; single; size No. 2, 0. 193 in. large
end dia, 1 1/4 in. long.
end dia, 1 in. long.
PLUG, expansion: cup-type; 9/16 in
...........................
PLUG, expansion: standard-type; 3/4 in. (IMO 10).............
PLUG, expansion: standard-type; 1 in 12 .......................
PLUG, expansion: standard-type, 21/2 in. (IMO 10)...........
261
15
3
.......
4
1
1
1
3
1
1
2
2
1
2
1

Code
No.
Part No.

Code
No.
Federal supply
class and item
identification No.
914
45-6040.500.001
770
011-1
187-4206
914
45-6040.500.003
770
011-252
187-4207
770
011-2
...........................
914
45-6040.500.004
770
011-3
010-3867
914
45-6040.500.010
770
011-206
4730-263-3125
914
45-6068.500.001
770
011-101
914
45-6068.500.004
770
011-103
4730-263-3123
...........................
914
45-6068.500.005
770
011-104
4310-263-3120
910
17-7624.270.170
770
Description
Part No.
86-27
2920-243-5087

PLUG, pipe: cast iron; 125 lb pressure; FS WWP-471; threaded; sq hd; black; Type I, 1/8 in.
(IMO 5)
PLUG, pipe: east iron; 125 lb pressure; FS WWP-471; threaded; sq hd; black; Type I, 1/4 in.
PLUG (Supplied under Stock No. 914 45-6040.500.
003).
PLUG, pipe: cast iron; 125 lb pressure; FS WWP-471; threaded; sq hd; black; Type I, 3/8 in.
(IMO 5).
PLUG, pipe: east iron; 125 lb pressure; FS WWP-471; threaded; sq hd; black; Type I, 1 in.
PLUG, pipe: malleable iron; 150 lb pressure; FS
WW-P-471; threaded; countersunk hd; black;
1/8 in.
PLUG, pipe: malleable iron; 150 lb pressure;
threaded; hex socket; FS WW-P-471; black;
Type I, 1/2 in.
PLUG, pipe: malleable iron; 150 lb pressure;
threaded; hex socket; FS WW-P-471; black;
Type I; 1/2 in.
PLUG, spark: shielded; industrial resistor; normal;
Champion or equal; Type XEJ-8; 14 mm thread
262
Quantity
per
unit
1
1
6
4
913
43-6710.030.070
674
X-1627
...........................
913
43-6720.035.100
770
03-414
496-8346
913
43-6782.035.070
770
34-346
...........................
913
43-6792 030.040
770
02-1
496-8395
913
43-6792.030.060
770
02-3
...........................
913
43-6792.030.070
770
34-351
...........................
770
02-4
...........................
...........................
913
43-6792.035.050
770
02-16
913
43-6792.035.060
770
02-17
770
34-415
...........................
913
43-6792.040.070
770
02-34
...........................
913
43-6792.040.170
770
02-39
...........................
913
43-6792.040.270
770
02-43
...........................
913
43-6792. 045.100
770
02-54
...........................
size; 13/16 in. hex size; 2% in. installed height; 3/8

in. reach.
SCREW, cap: steel; NC; Allen hd; 1/4 in. dia,3/4
in. long; 20 threads per in.
SCREW, cap: steel; NC; fillister hd; 5/16 in. dia, 1
in. long; 18 threads per in.
SCREW, cap: steel; NC; hex hd; cadmium plated;
NS 42S5, class 2, free fit; 5/16 in. dia. 3/4 in. long;
18 threads per in.
SCREW, cap: steel; NC; hex hd; heat treated;
in. dia, 5/8 in. long; 20 threads per in.
SCREW, cap: steel, NC; hex hd; heat treated;
in. dia, 3/4 in. long; 20 threads per in.
in. dia, 3 in. long; 20 threads per in. (IMO 100).
SCREW (Supplied under Stock No. 913 43-6792.
030.070).
5/16 in. dia, 1/2 in. long; 18 threads per in.
SCREW (Supplied under Stock No. 913 43-6792.
035. 080).
7/16 in. dia, 1 in. long: 14 threads per in.
263
4
8
13
33
2
3
19
12
4
5
2
4

Code
No.
Part No.

Code
No.
Federal supply
class and item
identification No.
Description
Part No.
913
43-6792.045.130
770
02-55
...........................
913
43-6792.045.170
770
02-57
496-8399
913
43-6792.050.350
770
02-79
...........................
913
43-6792.060.100
770
02-99
431-4576
913
43-6777.030.050
770
02-2
...........................
913
43-6777.035.070
770
02-18
...........................
913
43-6777.035.080
770
02-19
...........................
913
43-6777.035.100
770
02-20
...........................
913
43-777.035.150
770
02-22
...........................
913
43-6777.040.100
770
02-36
...........................
913
43-6777.040.130
770
02-37
...........................

7/16 in. dia 11/4 in. long; 14 threads per in.
1/2 in. dia, 31/2, in. long; 13 threads per in.
5/8 in. dia, 1 in. long; 11 threads per in.
SCREW, cap: steel; NC; hex hd; NS 4285, class 2
free fit; 1/4 in. dia, 1/2 in. long; 20 threads per in.
(IMO 100).
SCREW, cap: steel; NC; hex hd; NS 4285; class 2
(IMO 100).
SCREW, cap: steel; NC; hex hd; NS 42S5, class 2
SCREW, cap: steel; NC; hex hd; NS 4285; class 2
free fit;5/16 in. dia, 1 in long; 18 threads per in.
SCREW, cap: steel; NC; hex hd; NS 4285, class 2
free fit; 5/16 in. dia. 11/2 in. long; 18 threads per in.
SCREW, cap: steel; NC; hex hd; NS 4285, class 2,
free fit; 3/8 in. dia, 1 in, long; 16 threads per in.
(IMO 100).
SCREW, cap: steel; NC; hex hd; NS 4285, class 2,
264
Quantity
per
unit
2
2
8
7
16
32
30
2
6
22
52
913
43-6777.040.150
770
02-38
...........................
913
43-6777.040.230
770
02-41
...........................
913
43-6777.050.100
770
02-69
...........................
913
43-6777.050.130
770
02-70
...........................
913
43-6777.050.150
770
02-71
...........................
913
43-6834.030.050
770
02-502
...........................
913
43-6834.030.060
770
02-503
...........................
913
43-6834.030.070
770
02-504
431-4680
913
43-6834.035.070
770
02-518
...........................
913
43-6834.040.080
770
2-535
...........................
913
43-6834.040.130
770
02537
...........................
913
43-6834.040.200
770
34-414
...........................
913
43-6834.050.100
770
02-569
...........................
913
43-6834.050.130
770
02-570
...........................
913
43-6834.050.150
770
02-571
...........................
free fit; 3/8 in. dia, 11/4 y in. long; 16 threads per in.
(IMO 100).
SCREW, cap: steel; NC;. hex hd; NS 42S5; class 2
SCREW, cap: steel; NC; hex hd; NS 42S5; class 2
SCREW, cap: steel; NC; hex hd; NS 42S5, class 2
free fit; 1/2 in. dia, 1 in. long; 13 threads per in.
SCREW, cap: steel; NC; hex hd; NS 42S5, class 2,
free fit; 1/2 in. dia, 11/4 in. long, 13 threads per in.
SCREW, cap: steel; NC;. hex hd; NS 42S5, class 2
SCREW, cap: steel; NF; hex hd; heat treated;
SCREW, cap: steel, NF; hex hd; heat treated;
SCREW, cap: steel; NF, hex hd; heat treated;
265
2
2
2
1
3
8
8
4
137
8
3
4
38
4
8

Code
No.
Part No.

Code
No.
Federal supply
class and item
identification No.
913
43-6834.050.170
770
02-572
...........................
913
43-6834.050.250
770
34-417
...........................
913
43-6834.050.270
770
02-576
496-8460
913
43-6834.060.300
770
02-607
...........................
913
43-6830.040.150
770
02-538
021-4100
913
43-6844.035.100
770
03-929
...........................
913
43-6850.020.020
770
03-2001
014-5366
913
43-7245.100.040
770
03-90
496-8493
913
43-7290.100.050
674
X-189
5305-011-0487
770
03-92
...........................
913
43-7291.035.060
Description
Part No.
431-4776

1/2 in. dia, 23/4 in. long, 20 threads per in.
SCREW, cap: steel; NF; hex hd; NS 42S5, class 2,
SCREW, cap: steel; NF; rd hd; 5/16 in. dia, 1 in. long;
24 threads per in.
SCREW, drive: steel; FS FF-S-107; Type U;
style 1P; rd hd; gage No. 2, 3/16 in. long.
SCREW, machine: FS FF-S-91; steel; NC; flat
fillister hd; bright; size No. 10, 3/8 in. long; 24
threads per in.
SCREW, machine: FS FF-S-91; steel; NC; oval
fillister hd; bright; size No. 10, 1/2 in. long;
threads per in.
SCREW (Supplied under Stock No. 913 43-7290
100.050).
fillister hd; bright; 5/16 in. dia, 5/8 in. long; 18
threads per in.
266
Quantity
per
unit
2
8
4
2
2
32
4
2
10
24
913
43-7292.060.040
699
T11S6-6
913
43-7292.080.020
606
X-3031
013-1949
913
43-7405.060.030
476
S2400B206
010-0736
913
43-7405.080.060
476
S2400B324
5305-010-0752
913
43-7429.080.035
623
453281
...........................
913
43-7500.030.150
770
03-704
...........................
913
43-7506.100.060
600
855493
010-0661
913
43-7508.008.050
699
T1S8-8
022-5543
913
43-7508.010.065
606
X-3029
...........................
913
43-7710.100.030
476
82400B404
...........................
913
43-7710.100.035
476
S2400B406
...........................
913
43-7710.100.070
476
S2400B414
...........................
010-0766

fillister hd; cadmium plated; size No. 6, 3/8 in.
long; 32 threads per in.
SCREW, machine: FS FF-S-91; steel; NC; rd hd;
bright; size No. 6, 1/4 in. long; 32 threads per in.
(IMO 25).
cadmium plated; size No. 8, 5/8 in. long; 32 threads
per in. (IMO 100).
SCREW, machine: FS FF-S-91; steel; NF; flat
fillister hd; bright; 1/4 in. dia, 11/2, in. long; 28
threads per in.
SCREW, machine: FS FF-8-91; steel; NF; oval
fillister hd; bright; size No. 10, 5/8 in. long; 32.
threads per in.
SCREW, machine: FS FF-S-91; steel; NF; oval
fillister hd; cadmium plated; size No. 8,1/2 in.
SCREW, machine: FS FF-8-91; steel; NF; oval
SCREW, machine: FS FF-91; steel; NF; rd hd;
SCREW, machine: FS FF-S91; steel; NF; rd hd;
bright; size No. 10, 5/16 in long; 32 threads per in.
SCREW, machine: FS FF-S-91; steel; NF; rd hd;
bright; size No. 10, 3/4 in. long; 32 threads per-in.
267
1
1
10
3
4
8

Code
No.
Part No.

Code
No.
Federal supply
class and item
identification No.
913
43-7710.100.110
476
S2400B418
010-0769
913
43-7710.100.150
476
S2400B419
010-0772
913
43-7930.010.050
770
03-1542
...........................
913
43-7992.040.150
770
014-233
...........................
913
43-8053.130.030
913
43-8105.100.040
910
17-8463.250.100
913
43-9840.500.030
770
06-67
010-3339
913
43-9840.500.035
770
06-68
5310-010-3340
770
20-68
...........................
...........................
770
Description
Part No.
03-1537
5305-011-6500
...........................

bright; size No. 10, 1 1/8 in. long; 32 threads per in.
bright; size No. 10, 1 1/2 in. long; 32 threads per in.
SCREW, self-tapping steel; Type F; Parker-Kalon
or equal; binding hd; size No. 10, 1/2 in. long; 24
threads per in.
SCREW, set: FS FF-S-103; steel; NC; headless;
slotted; Type II, oval point, style 3; single; 3/8
in. dia, 1 in. long; 16 threads per in.
SCREW, set: FS FF-S-103; steel; NF; Allen hd; 2
Type III; cup point, style 4; single; 1/4 in. dia,
1/4 in. long; 28 threads per in.
SCREW, sheet metal: self-tapping; steel; Type A;
Parker-Kalon or equal; rd hd; gage No. 10, 3/8 in.
long (IMO 100).
SLEEVE, rubber; terminal; 0.250 in. id, 1 in. long;
for 10-8 AWG; Packard 284 or equal.
WASHER, cold rolled steel; SAE; rd; cut; bright;
bolt size 1/4 in., 5/8 in. od, 1/16 in. thick (IMO 100).
WASHER: cold rolled steel; SAE; rd; cut; bright;
bolt size 5/16 in.; 11/16 in. od, 1/16 in. thick (IMO 100).
WASHER (Supplied under Stock No. 913 43-9840
500.035).
268
Quantity
per
unit
1
1
4
2
10
135
913
43-9840.500.041
770
06-69
010-3341
913
43-9840.500.045
770
06-70
010-3342
913
43-9840.500.051
770
20-430
010-3343
913
43-9840.500.070
770
06-9
010-3346
913
43-9840.501.006
606
IGE-15
...........................
913
43-9060.500.035
770
20-427
186-9342
913
43-9351.500.035
770
20-460
011-5548
913
43-9405.500.020
600
855064
...........................
913
43-9532.500.090
674
X-1048
5310-0106497
770
05-5
...........................
770
05-25
...........................
606
12X-196
...........................
770
05-49
010-3319
674
X-1050
...........................
770
20-40-2
...........................
913
43-9533.500.030
WASHER: cold rolled steel; SAE; rd; out; bright

bolt size 3/8 in.; 13/16 in. od, 1/16 in. thick.
bolt side 7/16 in.; 15/16 in. od, 1/16 in. thick.
bolt size 1/2 in.; 15/16 in. od, 3/32 in. thick.
bolt size 3/4 in.; 1 1/2 in. od, 1/8 in. thick.
screw No. 6; 3/8 in. od, 1/32 in. thick.
WASHER: copper; rd; std; bolt size 5/16 in.; 7/8 in.
od, 1/16 in. thick.
WASHER, lock: high carbon steel; Shakeproof;
internal teeth; standard screw and bolt; bright;
5/16 in. (IMO 100).
WASHER, look: spring steel; regular; heavyweight; SAE; black; 3/16 in.
WASHER, look: spring steel; regular; std wt;
SAE; bright; size No. 10.
500.090).
500.090).
500.090).
WASHER, look: spring steel; regular; std wt.;
SAE; bright; 1/4 in. (IMO 100).
WASHER (Supplied under Stock No. 913-439533.500.030).
500.030).
269
20
10
16
2
1
2
15
10
18
.........
.........
.........
43
.........
.........

Code
No.
913
Part No.
43-9533.500.033

Code
No.
Federal supply
class and item
identification No.
Description
Part No.
770
05-50
5310-010-3320
770
05-107
...........................
913
43-9533.500.040
770
05-51
...........................
913
43-9533.500.044
770
05-52
010-3322
913
43-9533.500.050
770
05-53
010-3323
770
05-110
...........................
913
43-9533.500.061
770
05-55
010-3325
913
43-9533.500.101
770
05-74
012-1326
913
43-9549.500.060
606
12X-194
913
43-9550.500.040
623
1918619
...........................
913
43-9215.500.021
770
06-65
187-5341
913
43-9215.500.036
770
06-3
107-5343

WASHER, lock: spring steel; regular; std wt;
SAE; bright; 5/16 in.
500.033).
SAE; bright; 7/16 in.
500.050).
WASHER, lock: spring steel; regular; std wt; SAE;
bright; 5/8 in. (IMO 25).
bright; 1 in. (IMO 50).
cadmium plated; size No. 6.
cadmium plated; 3/8 in.
WASHER, wrought iron; rd; std; bright; JAN-W1085; Type A; bolt size 3/64 in. thick.
WASHER, wrought iron; rd; std; bright; JAN-W-
270
Quantity
per
unit
84
.........
112
11
7
.........
7
1
1
2
6
1

Code
No.
Part No.

Code
No.
Federal supply
class and item
identification No.
Description
Part No.
913
43-9215.500.041
770
06-4
913
43-9215.500.051
770
06-71
913
43-9215.500.061
770
06-73
913
43-9215.500.071
770
06-9
910
15-2559.380.100
ORD
H007-0100160
...........
.......................
ORD
H007-0100220
...........
.......................
.......................
1085; Type A; bolt size 5/16 in.;7/8 in. od; 5/64 in.
thick.
187-5344WASHER, wrought iron; rd; std; bright; JAN-W12
1085; Type A; bolt size 3/8 in.; 1 in. od, 5/64 in.
thick.
187-5347
WASHER: wrought iron; rd; std; bright; JAN-W- 36
1085; Type A; bolt size 1/2 in.; 11/8 in. od, 7/64 in.
thick.
187-5349
WASHER: wrought iron; rd; std; bright; JAN-W1085; Type A; bolt size 5/8 in.; 13/4 in. od, 9/64; in.
thick.
187-5351
WASHER: wrought iron; rd; std; bright; JAN-W1085; Type A; bolt size 3/4 in.; 2 in. od, 5/32 in.
thick.
BULK MATERIAL
191-6441
CABLE, primary: single conductor; rubber insuIated; braided; flexible; No. 16 AWG; 19 x 29
stranding (ft).
(CABLE, Part No. 61-306-25, will be supported
by Stock No. 910 15-2559.380. 100).
...........................
HOSE, rubber: radiator; 1 3/4 in. id; 3 ply; 3 ft
long (ft).
(HOSE, Part No. 73-303-1, will be supported
by Stock No. ORD H007-0100160).
...........................
HOSE, rubber: radiator; 1 3/4 in. id; 3 ply; 3 ft
long (ft).
(HOSE, Part No. 73-305-5, will be supported
by Stock No. ORD H007-0100220).
271
Quantity
per
unit
.......
.......
.......

Code
No.
Part No.

Code
No.
Federal supply
class and item
identification No.
Description
Part No.
914
448094.030.035
...........
.......................
...........................
914
44-8094.035.035
...........
.......................
...........................
910
22-8011.500.380
...........
.......................
1989105
BULK MATERIAL-Continued
TUBING: copper; seamless; Type N; annealed;
for fuel and lubrication tubes; for solder-joints or
flared-tube fittings; 1/4 in. nominal size, 0.250 in.
actual od, 0.035 in. wall thickness; F8 WW-T799 (ft).
(TUBING, Part No. 55-29-63, will be supported by Stock No. 914 448094. 03. 035).
TUBING: copper; seamless; Type N; annealed; for
fuel and lubrication tubes; for solder-joints or
flared-type fittings; 5/16 in. nominal size, 0.312 in.
actual od, 0.035 in. wall thickness; FS WW-T799 (ft).
(TUBING, Part No. 55-2-2, will be supported
by Stock No. 914 4i8094.035.035).
WIRE: steel carbon; annealed; bare; FS QQ-W461; form I; finish I; grade FS 1045; 0.0625 in.
dia; 5 lb reel (rl).
(LOCK WIRE, Part No. 61-5, will be supported by Stock No. 910 22-8011.500.380).
272
Quantity
per
unit
.......
.......
.......
Engineer stock No.

Fig.
No.
Index
No.
Code
No.
Part
No.
Section II. PARTS LIST

Federal supply
class and item
Code
Part
identification
No.
No.
4
4
4
4
4
10
10
17
17
17
17
17
17
17
17
17
(1)
770
(2)
770
62-221-4
(3)
770
62-290
(4)
770
62-300
(5)
770
62-48
................................................................
................................................................
..................
770
167-28
..................
770
34-343
..................
770
34-346
..................
770
34-349
..................
770
34-351
..................
770
34-395
..................
770
34-408
..................
770
34-413
..................
770
61-481-19
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
62-317
62-303
62-290
62-300
62-48
1A73-301
A73-301
167-28
34-343
34-346
34-349
34-351
34-395
34-408
34-413
61-481-19
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
17
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
17
17
17
770
61-481-17
770
61-481-17
770
770
770
61-481-17
61-483-1
61-481-13
770
770
770
61-481-17
61-483-1
61-481-13
273
Description
PLATE, name ..............................

PLATE, data ................................
PLATE, transportation..................
PLATE, instruction .......................
PLATE, serial number ..................
HOSE, air.....................................
HOSE, air.....................................
CAPACITOR, generator...............
SCREW, cap................................
SCREW, cap................................
SCREW, cap................................
SCREW, cap................................
SCREW, cap................................
SCREW, cap................................
SCREW, cap................................
STRAP, bond, magnetic switch to
frame.
STRAP, bond, instrument panel ...
to frame.
STRAP, bond, radiator to frame ...
STRAP, bond, support to oil pan ..
STRAP, bond, support to upper ...
oil pan.
Quantity
per
unit
2
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
1
6
4
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
2
1
Engineer stock No.

Fig.
No.
17
17
17
17
17
17
17
17
17
17
17
17
17
18
18
18
18
18
Index
No.
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
..................
Code
No.
Part
No.

Code
No.
Part
No.
Federal supply
class and item
identification
770
61-481-20
770
61-481-20
...........................
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
20-460
2-460-1
20-460-2
20-460-4
20-460-6
20-460-8
55-764
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
20-460
20-460-1
20-460-2
20-460-4
20-460-6
20-460-8
5-764
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
770
55-764-1
770
55-764-1
...........................
770
55-74-2
770
55-764-2
...........................
770
55-764-3
770
55-764-3
...........................
770
61-486-38
770
61-486-38
...........................
770
61-486-36
770
61-486-36
...........................
600
770
770
896
770
1539442
79-169
83-126
200X5
A55-2-48
770
770
770
81-190-2
79-169
83-126
182-14
A55-2-48
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
770
274
Description
STRAP, bond, regulator guard to .
generator stud.
WASHER, lock.............................
WASHER, look ............................
WASHER, look ............................
WASHER, lock.............................
WASHER, lock.............................
WASHER, lock.............................
WIRE, ignition, No. 1 spark plug .
to distributor.
to distributor.
to distributor.
to distributor.
WIRE ASSEMBLY, ammeter to ...
regulator.
WIRE ASSEMBLY, generator to ..
regulator.
PUMP, fuel...................................
CLAMP, carburetor inlet tube .......
CLAMP, tube................................
CONNECTION.............................
LINE ASSEMBLY, fuel pump to ...
carburetor.
Quantity
per
unit
1
1
6
4
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
18
..................
18
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
19
20
20
20
20
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
21
25
..................
1
2
5
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
1
3
4
5
6
7
10
11
15
18
3
770
A55-2-103
770
A55-2-103
...........................
770
69-316
896
400X5
770
83-126
770
150-30
770
A55-2-103
770
69-316
770
182-15
770
74-122
770
83-230
770
34-311
770
20-447
770
53-259
.........................................
770
60-175-5
896
400X5
770
41-259
600
1539442
770
16-997
770
08-346
770
24-379
770
14-975
770
16-1144-1
770
43-169
770
65-1036
770
125-126
770
39-2232
699
0-11362
770
16-1174
896
200X4
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
69-316
182-35
83-126
150-30
A55-2-103
69-316
182-15
74-122
83-230
34-311
20-447
53-259
43-271
60-175-5
182-35
41-259
81-190-2
16-997
08-346
24-379
14-975
16-1144-1
43-169
65-1036
125-126
39-2232
84-580
16-1174
182-13
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
275
LINE ASEMBLY, tank to fuel........

pump.
TANK, fuel ...................................
ELBOW........................................
CLAMP, tube................................
GROMMET ..................................
TUBE ASSEMBLY .......................
TANK, fuel. ..................................
CONNECTOR..............................
PACKING.....................................
STRAP.........................................
SCREW, cap................................
WASHER .....................................
NUT .............................................
SCREEN......................................
GAGE, fuel level ..........................
ELBOW........................................
BELT, generator drive ..................
PUMP, fuel...................................
GASKET ......................................
RIVET ..........................................
SPRING .......................................
COVER ........................................
GASKET ......................................
FILTER ELEMENT, air.................
CONNECTION, air filter ...............
RING, packing..............................
SUPPORT, filter...........................
CARBURETOR............................
GASKET, carburetor ....................
CONNECTOR..............................
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
1
1
2
1
1
2
Engineer stock No.

Fig.
No.
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
25
26
26
26
26
26
26
Index
No.
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
16
18
19
21
23
25
26
27
28
29
30
3
4
5
7
8
9
Code
No.
770
770
770
896
770
770
770
896
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
896
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
Part
No.
83-243
79-186
A55-29-67
400X4
116-190
182-145
182-157
6891
79-41
A55-29-76
991M1
410X
B5704
53-315
74-131
A55-2-24
400X5
15-416
43-265
B1234
B1239
B1414
B1238
238XC
B1236

Code
No.
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
Part
No.
83-243
79-186
A55-29-67
182-33
116-190
182-145
182-157
52-1
7-41
A55-29-76
991M-1
410-X
B-5704
53-315
74-131
A55-2-24
182-35
15-416
43-265
B1234
B1239
B1414
B1238
238XC
B1236
Federal supply
class and item
identification
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
276
Description
CLAMP ........................................
CLAMP ........................................
LINE, air, 1/4 x 50 ........................
ELBOW, 1/4 x 1/8 M x 90 ...........
SHUTTERSTAT...........................
ELBOW, 1/8 M x 1/8 F x 90 ........
TEE, 1/8 M x 1/8 F x 1/4 ..............
COCK, drain.................................
CLAMP ........................................
LINE, air, 1/4 x 40 ........................
SHUTTER ASSEMBLY................
AIR CYLINDER............................
ROD, shutter control ....................
NUT, special ................................
PACKING.....................................
LINE, air, 5/16 x 30 .....................
ELBOW, 5/16 x 1/8 M x 90 .........
COCK, shutoff..............................
AIR FILTER .................................
BODY, top filter ............................
PLUG, filler ..................................
GASKET, filler plug ......................
FELT, with oiler ............................
FELT............................................
DISK, filter....................................
Quantity
per
unit
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
6
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
26
26
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
10
11
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
770
238XB
770
770
B1235
770
770
C2007
770
770
864XA
770
770
866XA
770
770
865XA
770
770
368X
770
...............................................................
770
370XB
770
770
211X
770
770
291XB
770
770
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
27
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
23
24
25
26
27
28
32
B2554A
770
770
B2555
770
...............................................................
770
B2556
770
...............................................................
...............................................................
...............................................................
...............................................................
770
B2557
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
B5697
B3600-1R
B3600--1L
363XB
363XA
363XC
363XD
C2008
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
238XB
B1235
C-2007
864-XA
866-XA
865-XA
368-X
369-XA
370-XB
211-X
291-XB
B2554-A
B-2555
394-XE
B-2556
354-XD
B-2554-1
329-XD
B-2554-2
B-2557
291-XA
B-697
B-3600-1R
B-36001L
363-XB
363-XA
363-XC
363-XD
C-2008
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
277
SCREEN, filter .............................

BODY, bottom filter ......................
BODY, cylinder ............................
PISTON HEAD, small ..................
EXPANDER, piston cup ...............
WASHER, piston cup ...................
CUP, piston..................................
PISTON HEAD, large...................
FELT, lubricator ...........................
SPRING .......................................
ROD, piston (Includes piston head
369-XA).
ARM, rocker (Includes items 11
through 19)
PIN, bearing, 3/8
PLUG, expansion .....................
PIN, bearing, 5/16 ........................
PIN, bearing, drilled..................
BELLCRANK, rh ......................
BLOCK, bearing.......................
BELLCRANK, lh.......................
PIN, cotter, special, 3/22 x 1 3/4
BLOCK, connecting rod
BLOCK, shutter............................
CLIP, look, rh ...............................
CLIP, lock, lh................................
RETAINER, dust cap ...................
CAP, dust.....................................
FELT, dust cap ............................
WASHER, dust cap .....................
HEAD, cylinder.............................
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Engineer stock No.

Fig.
No.
Index
No.
Code
No.
Part
No.

Code
No.
Part
No.
Federal supply
class and item
identification
27
27
27
27
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
33
34
35
37
3
5
6
7
11
12
15
18
20
21
22
25
26
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
336X
370XA
363XE
329XA
65-1044
4-223
16-1176
71-564
74-121-1
34-410
52-14
47-758
65-1034
39-2328
42-133
65-1041
65-1040
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
336-X
370-XA
363-XE
329-XA
65-1044
4-223
16-1176
71-564
74-121-1
34-410
52-14
47-758
65-1034
39-2328
42-133
65-1041
65-1040
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
28
28
31
31
31
27
30
1
2
5
770
770
770
770
770
16-1148
156-286
74-110-4
83-342
61-452-5
770
770
770
770
770
16-1148
156-286
74-110-4
83-342
61-452-5
31
770
61-452-6
770
61-452-6
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
278
Description
GASKET, cylinder head ...............
FELT, bearing lubricator...............
RING, felt retainer ........................
BRACKET, mounting ...................
PIPE, radiator inlet .......................
CAP, radiator ...............................
GASKET, radiator cap..................
RADIATOR ..................................
REBOUND UNIT..........................
BOLT, special ..............................
COCK, drain.................................
ROD, fan guard............................
ELBOW, radiator..........................
SUPPORT, fan guard...................
FAN .............................................
CONNECTION, radiator-to-pump.
CONNECTION, radiator water ....
inlet.
GASKET ......................................
GUARD, fan .................................
PAD, battery clamp; rubber ..........
CLAMP, battery hold-down...........
LEAD ASSEMBLY, electrical: ....
battery to battery.
battery to magnetic switch.
Quantity
per
unit
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
2
1
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
2
1
1
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
31
7
8
11
12
15
16
17
18
19
20
ORD
770
770
623
770
770
770
770
ORD
770
H015-0572884
74-128
74-121-1
1119751
34-413
20-460-2
61-481-19
119-191
51A-1562-150
61-452-4
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
117-69
74-128
74-121-1
76-255
34-413
20-460-2
61-481-19
119-191
204-89
61-452-4
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
1
4
5
7
8
9
10
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
23
24
25
26
27
623
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
623
770
770
770
770
770
1118746
61-481-20
20-40-4
34-421
18-7-30
20-460-2
39-2339
47-608-3
20-463-4
34-396
53-300
20460-5
53-298
34-403
1105964
39-2261
20-40-6
61-483-1
47-753
53-307
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
116-206
61-481-20
20-464
34-421
167-30
20-62
39-2339
47-608-3
20-463-4
34-396
53-300
20-460-5
53-298
34-403
108-177
392261
204606
61-483-1
47-753
53-307
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
279
BATTERY, storage ......................

PAD, battery ................................
PAD, bumper ...............................
SWITCH, magnetic ......................
SCREW, cap, special...................
LOCKWASHER, special, 1/4 .......
STRAP, bond ...............................
BOX, battery. ...............................
SULPHURIC ACID, electrolyte.....
ground to rear engine support.
REGULATOR...............................
STRAP, bond ...............................
WASHER, lock, special................
FILTER, bypass ...........................
SUPPORT, regulator....................
SUPPORT, adjusting, generator ..
NUT, hex, special.........................
NUT, hex, special.........................
SCREW, locking ..........................
GENERATOR ..............................
BRACKET, generator...................
STRAP, bond ...............................
ROD, generator............................
NUT, hex, special.........................
4
2
8
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
6
1
1
3
3
2
3
2
1
1
1
3
1
1
2
Engineer stock No.

Fig.
No.
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
34
37
37
37
37
37
Index
No.
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
38
39
40
41
3
4
7
8
9
10
11
12
1
2
5
6
7
Code
No.
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
623
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
Part
No.
A61-306-47
61-486-36
53-318
34-343
20-460-1
53-272
20-460
61-481-13
34-420
34-367
105-434
167-28
53-319
22-384
1109168
61-107-31
34-400
61-452-8
53-299
105-426
83-238
39-2265
39-2229
55-51-38
182-209
39-2264

Code
No.
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
700
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
Part
No.
A61-306-47
61-486-36
53-318
34-343
2046-1
53-272
20-460
61-481-13
34-420
34-367
105-434
167-28
53-319
22-384
107-123
61-107-31
34400
61-452-8
53-299
105-426
83-238
39-2265
39-2229
55-51-38
182-209
39-2264
Federal supply
class and item
identification
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
280
Description
LEAD, electrical ...........................
LEAD, electrical ...........................
NUT, hex, special.........................
NUT, hex, special.........................
WASHER, look, special ...............
STRAP, bond ...............................
STUD, generator body .................
CAPACITOR................................
NUT, hex,. special........................
SPACER, rubber..........................
STARTING MOTOR.....................
CABLE, starter .............................
U-BOLT........................................
CABLE, ground ............................
NUT, self-locking..........................
STUD...........................................
CLAMP ........................................
SUPPORT, front ..........................
BRACKET, front...........................
TUBE, air cleaner.........................
ELBOW........................................
SUPPORT, side ...........................
Quantity
per
unit
2
2
2
1
2
4
2
1
1
3
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
37
38
31
9
12
13
14
15
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
................
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
41
3
6
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
606
770
770
770
770
770
623
770
39-2230
182-133
1A551-54
182-209
121-5
83-248
13826
20-477
125-115
53-304
20-461
83-136
105-61
20-460-2
34-351
16-1060
A27-1554
28-801
27-1554
26600
17-488-2
207-12
IAU401OUT
182-145
55-7643
55-764-2
55-764-1
55-764
1119751
61-452-6
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
39-2230
182-133
IA55-1-54
182-20
121-5
83-248
138-26
20-477
125-115
53-304
20-461
83-136
105-61
204602
34-351
16-1060
A27-1554
28301
27-1554
26-600
17-488-2
207-12
110-74
182-145
5764-3
55-764-2
55-764-1
55-764
76-255
61-452-6
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
448-0877
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
281
BRACKET, side support...............

ELBOW, restricted .......................
TUBE ASS88EMBLY ...................
ELBOW........................................
TERMINAL...................................
CLAMP ........................................
PLUG A8BSEMBLY .....................
WASHER, special ........................
O-RING........................................
NUT, hex, special.........................
CLAMP ........................................
STUD .......................................
BOLT, hex hd, special..................
GASKET ......................................
SHAFT ASSEMBLY.....................
COUPLING ..............................
SHAFT, drive ...........................
GEAR, drive shaft ....................
PIN, roll, 3/16 x 7/8...................
ADAPTER....................................
DISTRIBUTOR.............................
ELBOW........................................
CABLE, ignition, No. 4 ................
SWITCH, magnetic ......................
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Engineer stock No.

Fig.
No.
Index
No.
Code
No.
Part
No.

Code
No.
Part
No.
Federal supply
class and item
identification
38
770
A61-306-102 770
A61-306-102
...........................
38
770
A61-306-65
770
A61-306-65
...........................
38
38
38
38
38
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
7
8
9
10
11
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
16
17
18
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
896
770
770
770
A61306-97
61-107-31
61-481-19
34-413
20-460-2
60-180
53-312
151-262
20460-1
182-145
74-90
182-221
1A55-51-25
20-460
83-97
53-272
76-260
76-257
200X3
61-481-17
34-346
79-162
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
A61-306-97
61-107-31
61-481-19
34-413
20-460-2
60-180
53-312
151-262
20-460-1
182-145
74-90
182-221
1A55-51-25
20-460
83-97
53-272
76-260
76-257
182-12
61-481-17
34-346
79--162
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
282
Description
WIRE ASSEMBLY, ammeter to ...
magnetic switch.
WIRE ASSEMBLY, starting ........
switch to magnetic switch.
WIRE ASSEMBLY, ground ..........
STARTER CABLE .......................
STRAP, bond ...............................
SCREW, cap, hex hd, special ......
AMMETER...................................
NUT, starting switch .....................
PANEL, instrument ......................
ELBOW........................................
ORIFICE, dampening...................
FITTING, flexible..........................
TUBE ASSEMBLY .......................
CLAMP ........................................
NUT, hex, special.........................
SWITCH, starting .........................
SWITCH, ignition .........................
CONNECTOR..............................
STRAP, bond ...............................
BOLT, hex hd, special..................
CLAMP, 1/4 .................................
Quantity
per
unit
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
6
1
3
1
1
1
1
3
1
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
39
19
20
21
22
23
24
28
32
33
39
39
39
39
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
41
34
35
36
37
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
9
10
11
14
15
16
17
18
19
770
896
770
770
770
770
770
896
770
770
770
770
770
770
162
770
770
770
896
770
896
770
896
770
770
770
770
770
896
770
896
770
B79-10
400X4
A55-29-2
55-717-2
60-237-1
83-247
39-2267
200X3
1A16-18
160-20
A61-306-101
160-18
60-153-8
120-31
644-0-160-3-1-2
60-177-1
182-124
A55-2-93
200X5
A55-2-10
434X5
77-207
400X4
15-286
A55-29-93
39-2285
182-82
A55--29-9
200X4
182-188
6891
182-192
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
162
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
B79-10
182-33
A55-29-2
55-717-2
60-237-1
83-247
39-2267
182-13
1A160-18
160-20
A61-306-101
160-18
60-153-8
120-31
60-83
60-177-1
182-124
A55-2-93
182-14
A55-2-10
182-36
77-207
182-33
15-286
A55-29-93
39-2285
182-82
A55-29-9
182-13
182-188
52-1
182-192
4310-430-0085 .
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
283
CLAMP, 5/16 x 1/4.......................

ELBOW, 1/4 x 1/8 M x 90 ..........
TUBE ASSEMBLY ...................
TUBE, special ..............................
GAGE, water temperature............
CLAMP ........................................
BRACKET....................................
CONNECTOR..............................
LIGHT ASSEMBLY, pilot..........
LIGHT, incandescent ...............
LEAD, electrical .......................
LIGHT, pilot..................................
GAGE, oil pressure ......................
CONTROL, choke........................
GAGE, air pressure......................
HOURMETER..............................
TEE, 5/16 x 5/16 x 5/16................
TUBE ASSEMBLY .......................
CONNECTOR, 5/16 x 1/8 M.........
TUBE ASSEMBLY .......................
ELBOW, 5/16 x 1/4 x 90 ............
AIR FILTER, control line ..............
ELBOW, 1/4 x 1/8 x 90 ...............
VALVE, check and bleed .............
TUBE ASSEMBLY .......................
BRACKET, mounting ...................
TEE, 1/4 x 1/4 x 1/8 M..................
TUBE ASSEMBLY .......................
CONNECTOR, 1/4 x 1/8 M ..........
TEE, 1/8 F x 1/8 F x 1/8 M ..........
COCK, drain.................................
ELBOW, 1/8 F x 1/8 M x 45 ........
2
1
1
1
1
3
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
Engineer stock No.

Fig.
No.
41
41
41
41
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
Index
No.
20
23
25
26
4
5
6
7
8
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
18
19
20
21
23
24
26
27
29
30
Code
No.
770
896
770
476
476
476
476
476
476
476
896
476
476
476
476
476
476
476
476
476
476
476
476
476
476
476
Part
No.
A116-194
352X4
A55-29-63
GI90-100
G1810
G112
G1I827
HP50
GI121
GI829
W50X4
GI132
GI803
GI804
GI1801
GI800
RA55
RA151
RAB805
F65
T54
G812
86453B1
RA25
R82
R131

Code
No.
770
770
770
770
476
476
476
476
476
476
476
476
476
476
476
476
476
467
476
476
476
476
476
476
476
476
Part
No.
A116-194
182-52
A5-29-63
76-81-4
GI-810
GI-12
GI-827
HP-50
GI-21
GI-829
GI-6
GI-32
GI-803
GI-804
GI-801
GI-800
RA-55
RA-151
RAB-805
F-65
T-54
G-812
S6453B1
RA-25
R-82
R-131
Federal supply
class and item
identification
...........................
...........................
...........................
...........................
4310-428-0615
4310-428-0602
...........................
428-0616
4310-428-605
...........................
...........................
4310-428-0608
4310-428-3793
4310-428-0613
4310-428-0612
4280611
428-0625
...........................
...........................
...........................
428-0630
4310-428-3795
...........................
...........................
428-0629
428-0628
284
Description
SLOWDOWN A8SEMBLY ...........
ELBOW, 1/4 x 1/8 M x 45 ...........
TUBE ASSEMBLY .......................
PILOT, unloader...........................
CASTING, outer diaphragm .........
COUPLING, compression ........
PIN, valve plunger........................
NUT, valve lock............................
BRACKET, valve..........................
VALVE, unloader .........................
ELBOW, 1/8 x 1/4 ........................
SCREW, trip lever........................
TUBE, unloader valve ..................
TUBE, kickoff valve ......................
CASTING, frame..........................
VALVE, kickoff .............................
SCREW, adjusting .......................
SPRING, main .............................
ROD, valve plunger......................
BUSHING, trip lever .....................
WASHER, felt ..........................
LEVER, trip ..................................
NUT, lock .....................................
COVER, side ...............................
NUT, wing ....................................
SPRING, trip lever .......................
Quantity
per
unit
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
2
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
45
46
46
46
46
46
46
46
47
47
47
49
49
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
50
32
33
34
35
36
38
39
40
1
2
3
4
5
6
8
1
2
5
1
4
5
6
7
8
9
12
14
15
17
18
476
476
476
476
476
476
476
476
770
770
770
770
770
896
770
674
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
RAB3
R51
RAB800
RA47
RA73
T97
HP805
R110
34-407
53-297
17-508
8-284
125-118
6891
116-194
GC-802
A47-754
16-1075
770
770
15-323-1
31-455
54-287
125-69
54-296
180-9
A17-465
63-128
24-352
39-1695
17-465
54-297
476
476
476
476
476
476
476
476
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
69-315
71-563
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
RAB-3
R-51
RAB-800
RA-47
RA-73
T-97
HP-805
R-110
344.07
53-297
17-508
8-284
125-118
52-1
116-194
116-126-2
A47-754
16-1075
770
770
15-323-1
31-455
54-287
125-69
54-296
180-9
A17-465
63-128
24-352
39-1695
17-465
54-297
4310-428-0626
4310-428-0632
4310-428-0627
2855-248-9271
69-315
71-563
4310-430-0671
5330-234-8758
4310-430-0672
4310-430-0673
285
KEEPER, spring stud.........

SPRING, extension............
ARM, main.........................
PIN, pivot, main arm ..........
FOOT, mounting ................
CASTING, inner diaphragm
DISK, diaphragm plunger...
DIAPHRAGM, rubber.........
SCREW, stroke adjusting ..
NUT, looking ......................
PIN, plunger.......................
PLUNGER .........................
O RING..............................
COCK, shutoff....................
BODY, slowdown...............
GOVERNOR......................
ROD, control ......................
GASKET, mounting ...........
RECEIVER, air.............
AFTER COOLER .........
VALVE, service..................
RING, lock .........................
FITTING, retainer...............
PACKING ..........................
FITTING, slip .....................
REEL, hose .......................
LOCK PIN ASSEMBLY......
COLLAR, look pin ..............
SPRING, look pin...............
SUPPORT, lock pin ...........
PIN, look ............................
COUPLING, hose ..............
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
10
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

Fig
No.
50
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
51
Index
No.
19
1
2
6
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
25
28
29
32
37
38
40
45
46
Code
No.
Part No.
Code
No.
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
83-251
28-237
15-439
15-405-1
54-315
16-967
53-269
53-292
105-431
65-1033
22-377
16-1132
53-310
22-391
20-480
B20-1
161132
22-377
156-290
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
83-251
28-237
15-439
15-405-1
54-315
16-967
53-269
53-292
105-431
65-1033
22-377
16-1132
53-310
22-391
20-480
B20-1
16-1132
22-377
156-290
770
770
770
770
770
770
39-2330
105-435
83-250
71-563
15-350-1
33-562-7
770
770
770
770
770
770
39-2330
105-435
83-250
71-563
15-350-1
33-562-7
Federal supply
class and item
identification No.
Description
Part No.
5310-186-7403
286
CLAMP, hose.....................
COUPLING, hose end .......
VALVE, service..................
VALVE, safety ...................
FITTING, connection..........
GASKET, connection .........
NUT, self-looking, -20 ....
NUT, self-looking, -20 ....
STUD.................................
CONNECTION...................
SLEEVE.............................
PACKING ..........................
NUT, special ......................
SPACER............................
WASHER, spring ...............
WASHER, end ...................................
PACKING ..........................
SLEEVE.............................
GUARD, flywheel (includes brace)
BRACE ............................................
BRACE, engine support .....
STUD.................................
CLAMP, after cooler...........
AFTER COOLER ...............
COCK, drain ......................
NIPPLE, 1/4x 1 ..................
Quantity
per
unit
4
2
2
1
1
1
4
6
6
1
1
1
6
6
84
6
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
I
52
52
52
52
52
52
52
52
52
52
52
52
54
54
54
55
55
55
55
55
55
55
55
770
15 439
770
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
1
2
5
1
2
5
6
8
9
13
16
770
770
770
770
770
ir770
770
770
770
770
770
16-1181
14-995
49-68
4-219
33-178-18
61039
16-146
A10-367
20-390
54-342
73-303-1
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
15-439
A132
E21380
E26
E72
E2097
A6804
E21140
E2533
E2571
E2556
E2548
16-1181
14-995
49-68
4-219
33-178-18
65-1039
16-146
A10-367
20-390
54-342
73-303-1
55
55
55
55
55
55
55
55
17
18
19
20
21
22
24
25
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
20-428
A10-382
182-54
A55-48-20
116-36
65-1035
105-347
16-1084
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
20-428
A10-382
182-54
A55-48-20
116-36
65-1035
105-347
16-1084
...............................VALVE, service ......................................

NUT, wheel ........................................
PLATE, identification .........................
HANDWHEEL....................................
NUT, packing .....................................
GLAND ..............................................
PACKING. .........................................
BOX, stuffing......................................
STEM, valve. .....................................
BODY, valve ......................................
DISK ..................................................
BONNET............................................
............................... GASKET, cover .................................
............................... COVER, cylinder head.......................
............................... BREATHER, crankcase ....................
............................... CAP, weather.....................................
............................... NIPPLE, 2 x 15 .............................
............................... CONNECTION...................................
5330-255-1262
GASKET ............................................
............................... MANIFOLD, exhaust..........................
............................... WASHER, special..............................
............................... COVER, heat connection ...................
............................... HOSE (See Stock No. ORD H007- ...
0100160).
............................... WASHER, clamp ...............................
............................... MANIFOLD, intake.............................
............................... ELBOW, 3/8 x1/4x 45 ......................
............................... TUBE ASSEMBLY .............................
............................... REGULATOR, ventilation...................
............................... CONNECTION...................................
424-5415
STUD.................................................
............................... GASKET, manifold.............................
287
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
2
1
2
4
1
1
1
1
1
6
1

Fig
No.
Index
No.
Code
No.
Part No.

Code
No.
Federal supply
class and item
identification No.
Description
Part No.
57
57
57
57
57
57
57
57
57
57
57
57
57
3
4
5
6
8
9
10
11
12
13
15
16
17
770
896
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
A55-29-52
400X4
2A98-46-1
106-159
A39-1737
24-350
24-394
31-475
31-463
B20-1
A27-1479
B105-12
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
A55-29-52
182-33
2A98-46-1
106-159
A39-1737
24-350
24-394
31-475
31-463
B20-1
A27-1479
B105-12
2-262
57
57
57
57
57
57
57
57
57
59
59
59
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
1
3
4
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
16-1170
15-438
15-389
15-388
15-434
58-52
99-105
24-349
31454
08-346
24-379
14-975
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
16-1170
15-438
15-389
15-388
15-434
58-52
99-105
24-349
31-454
08-346
24-379
14-975
422-9935
5310-1867403
288
TUBE ASSEMBLY
ELBOW
ROCKER ARM ASSEMBLY
SCREW, adjusting
BRACKET, rocket arm
SPRING, spacer
SPRING, valve
ROTATOR, valve
RETAINER, spring lock
WASHER, special
SHAFT, rocker arm
STUD
CYLINDER HEAD (not serviced separately).
GASKET, cylinder head
INSERT, intake valve
VALVE, intake
VALVE, exhaust
INSERT, exhaust valve
GUIDE, valve stem
PUSH ROD
SPRING, end
RETAINER, spring
RIVET, 3/16 x 3/8
SPRING,
COVER
Quantity
per
unit
1
1
8
8
4
3
8
8
16
17
1
4
1
1
4
4
4
4
8
8
2
2
4
4
4
59
59
59
59
59
59
59
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
60
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
1
2
5
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
16-1144-1
43-169
16-914
65-980-1
105-423
20-474
53-293
16-146
14-848
B20-1
A15-445
B20-1
20-480
22-391
53-310
105-428
60
60
60
60
60
61
61
61
61
61
61
61
61
61
14
16
17
18
19
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
16-1166
B20-1
10-381
105-429
16-1169
68-894
68-902
68-903
68-896
68-891
68-801
39-2271
68-895
50-130
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
16-1144-1
43-169
16-914
65-980-1
105-423
20-474
53-293
16-146
14-848
B20-1
A15-445
B2-1
20-480
22-391
53-310
105 428
2-263
...............................
...............................
250-0483
...............................
...............................
...............................
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
16-1166
B20-1
10-381
105-429
16-1169
68-894
68-902
68-903
68-896
68-891
68-802
39-2271
6-895
50-130
...............................
5310-186-7403
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
5330-255-1262
5310-186-7403
5310186-7403
289
GASKET, cover .................................

ELEMENT, filter .................................
GASKET, port ....................................
CONNECTION, air filter .....................
STUD, mounting ................................
WASHER, copper ..............................
NUT, self-locking ...............................
GASKET, cover .................................
COVER..............................................
WASHER, special ..............................
VALVE ASSEMBLY ...........................
WASHER, special ..............................
WASHER, spring ...............................
SPACER............................................
NUT, hex, special...............................
STUD, valve mounting .......................
HEAD, cylinder (not serviced sep
arately).
GASKET, manifold.............................
WASHER, special ..............................
MANIFOLD, air discharge ..................
STUD, head mounting .......................
GASKET, cylinder head .....................
PANEL, side, front lh .........................
DOOR, side, front hood .....................
DOOR, side, rear hood ......................
PANEL, side rear Ih ...........................
PANEL, hood top ...............................
DOOR, hood top ................................
SUPPORT, end, rear hood ................
PANEL, side, rear rh ..........................
HANDLE ............................................
4
4
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
17
4
16
224
16
16
16
1
4
8
1
17
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
8

Fig
No.
61
61
61
61
61
61
61
72
72
72
72
72
72
72
72
72
72
72
72
72
72
72
72
72
72
72
Index
No.
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
1
2
3
4
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
Code
No.
Part No.
770
770
770
770
770
24-393
68-897
68-893
68-890
39-2270
770
600
600
600
600
600
600
600
600
600
600
600
600
600
600
600
600
770
600
600
68-904
1539442
5590155
1537915
5590038
1537212
1537075
1521953
5591860
1521956
132696
1537306
1523259
1537096
5590582
1522077
5591911
16-997
1522024
1523118

Code
No.
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
600
600
600
600
600
600
600
600
600
600
600
600
600
600
600
600
770
600
600
Federal supply
class and item
identification No.
Description
Part No.
24-393
68-897
68-893
68-890
39-2270
156-285
68-904
1539442
5590155
1537915
5590038
1537212
1537075
1521953
5591860
1521956
132696
1537306
1523259
1537096
5590582
1522077
5591911
16-997
1522024
1523118
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
5330-245-5512
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
5340-253-6885
290
SPRING.............................................
PANEL, side, center-compressor .......
PANEL, side, front rh .........................
PANEL, hood top ...............................
SUPPORT, end, front hood................
GUARD, radiator, front.......................
PANEL, side, center-engine...............
FUEL PUMP ................................
BAIL, lifting ........................................
BOWL, fuel ........................................
GASKET, bowl...................................
SCREEN............................................
COVER, pump ...................................
GASKET, valve cage .........................
VALVE CAGE ASSEMBLY ................
RETAINER, valve cage......................
SCREW, retainer ...............................
DIAPHRAGM ASSEMBLY .................
RETAINER, diaphragm spring ...........
SPRING, diaphragm ..........................
BODY, pump .....................................
LINK, rocker arm................................
ARM, rocker.......................................
GASKET, mounting ...........................
BUSHING, rocker arm .......................
SPRING, rocker arm ..........................
Quantity
per
unit
10
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
72
72
73
73
73
73
73
73
73
73
73
73
73
73
73
73
73
73
73
73
73
73
73
73
73
73
73
73
73
73
73
73
21
22
2
4
5
6
8
9
10
11
12
13
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
600
600
699
699
699
699
699
699
699
699
699
699
699
699
699
699
699
699
699
699
699
699
699
699
699
699
699
699
699
699
699
699
1522023
1521288
C109-62
T311S12-12
A4-40-1
C102-108
C112-6
T311S12-10
CT48-6
C66-88-1-2
C143-22
C108-121
C85-108
C137-53
C120-59
CR41-1
C81-57-20
T56-23
CR137-27
C71-43
C52-7-42
T56-24
T56-10
C150-27
C138-42
C29-1054
Cl11-62
T8S10-13
CT52-44
CT48-5
CR9-36
C46-57
600
600
699
699
699
699
699
699
699
699
699
699
699
699
699
699
699
699
699
699
699
699
699
699
699
699
699
699
699
699
699
699
1522023
1521288
C109-62
T311S12-12
A4-40-1
C102-108
C112-6
T311S12-10
CT 48-6
C66-88-1-2
C143.-22
C108-121
C85-108
C137-53
C120-59
CR41-1
C81-57-20
T56--23
CR137-27
C71-43
C52.-7-42
T56-24
T56-10
C150-27
C138-42
C29 -1054
Cll11-62
T8S10-13
CT52-44
CT48-5
CR9-36
C46-57
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
2910-429--5096
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
291
PIN, rocker arm..................................

WASHER, retainer .............................
BRACKET, choke ..............................
SCREW, with lockwasher ..................
BODY, air intake ................................
PLATE, choke....................................
SPRING, choke plate.........................
WASHER, well seal ...........................
WELL, vent and idle...........................
GASKET, bowl-to-intake ....................
SHAFT AND LEVER, choke ..............
FLOAT ...............................................
PLUG, axle retainer ...........................
AXLE, float.........................................
VALVE, check....................................
VALVE AND SEAT, fuel.....................
WASHER, fibre ..................................
PLUG, bowl channel ..........................
SCREW, adjusting, main jet...............
JET, main ..........................................
WASHER, fibre ..................................
WASHER, fibre ..................................
SCREEN, fuel ....................................
PLUG, channel ..................................
SHAFT AND LEVER, throttle .............
SPRING, stop screw ..........................
SCREW, stop ....................................
RETAINER, shaft seal .......................
SEAL, shaft........................................
BUSHING, throttle shaft .....................
NEEDLE, idle adjusting......................
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
3
2
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1

Fig
No.
Index
No.
73
73
73
73
73
73
73
73
73
73
73
73
73
73
73
73
73
73
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
76
76
76
76
76
76
1
2
3
4
5
6
Code
No.
699
770
699
699
699
699
699
699
699
699
699
699
699
699
699
699
699
699
770
699
770
770
770
770
770
770
Part No.
C111-191
16-1174
C135-25
B12-11362
C21-184
T15B5-4
C142-59
B38-67-33
T311825-12
CR67-1
A3-110-1
CR137-37
C41-27-12
C138-23
B192-2
C131-32
C63-193-2
C111-190
C181-322
K11362
B4085
B4086
406XB
407XA
100XA
408XB

Code
No.
Part No.
699
770
699
699
699
699
699
699
699
699
699
699
699
699
699
699
699
699
770
699
770
770
770
770
770
770
C11-191
16-1174
C135-25
B12-11362
C21-184
T15B5-4
T142-59
B38-67-33
T311S25-12
CR67-1
A3-110-1
CR137-37
C41-27-12
C138-23
B192-2
C131-32
C63-193-2
C111-190
C181-322
K11362
B4085
B4086
406XB
407XA
100XA
408XB
Federal supply
class and item
identification No.
Description
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
SPRING, adjusting needle .................

GASKET, flange ................................
PLUG, shaft hole ...............................
BODY, throttle....................................
PLATE, throttle ..................................
SCREW, throttle plate........................
GASKET, bowl-to-body......................
VENTURI...........................................
BUSHING, idle channel .....................
BOWL, fuel ........................................
PLUG, bowl channel .........................
VALVE, check, with jet.......................
PLUG, channel ..................................
PUMP ................................................
GUIDE ...............................................
SPACER............................................
SPRING, pump ..................................
GASKET SET, carburetor ..................
REPAIR KIT, carburetor.....................
CAP, end ...........................................
GASKET ............................................
FELT..................................................
SCREEN............................................
CAP, seat ..........................................
GASKET, spacer ...............................
292
Quantity
per
unit
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
76
76
76
76
76
76
76
76
76
76
76
77
77
77
77
77
77
77
77
77
78
78
78
78
78
78
78
78
78
78
78
7
8
9
10
11
12
14
15
16
17
18
2
3
4
6
7
10
11
13
14
1
2
3
4
5
7
8
9
10
11
12
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
912
623
623
623
623
623
623
628
623
623
623
99XA
99XB
B5147
B4084
407XB
10CA770
B5149
220X
B4082
B5240
B4087
20-97
14-909
16-1056
53-257
101-34
81-188-2
16-1061
125-116
125-97
42-5416.500.200
1923299
1920926
1920928
1920280
453294
132250
1914186
1885090
1914751
1914579
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
623
623
623
623
623
623
623
623
623
623
623
99XA
99XB
B5147
B4084
407XB
B5149
220X
B4082
B5240
B4087
20-97
14-909
16-1056
53-257
101-34
81-188-2
16-1061
125-116
125-97
124545
1923299
1920926
1920928
1920280
453294
132250
1914186
1885090
1914751
1914579
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
423-3771
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
012-4545
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
293
NEEDLE ............................................
PIN, push...........................................
BODY ................................................
FELT..................................................
SCREEN............................................
BASE ASSEMBLY .............................
SPRING, adjusting.............................
WHEEL, adjusting..............................
JACKET.............................................
RING, seal .........................................
WASHER, copper ..............................
COVER, pump body ..........................
GASKET, over ...................................
NUT, special ......................................
IMPELLER.........................................
BODY, water pump ............................
GASKET, mounting ...........................
SEAT, seal.........................................
SEAL, pump ......................................
KEY, Woodruff ...................................
ARMATURE.......................................
FIELD COIL .......................................
FIELD COIL .......................................
POLE SHOE ......................................
WASHER, look ..................................
SCREW .............................................
STUD, terminal ..................................
BUSHING, stud..................................
WASHER...........................................
WASHER, lock ..................................
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
2
8
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
2
4

Fig
No.
78
78
78
78
78
78
78
78
78
78
78
78
78
78
78
78
78
78
78
78
78
78
78
78
78
78
Index
No.
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
Code
No.
Part No.
623
623
623
623
623
623
870
623
623
623
623
623
623
623
623
623
623
522
623
623
623
770
770
623
623
623
1914748
1914750
1914580
453296
1914752
1914753
87503
1920284
1906935
1914578
454329
1914741
1904514
1905219
1914580
1914123
1916378
203KLL2
1916377
1920290
1916376
42-117
36-539
1914754
1914279
1914755

Code
No.
623
623
623
623
623
623
623
623
623
623
623
623
623
623
623
623
623
623
623
623
623
770
770
623
623
623
Federal supply
class and item
identification No.
Description
...............................
...............................
424-3752
...............................
...............................
...............................
3110-156-3496
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
3110-156-3502
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
COVER, band ....................................

SCREW, pole shoe ............................
SCREW, cover plate ..........................
WASHER, lock ..................................
PLATE, end cover..............................
GASKET, cover plate.........................
BEARING, commutator-end...............
FRAME, commutator-end ..................
BRUSH ..............................................
WASHER, lock ..................................
SCREW .............................................
SPACER, brush arm ..........................
ARM, brush........................................
SPRING, brush ..................................
SCREW .............................................
WASHER, lock ..................................
PLATE, retainer, inner bearing...........
BEARING, drive-end..........................
PLATE, retainer, outer bearing...........
FRAME, drive-end .............................
COLLAR, spacing ..............................
FAN ...................................................
PULLEY.............................................
WASHER...........................................
NUT, shaft .........................................
BOLT, through ...................................
Part No.
1914748
1914750
1914580
453296
1914752
1914753
954259
1920284
1906935
1914578
454329
1914741
1904514
1905219
1914580
1914123
1916378
954143
1916377
1920290
1916376
42-117
36-539
1914754
1914279
1914755
294
Quantity
per
unit
1
2
3
3
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
78
81
81
81
81
81
81
81
40
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
623
623
623
623
623
623
623
623
623
453301
1914807
1914799
1914805
1914762
1912159
1915896
1922408
454504
81
81
81
81
81
81
81
81
81
81
81
81
81
81
81
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
90
90
90
90
90
453301
1914807
1914799
1914805
1914762
1912159
1915896
1922408
454504
1914816
1914817
1914831
1922408
1910182
1910181
1914800
1914766
1914801
1914808
187510
1914803
1914802
1922996
1922599
1915331
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
1914800
1914766
1914801
1914808
1878510
1914803
1914802
1922996
1922599
1915331
623
623
623
623
623
623
623
623
623
623
623
623
623
62.3
623
623
623
623
623
623
623
623
623
623
623
623
623
623
1914831
1922408
1910182
623
623
623
623
623
623
623
623
623
623
623
1914842
623
1914842
...............................
2
3
4
5
623
623
623
623
1919203
453325
1919097
1915386
623
623
623
623
1919203
453325
1919097
1915386
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
2920-167-1675
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
295
WASHER, lock ..................................

COVER..............................................
SCREW, cover ..................................
WASHER, insulating ..........................
SUPPORT, contact ......................
SCREW, adjusting .............................
ARMATURE, relay. ............................
SCREW, adjusting .............................
SCREW, with look washer .................
WASHER, lock.............................
SCREW .......................................
SPRING.............................................
SCREW, adjusting .............................
RESISTOR ........................................
RESISTOR ........................................
SCREW, terminal ..............................
GROMMET ........................................
CLAMP, terminal................................
SCREW .............................................
GASKET, cover .................................
WASHER, lock ..................................
CONNECTOR....................................
WASHER...........................................
INSULATOR ......................................
BRACKET, shock mounting, .............
three holes.
WASHER, spacer, commutator- .......
end.
ARMATURE.......................................
KEY, woodruff....................................
FIELD COIL ASSEMBLY ...................
POLE SHOE ......................................
2
1
2
2
2
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
1
1
2
3
3
3
4
1
2
1
2
4
1
1
1
1
1
4

Fig
No.
90
90
90
90
90
90
90
90
90
90
90
90
90
90
90
90
90
90
90
90
90
90
90
90
90
90
Index
No.
7
8
9
12
13
14
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
31
32
33
34
35
36
Code
No.
Part No.
Code
No.
623
623
623
623
623
623
623
623
623
623
354
354
623
623
623
896
623
623
623
623
623
623
623
623
623
623
1913960
1914873
1910099
1915388
1913958
1913959
453297
1904419
1902730
1902736
F4611
F4609
1915542
1902731
1913967
3150X2
1909654
1904083
1923322
1914955
453299
1906902
1904981
810620
1914853
1919200
623
623
623
623
623
623
623
623
623
623
623
623
623
623
623
623
623
623
623
623
623
623
623
623
623
623
Federal supply
class and item
identification No.
Description
2920-428-6527
...........................
5305-428-6516
2920-428-6564
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
428-6528
119-4384
...............................
...............................
...............................
2920-428-6545
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
SCREW, pole shoe ............................

STRIP, insulation ...............................
STUD, terminal ..................................
BEARING, center...............................
BUSHING, terminal stud ....................
WASHER, insulating ..........................
WASHER, lock, terminal stud ............
LOCKNUT, terminal stud ...................
DRIVE HEAD ASSEMBLY.................
CLIP, locking .....................................
SCREW, head spring.........................
SCREW, shaft spring .........................
DRIVING SHAFT ASSEMBLY ...........
SPRING, drive ...................................
WASHER, spacer ..............................
PLUG, pipe ........................................
WICK, oil ...........................................
BUSHING, drive -end.........................
HOUSING, drive ................................
BAND, cover ......................................
WASHER, lock, brush lead ................
BRUSH ..............................................
SPRING, brush ..................................
BUSHING, commutator-end...............
PIN, dowel .........................................
FRAME, commutator-end. .................
Part No.
1913960
1914873
1910099
1915388
1913958
1913959
453297
1904419
1902730
1902736
1902733
1902732
1915542
1902731
1913967
118831
1909654
1904083
1923322
1914955
453299
1906902
1904981
810620
1914853
1919200
296
Quantity
per
unit
8
2
1
1
3
2
2
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
4
4
1
1
1
90
90
90
91
91
91
91
91
91
91
91
91
91
91
91
91
91
91
91
91
91
92
92
92
37
38
39
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
16
17
18
19
1
2
3
623
623
623
623
623
623
623
623
623
623
623
623
623
623
623
623
623
623
623
623
623
606
606
606
1914994
453467
1915383
1918610
1904966
1918616
1914477
1918601
1914470
1913041
1914478
1913043
1904967
1918618
1914475
1918621
1914474
1923231
1914472
1918620
142212
SW213
IGC1180
1G90
623
623
623
623
623
623
623
623
623
623
623
623
623
623
623
623
623
623
623
623
623
606
606
606
1914994
453467
1915383
1918610
1904966
1918616
1914477
1918601
1914470
1913041
1914478
1913043
1904967
1918618
1914475
1918621
1914474
1923231
1914472
1918620
142212
SW-213
IGC-1180
IG-90
...............................
...............................
5305-428-6563
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
92
92
92
92
92
92
4
5
6
7
8
9
606
606
606
606
606
606
IAU2064S1
GT97
X865A
IAU1010
XA751
IG313
606
606
606
606
606
606
IAU-2064S-1
GT-97
X-865A
IAU-10
XA-751
IG-313
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
297
PLUG, commutator-end .....................

WASHER, lock, through bolt ..............
THROUGH-BOLT ..............................
CASE AND COIL ASSEMBLY ...........
GASKET, terminal cap.......................
TERMINAL CAP ASSEMBLY ............
SPRING, return..................................
PLUNGER .........................................
CONTACT .........................................
WASHER, spring retainer ..................
SPRING, contact ...............................
WASHER, spring retainer, slotted ......
GASKET, cover .................................
COVER..............................................
SCREW, cover ..................................
WASHER, rubber...............................
WASHER, plain .................................
STUD, terminal ..................................
WASHER, plain .................................
WASHER, look ..................................
NUT, terminal.....................................
RIVET, coupling.................................
COUPLING, drive ..............................
WASHER, thrust, lower drive ............
shaft.
BASE ASSEMBLY .............................
WICK, felt ..........................................
PLUG, pipe ........................................
WASHER, seal ..................................
SEAL, shaft........................................
WASHER, thrust, upper drive ..........
shaft.
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
3
2
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Fig
No.
Index
No.
Code
No.
Part No.

Code
No.
Part No.
Federal supply
class and item
identification No.
92
92
92
92
10
11
12
13
606
606
606
606
CT4002
IAU6
IGC2168R
X3028
606
606
606
606
CT-4002
IAU-6
IGC-2168R
X-3028
...............................
.... ...........................
...............................
...............................
92
92
92
92
92
92
92
92
92
92
92
92
92
92
92
92
92
92
92
92
92
14
15
16
17
18
19
22
23
24
25
26
28
29
30
31
32
33
35
36
37
38
606
606
606
606
606
606
606
606
606
606
606
606
606
606
606
o06
606
606
606
606
606
IAU14S
IGT70
IAU1100RB
X3030
IAU3076L
IG676
IGC175
IGP3028FS
X3032
IAU1048
IAU52
IAU54
XA744P
IAU49
XA744G
IAU1066
IAU24
X2878
IAU39
IAU1004
IGH28
606
606
606
606
606
606
606
606
606
606
606
606
606
606
606
606
606
606
606
606
606
IAU-14S
IOT-70
IAU-11OORB
X-3030
IAU-3076L
IG-676
IGC-175
IGP-3028FS
X-3032
IAU-1048
IAU-52
IAU-54
XA-744P
IAU-49
XA-744G
IAU-1066
IAU24
X-2878
IAU-39
IAU-1004
IGH-28
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
2920-143-5304
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
298
Description
COIL, ignition .....................................

CLAMP, lead......................................
WEIGHT, governor ............................
SCREW, fillister head, No. 10-32......
x 7/16 .
SPRING, governor .............................
SPRING, antirattle .............................
PLATE, cam and stop ........................
SCREW, capacitor mounting .............
CAPACITOR......................................
CLIP, breaker arm spring ...................
SCREW, clamp..................................
CONTACT SET, breaker....................
SCREW, cap and cover .....................
CAP ASSEMBLY ...............................
WASHER, cap sealing .......................
PLUG, cap cover ...............................
O RING..............................................
COVER, distributor cap......................
O RING..............................................
ROTOR..............................................
LEAD ASSEMBLY, primary ...............
SCREW, breaker plate.......................
HOLDER, breaker plate .....................
PLATE, breaker .................................
WICK, felt, cam sleeve ......................
Quantity
per
unit
1
2
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
1
4
1
2
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
1
92
92
92
92
92
92
92
92
92
92
92
93
93
93
93
93
93
93
93
93
93
93
93
93
93
93
93
0
93
93
93
39
40
41
42
44
45
47
48
49
50
51
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
14
15
16
17
18
606
606
606
606
606
606
606
606
606
606
606
674
245
674
674
674
674
674
674
674
674
674
674
674
674
674
912
IG680
IGS99
IAU1013R
X3123
IAU63
IAU62
IAU29
IAU1065
IAU41
IAU42
IG579A
X1506
6053
G9845
A2763
X689
G8887
A2426
G8260
SN1236
X1425
A2356
G2608
G9745
G8202
G11222
42-7100.010.70
606
606
606
606
606
606
606
606
606
606
606
674
674
674
674
674
674
674
674
674
674
674
674
770
674
674
674
IG-680
IGS-99
IAU-1013R
X-3123
IAU-63
IAU-62
IAU-29
IAU-1065
IAU-41
IAU-42
IG-57AA
X-1506
X-317
G-9845
A-2763
X-689
8887
A-2426
G--8260
SN-1236
X-1425
A-2356
G-2608
26-598
G-8202
G-11222
X-74
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
3110-157-0439
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
5330-255-1255
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
010-3573 ................
RING, snap, cam retaining.................

SPACER, cam ...................................
SHAFT, drive .....................................
SCREW, receptacle ...........................
RECEPTACLE...................................
SEAL, receptacle ...............................
SPRING, gap contact.........................
CONNECTOR....................................
PLUG, drain .......................................
WASHER, drain plug .........................
BEARING, drive shaft ........................
BEARING, oilite .................................
BEARING, thrust................................
SLEEVE, thrust..................................
SPIDER AND SHAFT ASSEMBLY ....
CLIP, hair pin .....................................
PIN, weight ........................................
WEIGHT ASSEMBLY ........................
WASHER, spacing.............................
SPRING, governor .............................
GASKET ............................................
BASE AND BUSHING ASSEMBLY ...
WASHER, thrust ................................
GEAR ................................................
LEVER, throttle ..................................
BUTTON............................................
PIN, taper ..........................................
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
2
1
1
8
4
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
19
20
21
674
674
245
X1552
X1904
6062
674
674
674
X-1552
X-1904
X-328
...............................
...............................
3110-158-8137
OIL SEAL...........................................
RING, snap ........................................
BEARING, ball. ..................................
1
2
2
299

Fig
No.
93
93
93
93
93
93
93
93
93
93
93
93
93
94
94
94
94
94
94
94
94
94
94
95
95
Index
No.
22
23
24
25
26
28
30
31
32
33
35
36
37
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
15
16
...........
...........
Code
No.
Part No.
674
674
G11601
G9042-15
674
674
674
674
674
674
674
674
674
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770

Code
No.
Federal supply
class and item
identification No.
Description
Part No.
G9595
X171
X1049
G8123
G8867
G9548
G8174
G8708-1
G9820-2
83-230
53-259
20-447
34-311
69-315
674
674
674
674
674
674
674
674
674
674
674
674
674
770
770
770
770
770
G-11601
G-9042-15
X-581
X-455
G-9595
X-171
X-1049
G-8123
G-8867
G-9548
G-8174
G-8708-1
G-9820-2
83-230
53-259
20-447
34-311
69-315
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
39-2233
47-752
39-2327
74-123
83-249
39-2338
770
770
770
770
770
770
39-2233
47-752
39-2327
74-123
83-249
39-2338
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
300
SHAFT, rocker ...................................

BODY, governor.................................
NAMEPLATE .....................................
PIN, escutcheon...........................
PLUG.................................................
SCREW, cap .....................................
SCREW .............................................
LEVER, speed change.......................
SHAFT...............................................
BRACKET, speed change..................
BRACKET..........................................
LEVER...............................................
YOKE ................................................
STRAP...............................................
NUT, special ......................................
WASHER, special ..............................
SCREW, cap, special ........................
RECEIVER, air (includes pipe plug)...
PLUG, pipe ................................
SUPPORT .........................................
ROD...................................................
BRACE ..............................................
PACKING ..........................................
STRAP...............................................
SUPPORT, cross member .................
Quantity
per
unit
1
1
1
2
1
4
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
1
1
2
2
2
8
2
2
95
96
96
96
96
96
96
96
96
96
96
96
96
96
96
96
96
96
96
96
96
96
96
96
96
97
97
97
1
2
4
5
6
7
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
1
3
10
97
97
11
12
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
74-135
34-411
53-278
74-119
31-477
74-120
B53-26
39-2234
34-349
20-46(1
61-481-4
53-271
53-316
22-400
22-401
11-608
34-408
34-395
20-460-6
61-483-1
20460-6
34-346
20-460
61-481-17
53-272
103-32
20-476
53-294
1A207-14
B16-137
27-1559
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
74-135
34-411
53-278
74119
31-477
74-120
B53-26
39-2234
34-349
20-460-1
61-481-4
53-271
53-316
22-400
22-401
118l08
34-408
34-395
20-460-6
61-483-1
20-460-6
34-346
20-460
61-481-17
53-272
103-32
20-476
53-294
1A207-14
B16-137
27-1559
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
301
PACKING, rubber ..............................

SCREW, cap .....................................
NUT ...................................................
DAMPENER, vibration .......................
RETAINER ........................................
REBOUND UNIT................................
NUT ...................................................
SUPPORT, front engine.....................
SCREW, cap .....................................
WASHER, look ..................................
STRAP, bond.....................................
NUT ...................................................
NUT ...................................................
SPACER............................................
SPACER............................................
FRAME ..............................................
SCREW, cap .....................................
SCREW, cap .....................................
WASHER, lock ..................................
STRAP, bond.....................................
WASHER, look ..................................
SCREW, cap .....................................
WASHER, lock ..................................
STRAP, bond.....................................
NUT ...................................................
BAIL, lifting ........................................
WASHER, copper ..............................
NUT, plug ..........................................
DRIVE ASS88EMBLY........................
GASKET ............................................
SHAFT...............................................
4
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
4
8
2
4
2
2
2
1
2
1
2
2
2
2
4
2
2
1
2
1
1
1
1

Fig
No.
97
97
97
97
97
97
97
97
97
97
97
97
98
98
98
98
98
98
98
98
98
98
98
98
98
Index
No.
13
14
15
16
17
22
23
24
27
28
29
30
1
2
3
4
5
8
9
14
15
16
17
18
19
Code
No.
Part No.
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
876
876
876
876
21-452
26-00
17-488-2
16-1046
14-999
16-1082
16-1079
24-390
16-1078
16-1175
14-1000
60-238
125-124
16-1085
3-250
125-67
16-1177
3-251
14-996
16-1172
P50
125-121
16-1178
B16-137

Code
No.
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
Federal supply
class and item
identification No.
Description
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
5330-241-9227
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
BODY (not serviced separately).......

BUSHING ..........................................
GEAR ................................................
PIN, roll..............................................
GASKET ............................................
COVER, front half ..............................
GASKET, side ...................................
GASKET, front. ..................................
SPRING, leaf .....................................
GASKET, rear....................................
GASKET ............................................
COVER, rear half ...............................
DIPSTICK ..........................................
SEAL, oil, rear....................................
GASKET, oil pan................................
PAN, oil, upper...................................
SEAL, oil, front...................................
GASKET, side ...................................
PAN, oil, lower ...................................
COVER, oil filter.................................
GASKET ............................................
ELEMENT, filter .................................
SEAL, oil filter ....................................
GASKET, end ....................................
GASKET ............................................
Part No.
207-14
21-452
26 00
17- 2
16-1046
14-999
16-1082
16-1079
24-390
16-1078
16-1175
14-1000
6(0-238
125-124
16-1085
3-250
125-67
16-1177
3-251
14-996
16-1172
43-269
125-121
16-1178
B16-137
302
Quantity
per
unit
1
2
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
2
1
2
2
2
1
2
4
98
98
98
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
101
20
21
22
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
13
14
16
17
18
20
21
22
23
25
26
28
1
876
876
876
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
53-294
33-606
125-112
65-1038
17-456
16-1063
14-907
64-66
26-642-2
27-1555
81-207
26-643
182-218
A55-774
27-1556
26-642-1
182-14
A55-2-2
182-35
8-267
24-347
43-270
14-918
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
53-294
33-606
125-112
65-1038
17-456
16-1063
14-907
64-66
26-642-2
27-1555
81-207
26-643
182-218
A55-774
27-1556
26--642-1
182-14
A55-2-2
182-35
8.-267
24-347
43.-270
14-918
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
101
101
101
101
2
3
5
6
770
770
770
21-426
27-1455
26-617
770
770
770
770
21-426
27-1455
26-617
270-3-1
...............................
...............................
...............................
101
101
101
7
8
9
896
770
770
400X4
A55-29-41
26-599
770
770
770
182-33
A55-29-41
26-599
...............................
...............................
...............................
303
NUT, special ......................................

EXTENSION, pipe .............................
O-RING..............................................
CONNECTION, suction line ...............
PIN, dowel .........................................
GASKET, connection .........................
COVER, oil pump ..............................
RING, snap ........................................
GEAR, pump. ....................................
SHAFT, drive .....................................
BODY, oil pump .................................
GEAR, drive.......................................
CONNECTOR, 5/8 X MPT ............
TUBE ASSEMBLY .............................
SHAFT, idler ......................................
GEAR, idler........................................
CONNECTOR, 5/3 x 1/8 MPT............
TUBE ASSEMBLY .............................
ELBOW, 90. .....................................
PLUNGER, pressure relief .................
SPRING, pressure relief ....................
SCREEN, intake ................................
COVER, gear (not serviced sepa-......
rately).
BUSHING, gear cover........................
SHAFT, accessory drive ....................
GEAR, accessory drive......................
HOUSING, accessory drive (not ........
serviced separately).
ELBOW, 1/4X 1/8 x MPT x 900. ..........
TUBE ASSEMBLY .............................
GEAR, governor drive........................
4
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
I
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1

Fig
No.
101
101
101
101
101
101
101
102
102
102
102
102
102
103
103
103
103
103
103
103
103
103
Index
No.
11
12
17
20
21
22
23
1
2
3
4
9
1
2
4
5
6
7
Code
No.
896
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
774)
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
Part No.
200X4
21-426
16-1080
010-347
125-67
19-127
125-13-1
53-285
A9-560
9-560
26-267
39-2235
60-239
42-133
34-383-1
20-466
36-630
26-644
21465
21-465-F
21-465-K
A5-391

Code
No.
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
Federal supply
class and item
identification No.
Description
Part No.
182-13
21-426
16-1080
010-347
125-67
19-127
125-13-1
53-285
A9-560
9-560
26-267
39-2235
60-239
42-133
34-383-1
20-466
36-630
26-44
21-465
21-465-F
21-465-K
A5-391
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
5330-241-9227
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
304
CONNECTOR,, X 1/8 MPT ............

BUSHING, drive housing ...................
GASKET ............................................
PIN, taper ..........................................
HALF, oil seal ....................................
PLUG, thrust ......................................
SEAL, oil............................................
NUT, lock...........................................
FLYWHEEL ASSEMBLY ...................
FLYWHEEL .......................................
EAR, ring ...........................................
SUPPORT, rear engine......................
INDICATOR, timing ...........................
FAN ...................................................
SCREW, cap .....................................
WASHER, flat ....................................
PULLEY, crankshaft ..........................
GEAR, crankshaft ..............................
SHELL, bearing, main........................
SHELL, bearing, 0.010 in. Undersize
SHELL, bearing, 0.030 in. under size
CRANKSHAFT ASSEMBLY (in- .......
cludes gear 26-664).
Quantity
per
unit
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
6
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
8
8
8
1
103
103
103
770
A5-391-F
770
A&-391-F
...............................
770
A5-391-K
770
A5-391-K
...............................
770
21-464
21-464
5-391
21-464-F
...............................
...............................
...............................
103
770
21F-464-F
770
770
770
103
770
21-464-K
770
21-464-K
770
770
770
34-399
105-419
A7-86-1
770
770
770
34-399
105-419
A7-8
...............................
770
770
770
21-444
21-444-F
770
770
770
21-444
21-444-F
...............................
...............................
...............................
770
21-444K
770
21 444K
...............................
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
64-65-3
A8-285
204-118
18-311
18-313
18-314
18-315
18-312
17-507
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
64-65-3
A8-285
204-118
18-311
18-313
18-314
18-315
18-312
17-507
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
103
103
104
10
13
104
104
104
1
2
104
104
104
104
104
104
104
104
104
104
104
3
4
5, 11
6
7
8
9
10
11
305
CRANKSHAFT ASSEM- ...................

BLY, 0.010 in. undersize.
CRANKSHAFT ASSEM ....................
BLY, 0.030 in. oversize.
iced separately).
SHELL, bearing, main........................
CRANKSHAFT (not serv- .................
SHELL, bearing, main, 0.010 in. .......
undersize.
SHELL, bearing, main, 0.030 in .........
undersize.
BOLT, flywheel ..................................
STUD.................................................
ROD ASSEMBLY, connecting .........
(includes items 13 and 14).
CAP, bearing .....................................
SHELL, bearing .................................
SHELL, bearing, 0.010 in ..................
undersize.
SHELL, bearing, 0.030 in. ................
undersize.
ROD, connecting ...............................
RETAINER, pin..................................
PISTON (includes pin) .......................
RING SET, piston .............................
RING, oil control ................................
RING, third groove .............................
EXPANDER, ring ...............................
RING, second groove ........................
RING, top groove...............................
PIN, piston .........................................
1
1
2
1
2
2
6
4
8
8
16
8
8
8
16
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8

Fig
No.
Index
No.
Code
No.
Federal supply
class and item
identification No.
Part No.
Code
No.
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
21-449
34-401
53-247
A6-175
19-87-1
26-618
6-175
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
21-449
34-401
53-247
A6-175
1987-1
26-618
6-175
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
1A100-196-1
105-429
105-2813
105-421
105-420
125-123
175-18
125-124
17-475
4-211-1
34-296
4-211-2
4-211-3
52-14
21-442
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
1A100-196-1
105-429
105-2813
105-421
105420
125-123
175-18
125-124
17-475
4-211-1
34-296
4-211-2
4-211-3
52-14
21-442
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
21-443
770
21-443
...............................
104
104
104
105
105
105
105
12
13
14
106
106
106
106
106
106
106
106
106
106
106
106
106
106
106
1
2
3
4
5
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
106
14
770
1
2
3
Description
Part No.
306
BUSHING, piston pin .........................

BOLT, connecting rod ........................
NUT, connecting rod bolt ...................
CAMSHAFT ASSEMBLY ...................
CUP PLUG, front ...............................
GEAR, camshaft ................................
CAMSHAFT (not serviced.................
separately).
CRANKCASE ....................................
STUD.................................................
STUD.................................................
STUD.................................................
STUD.................................................
RING, packing ...................................
SLEEVE, cylinder ..............................
HALF, oil seal ....................................
PIN, dowel .........................................
CAP, bearing, rear .............................
SCREW, cap .....................................
CAP, bearing, center..........................
CAP, bearing, front ............................
COCK, drain ......................................
BUSHING, camshaft, intermedi- ........
ate and center.
BUSHING, camshaft, front and .........
rear.
Quantity
per
unit
8
16
16
1
1
1
1
1
17
5
4
8
16
8
1
10
3
10
1
1
2
3
2
106
107
107
107
107
107
107
107
107
107
107
107
107
107
107
107
107
107
107
107
107
107
107
107
107
107
108
108
108
108
108
16
2
3
6
7
8
9
11
15
18
19
20
21
22
2a
24
27
29
30
33
34
35
36
1
3
4
5
6
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
23-23
24-54-1
53-302
119-192
156284
68-900
22-394
119-194
53-292
83-244
53-309
53-292
53-292
39-2294
119-193
A39-2300
74-129
53-302
53-292
53-292
68-901
22-395
53-292
53-292
74-88
24-391
38-454
34-417
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
23-23
24-54-1
53-302
119-192
156-284
68900
22-394
119-194
53-292
83-244
53-309
53-292
53-292
39-2294
119-193
A39-2300
74-129
53-302
53-292
53-292
68-901
22-395
53-292
A73-301
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
A73-302
A73-301-1
53-292
74-88
24-391
38-454
34-417
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
307
TAPPET, valve ..................................

SPRING, hinge pin.............................
NUT ...................................................
TOOL BOX, compressor-side ............
GUARD, mud.....................................
RUNNING BOARD, front ...................
SPACER, front...................................
TOOL BOX, front ...............................
NUT ...................................................
STEP, running board .........................
NUT ...................................................
NUT ...................................................
NUT ...................................................
SUPPORT, side tool box....................
TOOL BOX, engine-side ....................
BRACE, rear door ..............................
NUT ...................................................
NUT ...................................................
NUT ...................................................
RUNNING BOARD, rear ....................
SPACER, rear....................................
NUT ...................................................
HOSE ASSEMBLY, in front tool .........
box.
HOSE ASSEMBLY, in tool boxes.......
HOSE ASSEMBLY, in tool boxes.......
NUT ...................................................
SPRING.............................................
PLATE ...............................................
SCREW, cap .....................................
8
2
12
1
2
1
2
1
2
2
8
14
4
4
1
2
8
32
8
24
1
2
4
1
4
5
8
8
4
4
8

Fig
No.
Index
No.
108
108
108
108
108
108
108
108
7
8
9
10
11
12
15
16
110
110
110
110
110
110
110
110
110
110
110
110
110
110
110
Code
No.
Part No.
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
24-392
38-455
22-398
22-298-1
192-5
105-433
B20-1
34-235

Code
No.
Federal supply
class and item
identification No.
Description
Part No.
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
24-392
38-455
22-398
22-298-1
192-5
105-433
B20-1
34-235
15A88-237
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
5310-186-7403
...............................
1
2
770
770
88-40
88-83
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
770
88-11
88-9
88-237
88-36
88-72
88-74
88-44
88-17
88-363
88-390
88-10
88-260
88-229
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
...............................
308
PLATE, spring....................................
PLATE, threaded ...............................
SPACER, 1/8 .....................................
SPACER, 3/8 .....................................
BUMPER ...........................................
STUD.................................................
WASHER, flat ....................................
SCREW, cap .....................................
MAINTENANCE TOOLS AS- ...........
SEMBLY.
PLIERS..............................................
WRENCH, spark plug and com- .......
pressor nuts.
WRENCH, open end, 3/8 x 7/16 ........
WRENCH, open end, x 9/16 ........
TOOL BAG ........................................
HAMMER...........................................
WRENCH, 11 in. automobile.............
SCREW DRIVER, 6 in .......................
PIN PUNCH .......................................
WRENCH, box socket, 5/8 x .........
WRENCH, box socket, 11/16 x 13/16
WRENCH, dwarf box, 5/8 x ...........
FEELER GAGE .................................
WRENCH, adjustable ........................
SCREWDRIVER, 2 in ...................
Quantity
per
unit
8
4
4
4
4
4
8
8
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
APPENDIX III
ON-EQUIPMENT TOOLS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Pliers
9 Drift
Spark plug wrench
10 Box socket wrench 11/16" x
Open end wrench - x 9/16"
13/16
Open end wrench 3/8 x 7/16"
11 Box socket wrench x 9/16
Tool bag
12 Box socket wrench 5/8" x
Ball peen hammer
13 Feeler gage
Monkey wrench
14 Crescent wrench
Screwdriver
15 Screwdriver
Figure 110. On-equipment tools.
309
INDEX
Paragraphs
Accessory drive ....................................................................................................................... 220
Inspection .................................................................................................................. 220b
Installation ................................................................................................................. 220c
Removal .................................................................................................................... 220a
Aftercooler ............................................................................................................................... 117
Cleaning and inspection ............................................................................................ 117b
Description ................................................................................................................. 111
Reassembly and installation...................................................................................... 117c
Removal and disassembly ........................................................................................ 117a
Aftercooler to receiver connection........................................................................................... 116
Installation ................................................................................................................. 116c
Removal .................................................................................................................... 116a
After-operation services ...........................................................................................................45f
Air cleaners, compressor......................................................................................................... 128
Installation ................................................................................................................. 123c
Removal .................................................................................................................... 123a
Air cleaners, engine.................................................................................................................. 76
Air cylinder, shutter................................................................................................................... 88
Cleaning and inspection ............................................................................................. 83c
Disassembly ............................................................................................................... 83b
Installation .................................................................................................................. 83e
Reassembly................................................................................................................ 83d
Removal ..................................................................................................................... 83a
Air discharge manifold............................................................................................................. 124
Installation ................................................................................................................. 124c
Removal .................................................................................................................... 124a
Air filter, shutter:
Cleaning ...................................................................................................................... 82
Disassembly ............................................................................................................... 82b
Installation .................................................................................................................. 82e
Reassembly ............................................................................................................... 82 d
Removal ..................................................................................................................... 82a
Air filter, controlline .................................................................................................................. 106
Air hose, hose reels................................................................................................................. 112
Installation ................................................................................................................. 112c
Removal .................................................................................................................... 112a
Air pressure gage:
Description ............................................................................................................. 21, 100e
Replacement ............................................................................................................. 102d
Air receiver:
Description ................................................................................................................. 111
Inspection and cleaning.............................................................................................. 210
Installation .................................................................................................................. 212
Removal ..................................................................................................................... 209
Repair ......................................................................................................................... 211
310
Page
229
229
229
229
128
123
116
123
123
121
122
122
121
41
183
183
133
133
63
73
74
74
75
74
73
134
135
136
134
71
72
72
72
71
104
116
116
116
116
25, 97
102
115
215
216
215
216
Paragraphs
Page
Air receiver and hose reels, description, general ..................................................................... 3 d
9
Air receiver service valves....................................................................................................... 114
119
Ammeter:
26, 97
Description ............................................................................................................. 24, 100a
100
Replacement ............................................................................................................. 102a
40
At-halt services ........................................................................................................................ 45e
Batteries ................................................................................................................................... 90
81
82
Checking specific gravity............................................................................................ 90c
81
Cleaning ..................................................................................................................... 90a
81
Filling cells.................................................................................................................. 90b
85
Installation .................................................................................................................. 90h
82
Removal ..................................................................................................................... 90d
249
Storage ...................................................................................................................... 236e
Bearing, main:
233
Inspection .................................................................................................................. 222b
235
Installation ................................................................................................................. 222d
232
Removal .................................................................................................................... 222a
Bearings, connecting rod:
287
Inspection .................................................................................................................. 223b
238
Installation ................................................................................................................. 223c
235
Removal .................................................................................................................... 223a
39
Before-operation services ....................................................................................................... 45c
Brush replacement:
87
Charging generator .................................................................................................... 92b
Starting motor.............................................................................................................. 94
90
Camshaft and gear.................................................................................................................. 224
239
239
Inspection .................................................................................................................. 224b
239
Installation ................................................................................................................. 224c
239
Removal .................................................................................................................... 224a
241
Camshaft bushing, inspection ................................................................................................ 225 b
Carburetor:
65
Adjustment ................................................................................................................. 77b
Cleaning and inspection ............................................................................................. 186
172
63, 169
Description ............................................................................................................. 77a, 184
Disassembly ............................................................................................................... 185
169
174
Float level adjustment ............................................................................................... 187g
67
Installation .................................................................................................................. 78b
Reassembly................................................................................................................ 187
173
67
Removal ..................................................................................................................... 78a
33
Care of lubricants .................................................................................................................... 42a
Chain saw:
156
Adjusting chain tension ............................................................................................. 165b
Description ................................................................................................................. 161
154
156
Lubrication................................................................................................................. 166a
Operation.................................................................................................................... 164
155
Precautions ................................................................................................................ 163
155
157
Preparing for storage................................................................................................. 165d
Servicing..................................................................................................................... 165
156
156
Sharpening the chain................................................................................................. 165c
Tabulated data ........................................................................................................... 162
154
Check and bleed valve ............................................................................................................ 105
104
104
Adjustment ................................................................................................................ 105c
311
Paragraphs
Installation ................................................................................................................. 105b
Location...................................................................................................................... 12a
Purpose ...................................................................................................................... 12b
Replacement ............................................................................................................. 105a
Choke Control:
Description ............................................................................................................. 20, 100h
Replacement ............................................................................................................. 103c
Circular saw:
Changing blades........................................................................................................ 160a
Description ................................................................................................................. 156
Lubrication................................................................................................................. 160b
Operation.................................................................................................................... 159
Precautions ................................................................................................................ 158
Servicing..................................................................................................................... 160
Tabulated data ........................................................................................................... 157
Clay digger:
Description ................................................................................................................. 136
Lubrication................................................................................................................. 140a
Precautions ................................................................................................................ 138
Preparing for storage................................................................................................. 140b
Servicing..................................................................................................................... 140
Tabulated data ........................................................................................................... 137
Cleaning:
Fuel lines ..................................................................................................................... 71
Fuel pump ................................................................................................................... 74
Fuel tank...................................................................................................................... 72
Coil, ignition, description......................................................................................................... 200b
Compressor air cleaners ......................................................................................................... 123
Compressor cylinder bank knocks ........................................................................................... 58
Compressor cylinder head ...................................................................................................... 126
Compressor valve assembly ................................................................................................... 125
Purpose ...................................................................................................................... 10b
Location...................................................................................................................... 10a
Connecting rod:
Inspection .................................................................................................................. 223b
Installation ................................................................................................................. 223c
Removal .................................................................................................................... 223a
Control line air filter ................................................................................................................. 106
Cleaning and inspection ............................................................................................ 106c
Disassembly .............................................................................................................. 106b
Installation ................................................................................................................. 106e
Reassembly............................................................................................................... 106d
Removal .................................................................................................................... 106a
Cooling system:
Flushing ....................................................................................................................... 80
Extreme cold-protection ............................................................................................. 34a
Extreme heat-protection ............................................................................................. 35a
Crankcase and cylinder sleeves.............................................................................................. 225
Inspection .................................................................................................................. 225b
Installation ................................................................................................................. 225c
Removal .................................................................................................................... 225a
Crankcase covers.................................................................................................................... 216
312
Page
104
21
21
104
25, 99
103
153
151
153
152
152
153
151
143
144
143
144
144
148
58
61
58
203
133
56
137
136
19
19
237
238
235
104
107
107
107
107
104
69
80
81
240
241
241
240
219
Paragraphs
Inspection .................................................................................................................. 216b
Installation ................................................................................................................. 216c
Removal .................................................................................................................... 216a
Crankshaft and main bearings ................................................................................................ 222
Installation ................................................................................................................. 222d
Inspection .................................................................................................................. 222b
Removal .................................................................................................................... 222a
Cylinder head, compressor ..................................................................................................... 126
Cleaning and inspection ......................................................................................................... 126b
Installation ................................................................................................................. 126c
Removal .................................................................................................................... 126a
Cylinder head cover................................................................................................................. 119
Installation ................................................................................................................. 119c
Removal .................................................................................................................... 119a
Cylinder head, engine:
Disassembly .............................................................................................................. 122b
Installation ................................................................................................................. 122e
Reassembly............................................................................................................... 122d
Removal .................................................................................................................... 122a
Cylinder sleeves ...................................................................................................................... 225
Data, engineering:
Recommended wrench torques ................................................................................. 234
Table of clearances .................................................................................................... 235
Data, tabulated .......................................................................................................................... 5
Domestic shipment .................................................................................................................. 237
Demolition:
Burning ...................................................................................................................... 240c
Explosives ................................................................................................................. 239a
General....................................................................................................................... 238
Mechanical means .................................................................................................... 239b
Misuse ....................................................................................................................... 240e
Scattering and concealing ......................................................................................... 240b
Submersion ............................................................................................................... 240d
Training ...................................................................................................................... 241
Weapons fire ............................................................................................................. 240a
Description, general................................................................................................................... 3
Distributor:
Cleaning, inspection, and repair................................................................................. 202
Description ................................................................................................................. 200
Disassembly ............................................................................................................... 201
Final assembly............................................................................................................ 204
Installation .................................................................................................................. 97b
Reassembly................................................................................................................ 203
Removal ..................................................................................................................... 97a
Distributor point adjustment...................................................................................................... 95
Drain cocks:
Installation ................................................................................................................. 115c
Location...................................................................................................................... 28a
Purpose ...................................................................................................................... 28b
Removal .................................................................................................................... 115a
313
Page
221
221
219
232
235
233
282
137
137
137
137
124
125
125
124
131
131
132
131
129
240
247
247
12
251
252
251
251
252
252
252
252
253
252
4
206
203
205
210
93
210
93
91
121
121
27
28
121
Paragraphs
During-operation services ....................................................................................................... 45d
Electrical system:
Description .................................................................................................................. 89
Extreme cold-protection ............................................................................................. 34d
Engine:
Air cleaners ................................................................................................................. 76
Cylinder head ............................................................................................................. 122
Compressor:
Description ................................................................................................. 3b, 118
Installation ..................................................................................................... 215
Removal ........................................................................................................ 214
Does not develop full power ........................................................................................ 52
Fails to start................................................................................................................. 49
Knocks ........................................................................................................................ 53
Manifolds .................................................................................................................... 120
Misfires ........................................................................................................................ 50
Overheats.................................................................................................................... 51
Engineering data ................................................................................................................. 234, 235
Equipment:
New .............................................................................................................................. 6
Used ............................................................................................................................. 7
Exposure to salt air.................................................................................................................. 37b
Explosives, use in demolition ................................................................................................. 239a
Failure to pump up pressure .................................................................................................... 56
Fan
..................................................................................................................................... 88
Installation .................................................................................................................. 88b
Removal ..................................................................................................................... 88a
Fan belt replacement................................................................................................................ 85
Fan guard ................................................................................................................................. 87
Installation .................................................................................................................. 87b
Removal ..................................................................................................................... 87a
Faulty carburetion..................................................................................................................... 54
Field and depot maintenance ...............................................................................................176-235
Field and depot maintenance tools and equipment................................................................. 179
Filters, oil ..................................................................................................................................42i
Fire extinguisher ....................................................................................................................... 33
Description ................................................................................................................. 33a
Operation.................................................................................................................... 33b
Refilling....................................................................................................................... 33c
Flushing the cooling system ..................................................................................................... 80
Flywheel and rear support:
Inspection and cleaning............................................................................................. 221b
Installation ................................................................................................................. 221c
Removal. ................................................................................................................... 221a
Foundation plan.........................................................................................................................5f
Frame ................................................................................................................................. 214b, c
Fuel level gage, description...................................................................................................... 26
Fuel lines, cleaning................................................................................................................... 71
Fuel pump:
Cleaning ...................................................................................................................... 74
Description ................................................................................................................. 180
Disassembly ............................................................................................................... 181
314
Page
40
79
31
63
129
8, 124
219
217
52
51
63
125
51
52
247
16
18
32
251
53
78
78
78
76
78
78
78
53
163
163
37
30
30
30
30
69
231
231
231
14
217, 222
27
58
61
165
165
Paragraphs
Inspection and cleaning.............................................................................................. 182
Installation .................................................................................................................. 75b
Reassembly................................................................................................................ 183
Removal ..................................................................................................................... 75a
Fuel tank:
Draining and cleaning.................................................................................................. 72
Installation .................................................................................................................. 78b
Removal ..................................................................................................................... 73a
Fuel system:
Cold weather protection.............................................................................................. 34c
Description .................................................................................................................. 70
General lubrication information ................................................................................................ 41
Generator:
Adjustment of drive belt.............................................................................................. 92a
Brush replacement ..................................................................................................... 92b
Cleaning and inspection ............................................................................................ 196d
Disassembly . ............................................................................................................ 196c
Installation .................................................................................................................. 92d
Reassembly............................................................................................................... 196e
Removal ..................................................................................................................... 92c
Testing........................................................................................................................196f
Generator circuit, description .................................................................................................. 89d
Governor:
Adjustment ................................................................................................................ 110c
Description ................................................................................................................. 205
Disassembly ............................................................................................................... 206
Inspection ................................................................................................................... 207
Installation ................................................................................................................. 110b
Reassembly................................................................................................................ 208
Removal .................................................................................................................... 110a
Grease gun kit:
Correcting air leaks ................................................................................................... 170b
Correcting for insufficient dispensing ........................................................................ 170 c
Filling by suction........................................................................................................ 169a
Filling manually.......................................................................................................... 169b
Description ................................................................................................................. 166
Lubrication................................................................................................................. 170a
Operation................................................................................................................... 169a
Precautions ................................................................................................................ 168
Preparing for storage................................................................................................. 170d
Servicing..................................................................................................................... 170
Tabulated data ........................................................................................................... 167
Growler test ............................................................................................................................ 196d
High or low air pressure gage reading...................................................................................... 60
Hose reel and service valve .................................................................................................... 113
Disassembly .............................................................................................................. 113b
Installation ................................................................................................................. 113e
Reassembly............................................................................................................... 113d
Removal .................................................................................................................... 113a
Hose reels, description............................................................................................................. 3d
315
Page
167
63
167
63
58
61
61
30
58
33
86
87
184
181
89
185
88
187
81
111
211
211
213
112
213
112
159
160
158
169
157
159
159
158
160
159
158
184
54
116
116
116
119
117
116
9
Paragraphs
Hose reel:
Air hoses .................................................................................................................... 112
Lock pin ....................................................................................................................... 16
Service valves ............................................................................................................. 14
Hourmeter:
Description ............................................................................................................. 25, 100c
Replacement ............................................................................................................. 102e
Housing:
Description ................................................................................................................. 127
Inspection and repair............................................................................................................... 129
Installation ............................................................................................................................... 130
Removal .................................................................................................................................. 128
Identification plate...................................................................................................................... 4
Ignition circuit, description ....................................................................................................... 89b
Ignition coil, description .......................................................................................................... 200b
Ignition switch:
Description ............................................................................................................. 18, 100d
Replacement ............................................................................................................. 103b
Ignition timing adjustment......................................................................................................... 98
Inspection of new equipment.................................................................................................... 6c
Inspections, operator maintenance ......................................................................................... 45 a
Instrument panel:
Description ................................................................................................................. 100
Installation ................................................................................................................. 101b
Removal .................................................................................................................... 101a
Interference, sources of............................................................................................................ 66
Lifting bail:
Installation ................................................................................................................. 216c
Removal .................................................................................................................... 216a
Limited storage ........................................................................................................................ 236
Lock pin, hose reel ................................................................................................................... 16
Low charging rate ..................................................................................................................... 62
Low oil pressure ....................................................................................................................... 61
Lubricants, care of ................................................................................................................... 42b
Lubrication:
Detailed ....................................................................................................................... 42
General........................................................................................................................ 41
In extreme cold........................................................................................................... 34b
In extreme heat .......................................................................................................... 35b
Point of ....................................................................................................................... 42b
Magnetic switch:
Description ............................................................................................................. 27, 199a
Disassembly .............................................................................................................. 199c
Inspection and cleaning............................................................................................. 199d
Installation .................................................................................................................. 99b
Reassembly............................................................................................................... 199e
Removal ..................................................................................................................... 99a
Testing........................................................................................................................199f
Main bearings:
Inspection .................................................................................................................. 222b
Installation ................................................................................................................. 222d
Removal .................................................................................................................... 222a
316
Page
116
23
22
26, 97
102
137
139
139
139
12
79
203
28, 97
103
94
16
88
97
100
99
55
221
219
249
28
55
54
33
33
33
30
31
36
27, 200
201
201
96
201
96
203
233
235
232
Paragraphs
Maintenance and safety precautions........................................................................................ 46
Maintenance, operator.............................................................................................................. 45
Manifold, air discharge:
Installation ................................................................................................................. 124c
Removal .................................................................................................................... 124a
Manifolds, engine:
Installation ................................................................................................................. 120c
Removal .................................................................................................................... 120a
Methods of suppression ........................................................................................................... 67
Mica, undercutting .................................................................................................................. 196d
Nail driver:
Description............................................................................................................................... 151
Lubrication 1 ........................................................................................................................... 155a
Operation 1............................................................................................................................. 154
Precautions.............................................................................................................................. 153
Preparing for storage.............................................................................................................. 155b
Servicing.................................................................................................................................. 155
Tabulated data......................................................................................................................... 152
New equipment.......................................................................................................................... 6
Inspection ................................................................................................................................. 6c
Service 6d................................................................................................................................. 6d
Oil filler and breather cap ........................................................................................................ 42e
Oil filters....................................................................................................................................42i
Oil intake screen...................................................................................................................... 218
Installation .............................................................................................................................. 218c
Removal ..................................................................................................................................218a
Oil pans ................................................................................................................................... 217
Inspection and cleaning.......................................................................................................... 217b
Installation .............................................................................................................................. 217c
Removal ................................................................................................................................. 217a
Oil pressure gage:
Description........................................................................................................................... 22, 100g
Replacement .......................................................................................................................... 102c
Oil pump and oil lines .............................................................................................................. 219
Cleaning and inspection ......................................................................................................... 219c
Disassembly ........................................................................................................................... 219b
Installation .............................................................................................................................. 219e
Reassembly............................................................................................................................ 219d
Removal ................................................................................................................................. 219a
Operation:
Immediately after lubrication ................................................................................................... 42d
Extreme cold ............................................................................................................................ 34
Extreme heat ............................................................................................................................ 35
Salt water area ......................................................................................................................... 37
Under dusty or sandy conditions .............................................................................................. 36
Operator maintenance.............................................................................................................. 45
Organizational maintenance..................................................................................................... 47
Organization maintenance instructions .................................................................................38-130
317
Page
42
38
135
136
134
127
127
125
55
184
149
151
150
149
151
151
150
16
16
36
37
224
224
224
224
222
222
224
222
26, 99
101
225
227
227
228
228
225
36
30
31
31
31
38
42
33
Paragraphs
Painting43................................................................................................................................. 38
Paving breaker:
Description ................................................................................................................. 131
Lubrication................................................................................................................. 135a
Operation.................................................................................................................... 134
Precautions ................................................................................................................ 133
Servicing..................................................................................................................... 135
Tabulated data ........................................................................................................... 132
Pilot light:
Description .................................................................................................................100f
Replacement ............................................................................................................. 103d
Pistons, connecting rods and rings:.
Inspection .................................................................................................................. 223b
Installation ................................................................................................................. 223c
Removal .................................................................................................................... 223a
Pneumatic tool accessories:
Description ................................................................................................................. 171
Operation.................................................................................................................... 174
Precautions ................................................................................................................ 173
Servicing..................................................................................................................... 175
Tabulated data ........................................................................................................... 172
Preservatives, removal of......................................................................................................... 6b
Pressure control system:
Description ............................................................................................................. 3c, 104a
Loading cycle............................................................................................................. 104b
Unloading cycle ......................................................................................................... 104c
Preventive maintenance, general............................................................................................. 44
Pump circulation, water ........................................................................................................... 79a
Radiator:
Installation .................................................................................................................. 88b
Removal ..................................................................................................................... 88a
Radio interference, sources of ................................................................................................. 66
Radio suppression:
Definition...................................................................................................................... 65
Methods....................................................................................................................... 67
System, replacement................................................................................................... 69
Testing......................................................................................................................... 68
Rear engine support................................................................................................................ 221
Receiver service valve:
Description .................................................................................................................. 13
Disassembly .............................................................................................................. 114b
Installation ................................................................................................................. 114e
Reassembly............................................................................................................... 114d
Removal .................................................................................................................... 114a
Record and report forms ........................................................................................................... 2
Removal of preservatives......................................................................................................... 6b
Replaceable parts................................................................................................................ (app. II)
Replacing suppression material ............................................................................................... 69
Reporting deficiencies ............................................................................................................. 45b
Rock drill:
Description ................................................................................................................. 146
318
Page
140
142
142
141
142
142
141
97
103
237
238
236
160
162
162
162
161
16
9, 104
104
104
38
67
78
78
55
55
55
57
57
231
121
22
119
121
121
119
3
16
256
57
39
147
Paragraphs
Lubrication................................................................................................................. 150a
Operation.................................................................................................................... 149
Precautions ................................................................................................................ 148
Servicing..................................................................................................................... 150
Tabulated data ........................................................................................................... 147
Safety valve .............................................................................................................................. 15
Salt air exposure...................................................................................................................... 37b
Scope ...................................................................................................................................... 1
Screen, oil intake ..................................................................................................................... 218
Service, new equipment ........................................................................................................... 6d
Service valves ..................................................................................................................... 113, 114
Shipment and limited storage.............................................................................................. 236, 237
Shipment, domestic................................................................................................................. 237
Shutter air cylinder:
Cleaning and inspection ............................................................................................. 83c
Disassembly ............................................................................................................... 83b
Installation .................................................................................................................. 83e
Reassembly................................................................................................................ 83d
Removal ..................................................................................................................... 83a
Shutter air filter:
Cleaning ..................................................................................................................... 82c
Disassembly ............................................................................................................... 82b
Installation .................................................................................................................. 82e
Reassembly................................................................................................................ 82d
Removal ..................................................................................................................... 82a
Shutter assembly:
Installation .................................................................................................................. 84b
Removal ..................................................................................................................... 84a
Shutter system, description ..................................................................................................... 79d
Shutterstat:
Adjustment ................................................................................................................. 189
Description ................................................................................................................. 188
Disassembly ............................................................................................................... 190
Inspection ................................................................................................................... 191
Installation .................................................................................................................. 81b
Location...................................................................................................................... 17a
Purpose ...................................................................................................................... 17b
Reassembly................................................................................................................ 192
Removal ..................................................................................................................... 81a
Slowdown assembly:
Adjustment .................................................................................................................109f
Disassembly .............................................................................................................. 109b
Location...................................................................................................................... 11a
Installation ................................................................................................................. 109e
Purpose ...................................................................................................................... 11b
Reassembly............................................................................................................... 109d
Removal .................................................................................................................... 109a
Sources of interference ............................................................................................................ 66
Spark plug and cables.............................................................................................................. 96
Special organizational maintenance
tools and equipment .................................................................................................... 40
319
Page
149
148
148
149
149
148
23
32
3
224
16
116, 119
249, 251
251
74
74
75
74
73
72
72
72
72
71
76
76
69
175
175
177
177
70
23
23
179
69
112
111
111
20
112
20
112
111
65
92
33
Paragraphs
Spring mounting, unit:
Description ................................................................................................................. 230
Installation .................................................................................................................. 233
Removal ..................................................................................................................... 231
Stalls before loading................................................................................................................. 57
Starting circuit, description ...................................................................................................... 89c
Starting motor:
Brush replacement ...................................................................................................... 94
Description ................................................................................................................ 198a
Disassembly .............................................................................................................. 198c
Inspection and cleaning............................................................................................. 198d
Installation .................................................................................................................. 93b
Reassembly................................................................................................................ 198
Removal ..................................................................................................................... 93a
Testing........................................................................................................................198f
Starting switch:
Description ............................................................................................................. 19, 100b
Replacement ............................................................................................................. 103a
Starting the compressor ........................................................................................................... 30
Stopping the compressor ......................................................................................................... 31
Storage; limited........................................................................................................................ 236
Submersion in salt water ......................................................................................................... 37a
Suppression, definition radio .................................................................................................... 65
Suppression:
Methods....................................................................................................................... 67
System:
Replacement ............................................................................................................... 69
Testing......................................................................................................................... 68
Tabulated data........................................................................................................................... 5
Tachometer drive:
Inspection .................................................................................................................. 216b
Installation ................................................................................................................. 216c
Removal .................................................................................................................... 216a
Temperature gage, water:
Description ..............................................................................................................23, 100i
Replacement ............................................................................................................. 102b
Testing armature .................................................................................................................. 196d(2)
Timing adjustment, ignition....................................................................................................... 98
Tools and equipment:
Field and depot maintenance ..................................................................................... 179
On-equipment.............................................................................................................. 39
Organizational maintenance........................................................................................ 40
Tool boxes and running boards:
Description ................................................................................................................. 226
Inspection and repair.................................................................................................. 228
Installation .................................................................................................................. 229
Removal ..................................................................................................................... 227
Training, demolition ................................................................................................................. 241
Troubleshooting section, use of ............................................................................................... 48
Unloader pilot:
Adjustment ................................................................................................................. 107
Chatters ....................................................................................................................... 59
320
Page
246
246
246
246
54
79
90
196
196
197
89
199
89
200
24, 97
102
29
29
249
31
55
55
57
57
12
221
221
219
26, 99
101
184
94
163
3
33
241
245
245
243
253
50
107
54
Paragraphs
Valve............................................................................................................................. 9
Disassembly .............................................................................................................. 108b
Installation ................................................................................................................. 108e
Reassembly............................................................................................................... 108d
Removal .................................................................................................................... 108a
Unusual noise in air receiver or compressor
cylinder head ............................................................................................................... 55
Unusual noise........................................................................................................................ 45d(3)
Unusual operation ................................................................................................................. 45d(2)
Used equipment ........................................................................................................................ 7
Valve assemblies, compressor:
Installation ................................................................................................................. 125c
Removal .................................................................................................................... 125a
Valve clearance adjustment .................................................................................................... 121
Valves, engine ......................................................................................................................... 122
Voltage regulator:
Cleaning and inspection ............................................................................................ 197d
Disassembly .............................................................................................................. 197c
Installation .................................................................................................................. 91b
Reassembly............................................................................................................... 197e
Removal ..................................................................................................................... 91a
Test and adjustment...................................................................................................197f
Water pump:
Circulation................................................................................................................... 79a
Disassembly ............................................................................................................... 193
Reassembly................................................................................................................ 195
Removal and installation ............................................................................................. 86
Wood drill:
Description ................................................................................................................. 141
Lubrication................................................................................................................. 145a
Operation.................................................................................................................... 144
Precautions ................................................................................................................ 143
Preparing for storage................................................................................................. 145c
Replacing wood chuck .............................................................................................. 145b
Servicing..................................................................................................................... 145
Tabulated data ........................................................................................................... 142
Page
18
108
108
110
109
108
53
40
40
18
136
136
136
129
129
189
187
85
189
85
189
67
181
180
181
76
144
146
146
146
147
146
146
146
[AG 412.3 (28 Apn 54)]

BY ORDER OF THE SECRETARY OF THE ARMY:
M. B. RIDGWAY,
General, United States Army,
Chief of Staff.
OFFICIAL:
JOHN A. KLEIN,
The Adjutant General.
321
DISTRIBUTION:
Active Army:
Tec Svc, DA (1)
Engr Bd (1)
AFF (3)
Army AA Comd (2)
OS Maj Comd (2)
OS Base Comd (1)
Log Comd (2)
MDW (2)
Armies (3)
Corps (1)
Div (1)
Engr Brig (1)
Engr Regt (1)
Ft & Cp (1)
USMA (2)
Engr Sch (25)
Gen Depots (2)
ColuTnbus Gen Depot (10)
Engr Sec, Gen Depots (10)
Engr Depots (10)
POE (2)
OS Sup Agencies (1)
Arsenals (2)
Engr Dist (1)
Mil Dist (1)
Units organized under following
T/O&E:
515, Engr Bn (Cmbt) (Div)-367A, Engr
(1)
5-16), Hq&Hq Svc Co Engr Cmbt
Bn (1)
5-35A, Engr
5-35A, Engr Bn (Cmbt)
(Army) (1)
5-36A, Hq, Hq & Svc Co,
(Engr Cmbt Bn) (1)
5-37A, Co, Engr Bn (Army)
(1)
5-97A, Engr Co (Cam) (1)
5-138A, Engr Co (Float
Bridge) (2)
5-139A, Engr Co (Pontoon

Bridge) (2)
5-157, Engr Co (Fld Maint)
(2)
5-215, Armd Engr Bn (1)
5-216, Hq, Hq & Svc Co, Armd
Engr Bn (1)
5-217, Co, Armd Engr Bn (1)
5-218, Co, (Bridge) Armd Engr
Bn (1)
5-225A, Abn Engr Bn (1)
5-226A, Hq, Hq & Svc Co, Abn
Engr Bn (2)
5-227A, Abn Engr Bn (1)
5-262, Hq & Hq Co, Engr Gp
(Maint & Sup) (2)
5-267, Engr Co, (Depot) (2)
5-278A, Engr Co (Depot Maint)
(2)
5-315A, Engr Bn (Cons) (1)
5-317, Co, Engr Bn, (Cons)
(1)
5-327, Engr Co (Pipeline) (2)
5-328A, Engr Co (Hv Eqp)
(1)
5-329A, Engr Co. (Port Cons)
5-329A, Engr Co. (Port Cons)
(1)
5-367A, Engr Co (Lt Eqp)
Co (Lt Eqp)
5-387, Engr Co (Forestry) (1)
5-415A, , Engr Avn Bn (2)
Bn (Cmbt) 5-417A, Co, Engr Avn Bn (2)
5-500 (AA through AD), Engr
Bn, (Admin & Hq Teams)
(1)
5-526A, Engr Bn, (Shore) (1)
5-527A, Co, Engr Bn (Shore)
(1)
9-500 (AA, AB, AC), Ord Co
(Admin Teams) (2)
20-300A, Amph Spt Brig (1)
NG: Same as Active Army except allowance is one copy for each unit.
USAR: None.
Unless otherwise noted, distribution applies to CONUS and overseas. For explanation of abbreviations used see SR 32050-1.
*U.S. GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE: 1984-421-647/ 10382 REGION NO. 4

322
PIN: 027473-000

TM 5-5065 Le Roi Compressor, 1954

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

TM 5-5065 Le Roi Compressor, 1954

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

TM 5-5065 Le Roi Compressor, 1954

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

TM 5-5065

DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY TECHNICAL MANUAL

DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY

Doing so removes the

TM 5-5065, 11 August 1954, is changed as follows:

Page 42. Paragraph 47.

The Army Equipment Record

APPENDIX IV. Page 3. Paragraph 3. (As changed by C 1)

Figure 16.1 (Added). Daily preventive maintenance services.

AIR COMPRESSOR BATTERIES. Tighten loose cables and mountings. Remove

AIR COMPRESSOR FUEL TANK. Add fuel as required.

FAN BELT. Check for worn, frayed. or cracked belt.

GENERATOR BELT. Check for worn, frayed. or cracked belt.

NOTE 1. OPERATION During operation observe for any unusual noise or

Figure 16.1. Continued.

Figure 16.2 (Added). Quarterly preventive maintenance services.

TRUCK COMPRESSOR DRIVE BELT. Proper adjustment is a deflection of 1/2 inch

LIGHTS AND REFLECTORS. Replace burned-out lamps. Replace defective lights

AIR COMPRESSOR. Clean and oil air strainer.

AIR COMPRESSOR BATTERIES, Tighten loose cables end mounting. Remove

Tighten loose mounting and

AFTERCOOLER. Clean clogged air passages. Tighten loose mounting. Replace

UNLOADED PILOT. Adjust if necessary. Proper adjustment is to load at 90

FAN BELT. Proper adjustment is a deflection of 3/4 to 1 inch midway between

GENERATOR BELT. Proper adjustment is a deflection of 1/2 inch midway

AIR COMPRESSOR DISTRIBUTOR, Replace pitted or burned points. Proper point

FUEL BOWL. Drain sediment. Replace defective fuel pump.

AIR HOSES. Replace worn or frayed hoses.

AIR COMPRESSOR CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTS. Tighten loose mounting.

Figure 16.2. -Continued

NOTE 4. AIR SYSTEM DRAINCOCKS. Drain condensate.

By Order of the Secretary of the Army:

* U.S. GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE : 1984 O - 421-647 (10408)

TM 5-5065, 11 August 1954, is changed as follows:

a. Source Codes. The information provided in each column is as follows;

Section II. BASIC ISSUE ITEMS LIST

Federal stock No.

GROUP 26-ACCESSORIES, PUBLICATIONS,

12------.------------------------------------------------------------------------- DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY LUBRICATION-------------------------------------ORDER LO 5-5065.

----------------------------------------------------------------------- DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY TECHNICAL BULLETIN TB 5-5065-1.

EXTINGUISHER, FIRE VAPORIZING LIQUID:

a. Service. To clean, to preserve, and to replenish fuel and lubricants.

MAINTENANCE ALLOCATION CHART

Components and related operation

X --------- Ring gear.

---- ---------- Reface.

Components and related operation

Components and related operation

---- ----------- Install kit.

FIRE FIGHTING EQUIPMENT.

BY ORDER OF THE SECRETARY OF THE, ARMY:

Detroit Engr Dist (1)

NG: State AG (3).

* U.S. GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE : 1984 0 - 421-647 (10414)

COMPRESSOR, AIR, TRUCK MOUNTED, GASOLINE DRIVEN,

*This manual supersede TM 5-5065. 13 March 1953.

FIELD AND DEPOT

Introduction......................................................................................................... 176, 177

SHIPMENT, LIMITED STORAGE AND DEMOLITION TO PREVENT ENEMY USE